JP2018166787A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can reduce difference in prize balls.SOLUTION: A game machine conducts a discharging behavior by a regulation member 1600 which is configured to be capable of ending while remaining balls entering a storage flow passage 1231, thereby associating a ball quantity capable of entering a first specific winning port 1000a in each round. Thus, difference in prize balls can be reduced throughout the entire jackpot game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 24

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter a big winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball cannot be released for a short time (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-181572

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there may be a large difference in prize balls throughout the jackpot game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the difference in prize balls.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance. An entrance switching means that can be switched between a first state that can be guided to the entry entrance and a second state in which the ball that flows down from the upstream side of the entrance can not be guided to the entrance, and the entrance to the entrance A game machine comprising: a detection means for detecting an incoming ball, wherein the storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the entrance, and the incoming ball switching means are switched to the second state. And a discharge means for discharging the ball stored in the storage means from the storage means, and the entrance switching means can be switched to the first state before the discharge action by the discharge means ends. The

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the difference in the prize balls can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the game of launching the gaming ball toward the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, it is possible to pass through the second entrance in association with the number of balls that have passed through the first entrance. The number of spheres can be changed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XI-XI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XII-XII line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XII-XII line | wire of FIG. It is a back perspective view of the 1st variable winning device. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is a back perspective view of the 1st variable winning device. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XIX-XIX line | wire of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20 (a), and (c) is the first It is a rear view of a variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXIb-XXIb in FIG. 21 (a), (c) is the first It is a rear view of a variable prize apparatus, (d) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize apparatus in the XXId-XXId line of FIG.21 (c). (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter and the hit in the normal symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening in a 1st action pattern, (b) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening in a 2nd action pattern. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning award in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 25. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XXVIII-XXVIII line of Drawing 27 (c). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific prize opening in a 4th operation pattern, and a 2nd specific prize opening, (b) is the 1st specific prize opening and the 1st in a 5th action pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning a prize mouths. It is a front view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31. It is a back perspective view of a covering front board. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XXXIVa-XXXIVa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st variable winning apparatus, (c) is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the XXXVc-XXXVc line | wire of FIG.35 (b). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the flow-down aspect of the ball | bowl which reached | attained the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a partial front view of a 1st variable winning device. It is a front view of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in a 6th action pattern, (b) is the time measurement of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in a 7th action pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in an 8th action pattern, (b) is the timing of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in a 9th action pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. It is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in a 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of the game board in a 5th embodiment. It is a partial rear view of a game board. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) And (b) is a partial rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific prize opening in the 11th action pattern, and the 2nd specific prize opening, and (b) is the 1st specific prize mouth and the 1st in the 12th action pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning a prize mouths. It is a partial front view of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the LII-LII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in a 13th action | operation pattern, (b) is the time measurement of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in a 14th action pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. It is a back perspective view of the covering front board in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view of the 1st variable winning device. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line | wire of FIG.35 (b). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line | wire of FIG.35 (b). It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in an 8th embodiment. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb in FIG. 63 (a), and (c) is a first view. It is a rear view of a variable prize apparatus, (d) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize apparatus in the LXIIId-LXIIId line | wire of FIG.63 (c). (A) is a rear view of a 1st variable winning apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the LXIVb-LXIVb line | wire of Fig.64 (a), (c) is 1st It is a rear view of a variable winning apparatus, (d) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the LXIVd-LXIVd line | wire of FIG.64 (c). It is the figure which showed the time change of the change of the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of a drive device, the position and state of a front-end | tip member, an opening-and-closing board, an auxiliary | assistant opening-and-closing member, and a control member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. (A) is a rear view of a 1st variable winning apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the LXXb-LXXb line | wire of Fig.70 (a), (c) is 1st It is a rear view of a variable prize apparatus, (d) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize apparatus in the LXXd-LXXd line | wire of FIG.70 (c). (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LXXIb-LXXIb in FIG. 71 (a), and (c) is the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of a variable prize apparatus, (d) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize apparatus in the LXXId-LXXId line | wire of FIG.71 (c). It is the figure which showed the time change of the change of the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of a drive device, the position and state of a front-end | tip member, an opening-and-closing board, an auxiliary | assistant opening-and-closing member, and a control member. It is the figure which showed the time change of the change of the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of a drive device, the position and state of a front-end | tip member, an opening-and-closing board, an auxiliary | assistant opening-and-closing member, and a control member. It is the figure which showed the time change of the change of the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of a drive device, the position and state of a front-end | tip member, an opening-and-closing board, an auxiliary | assistant opening-and-closing member, and a control member. It is a front view of the 1st variable prize device in a 10th embodiment. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed an example of the time change of the state of the 1st specific winning opening in the round game R, and the state of a movable member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79. It is a back perspective view of a covering front board. (A) to (c) is a partial front view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. (A) to (c) is a schematic front view of the protruding rib, the opening / closing means, and the second additional winning opening, schematically showing the arrangement of the protruding rib, the opening / closing means, and the second additional winning opening. (A) And (b) is a front view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in the notice effect performed in the round before a timing effect (operation effect) is performed, (b) is a timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in it. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in a timing effect (operation effect). (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the 5th round, (b) is in timing effect (operation effect) It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in a timing effect (operation effect). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content which alert | reports with the 3rd symbol display apparatus that the 6th round game is performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM in MPU of a main control apparatus, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st per category selection table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the opening-and-closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the opening-and-closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table It is. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening, interference member, and specific area in a 15th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specific winning opening, interference in a 16th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of a member and a specific area | region. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening, interference member, and specific area in a 17th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specific winning opening, interference in an 18th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of a member and a specific area | region. It is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening, interference member, and specific area in the 19th operation pattern. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening, interference member, and specific area in a 20th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specific winning opening, interference in a 21st operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of a member and a specific area | region. It is a model figure explaining the counter etc. which are provided in RAM of a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of a main controller. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus, (b) is the block diagram which showed the content of RAM. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the fluctuation | variation display data table among display data tables. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol variation process. It is the flowchart which showed the state command setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a prefetch process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot control process. It is the flowchart which showed the contents of the jackpot operation setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the opening / closing process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the ending process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the alerting | reporting process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the winning process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the abnormality process. It is a flowchart which shows a storage control process. 7 is a flowchart showing the contents of operation counter upper limit value setting processing 1; 6 is a flowchart showing the contents of operation counter upper limit value setting processing 2; It is the flowchart which showed the content of the storage valve operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows V prize winning process. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process. It is the flowchart which showed command determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hit related process. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot production process. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the display effect round command setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state monitoring process. It is the flowchart which showed the lamp output process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of button input monitoring and effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows a sphere number confirmation process. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit classification selection table 202b in a 2nd control example. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the opening-and-closing plate and auxiliary | assistant opening-and-closing member in a 22nd action pattern, (b) showed the time-change of opening and closing board and auxiliary opening-and-closing member in a 23rd action pattern. It is a figure and (c) is a figure showing time change of an opening-and-closing board and an auxiliary opening-and-closing member in the 24th operation pattern. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content which alert | reports with the 3rd symbol display apparatus that the 6th round game is performed. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM in MPU of the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st random number table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st classification selection table. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection table. It is the figure which showed the time change of the opening-and-closing plate, a solenoid, and a distribution device in the small hit A, and the time change of the opening-and-closing plate, the solenoid, and the distribution device in the small contact B.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 23, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (hereinafter also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 1000, the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin-made arc member 70 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are won, and the ball enters the normal entrance 67. When it passes, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probability variation state of the special symbol), For example, a special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 is referred to as “special design 1 lottery” and is performed for the entrance to the second entrance 640. The special symbol lottery to be called is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a that is normally closed is won for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). The release operation is repeated a maximum of 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls wins at the first specific winning port 1000a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  Note that there are six types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, “Big Jack C”, “Big Jack a”, “Big Jack b”, and “Big Jack c” (FIG. 22). reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific prize opening 1000a is configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and is configured to change the number of balls entered into the first variable prize winning device 1000.

  When the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. Each of the balls is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 (special If the number of reserved balls of symbol 2) remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. When both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. Easy state. That is, when the normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  In this embodiment, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special gaming state ends, and the special symbol lottery is After 100 times, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

  In this embodiment, when the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the special gaming state is finished, the probability change state of the special symbol is ended according to the number of times of the special symbol lottery. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a to be described later), from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 May be shifted to a high probability state of a special symbol (during special symbol change). In this case, after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c, which will be described later), the special symbol is in a short time state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

  Note that the number of lotteries for special symbols to which the above-described special symbol probability variation state (high probability state) is given is not limited to 100. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

  In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbol that is in the short time state of the normal symbol described above is not limited to 100. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probability is changing), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, the “special symbol low probability state” means a time when the special symbol is not being probable, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the special symbol probabilistic change.

  In addition, the normal symbol time-short state (short time medium) means a game state in which the normal symbol hit probability is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. In addition, the normal state means a game state (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) hit probability is increased) that is neither the probability change of the special symbol nor the short time of the normal symbol.

  During the probable change of the special symbol or during the short time of the normal symbol, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state A longer time is set in comparison with. When the electric accessory 640a is in an opened state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 in comparison with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction. That is, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction The number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit may be increased more than the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened, and It is good also as what changes at least one among the frequency | counts of opening of the electrically-driven accessory 640a. In addition, during the change of the probability of the special symbol or during the short time of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed. Only the hit probability of the second pattern) may be increased as compared with the normal state.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize) is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, the special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or the ball that has entered the first entrance 64 The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of balls is held for a maximum of 4 times for each type of entrance, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to jackpot a, jackpot b, jackpot c) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 using a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 as a trigger. The 3rd symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and the 2nd symbol is variablely displayed with the passage of a sphere at a normal entrance (through gate) 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit B”, “big hit C”, “big hit b”, “big hit c”, even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added. A variable display with the main symbols aligned is performed. On the other hand, if “big hit A” or “big hit a”, any number among all the numbers “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9” including an odd number is added. Fluctuation display in which main symbols to which are added is aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  Next, a display (right-handed navigator) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and that prompts the user to launch a ball aiming at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 will be described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed or the normal symbol is in a short-time state. It becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by launching (right hitting). In addition, as will be described in detail later, when a big win is made by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 Compared to the case where a special symbol lottery (the lottery of special symbol 1) is performed based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, it is likely to be a big hit (big hit a) that can obtain the maximum profit. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed hitting in the probability change state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot or the short time state of the normal symbol. In other words, even if the probable state of the special symbol or the short state of the normal symbol is set, the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640 unless the player hits the right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the symbol probable state and the short time state of the normal symbol.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the player can display a specific image (right-handed navigation) in the special symbol probability change state or the normal symbol time reduction state, thereby allowing the player to display the special symbol probability change state or the normal symbol time reduction state. It is configured to ensure that the benefits of becoming

  In right-handed navigation, the characters “Aim for the right !!” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the characters. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, the player can be surely acquired the benefits of being in the special symbol probability changing state and the normal symbol time-saving state.

  Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be right-handed even though the player is not in a period when the player should hit (right-hand) a ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case of More specifically, this message is displayed when it is determined that the player is making a right stroke in a normal state (a state in which the special symbol is not changed or a normal symbol is in a short time state).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled to be less likely to be opened in a normal state (even if a right hand is made, it is difficult to make a ball enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, if a right strike is made in a normal state, the chance of receiving a lottery of a special symbol is reduced as compared with a case where a left strike strikes a ball aiming at the first entrance 64. That is, if a right strike is made in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the player from losing by displaying a right-handed warning image and urging left-handed.

  When it is determined that the player is making a right strike in the normal state, the characters “Warning” and “Left-handed play!” Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be made aware that the player should not make a right stroke (should make a left stroke). In addition, the hall clerk can also easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of making a right turn in a normal state by checking the presence or absence of the right turn warning screen.

  In addition, as a method of determining whether or not a right hand is made, for example, when a right hand is made, the ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) through which the ball can flow. Judgment is based on whether or not the ball has been made.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. It is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big win state), if it is detected that a ball has won (entered) the first specific winning port 1000a, it is determined that an illegal game is being performed, A strike warning image may be displayed. Thereby, the store clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence / absence of fraud simply by confirming the presence / absence of a right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a in a state other than the special game state (a big win state), a signal indicating that a fraud has been made to the hall computer. You may comprise so that it may output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraud and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 on which the fraud is being performed.

  Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable winning device 1000 is exemplified by, for example, a case where a ball entering the first specific winning port 1000a is detected although it is not in a special gaming state (a big win state).

  When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000, the word “warning” is displayed large in the center portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the lower part of the screen, the text “Please call a gate error agent” is displayed. With these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and therefore can promptly request repairs or the like from a hall clerk or the like.

  Each time the sphere passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “○” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Is displayed so as to alternately light up for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after displaying the variation of the second symbol. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the second symbol is displayed.

  When the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 has the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol (variation time) is set to be shorter when the probability of the special symbol or the normal symbol is shorter than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the short time of the normal symbol, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chance of winning the normal symbol increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric combination 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second entrance 640 while the special symbol is being changed and during normal time.

  It should be noted that, during special symbol probabilities or during normal symbol time shortening, the hit probability is increased, or the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a are increased to the second entrance 640 by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required to display the fluctuation of the 2nd symbol is set shorter than that in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or in the normal symbol time, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state Alternatively, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a with respect to one normal symbol hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal entrance (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and the ball that flows down to the right of the game board among the balls fired on the game board. Is configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of passages of the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is retained up to a total of 4 times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and at the second symbol retention lamp 84. Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing a ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may do it. Further, the number of assembling of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to one and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64 is provided through which a ball can win. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on due to the on of the first entrance switch. The jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 as viewed from the front, a second entrance 640 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entry due to the on of the second entrance switch is turned on. The jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances for paying out 5 balls as prize balls when a ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the second entrance 640, for example, the first prize The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640 may be five.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal entrance (through gate) 67, The object 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher during the probability change of a special symbol and the time of a normal symbol than in the normal state, and the time taken to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol is also short. In the display, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed. Therefore, the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a will be in an open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the special symbol change and the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which a ball is more likely to win the second entrance 640 when the special symbol is being changed and when the normal symbol is shorter than the normal state. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second entrance 640, and the ball is in a state in which a ball can always be won.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit between the case where the ball is won at the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball is won at the second entrance 640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. is there. However, when the ball wins the second entrance 640, the probability of the jackpot (bonus A, jackpot a) from which the maximum profit (out) is obtained as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won This is set higher than when the ball wins the first entrance 64.

  During normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640. Therefore, the first entrance 64 without the electric accessory is entered. Toward the left of the variable display device unit 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “left-handed”), and a lottery win lottery opportunities are obtained by winning at the first entrance 64, It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is changing or when the normal symbol is shorter or shorter, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is easily opened by passing the ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. Since it is easy to win the second entrance 640, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the sphere passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”). ), It is advantageous for the player to pass the normal entrance (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and aim for a big hit by winning the second entrance 640 It becomes.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first entrance 64 (lower left side of the second entrance 640), and is opened in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion thereof. A winning opening (large opening) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a big win is won by a special symbol lottery performed due to winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 1000a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won).

  The first specific winning opening 1000a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of game value (game value) than usual (in this embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of one ball.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300 that forms an open state in which a ball is guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a by rotating upward, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the opening / closing plate 1300. I have. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate and rotate the opening / closing plate 1300 to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the first specific winning opening 1000a. It operates to repeat alternately.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first entrance port 64. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the entrances 63, 64, 1000 a, 640 are guided to a not-shown ball discharge path through the first out port 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To do.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) composed of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, and the like) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R. A RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. To do.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable prize-winning device 1000 enters the second entrance 640 of the balls that flow down to the right of the variable time device unit 80 when the player hits the right by the inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface thereof. Instead of the sphere, almost all of the sphere that has flowed downstream is guided to the flow path forming section.

  FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable prize-winning apparatus 1000 includes a main body member 1100 having a horizontally-long rectangular plate shape, a covering front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the covering front plate. An opening / closing plate 1300 pivotally supported by being sandwiched between the power transmission member 1200, a power transmission member 1400 that is rotatably supported on the back side of the main body member 1100 and applies a load to the opening / closing plate 1300 by the rotation, and the power transmission member A driving device 1500 that drives 1400, a regulating member 1600 that regulates the discharge of a sphere in conjunction with the opening and closing plate 1300, and a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, and a regulating member 1600 that cover the main body member 1100 from the back side. And a rear cover 1700 that is fastened and fixed as described above.

  The main body member 1100 is a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board, and the thin plate member 1110 is recessed from the front side to the back side, and the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is provided. A housing portion 1120 that is housed and partially penetrated, a holding hole 1130 that is a through-hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is inserted on the right side of the housing portion 1120 in front view, and a sphere flows down on the front side of the thin plate member 1110. A projecting portion 1140 that projects in accordance with the path, a discharge port 1150 that ejects a sphere from the front side to the back side of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation that projects from the back side of the thin plate member 1110 and supports the power transmission member 1400. The support portion 1160 and the support claw portion 1170 protruding in a claw shape so as to support the shaft portion 1610 of the restriction member 1600 at the upper portion of the discharge port 1150 are mainly used. Provided.

  The accommodating portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated, a rectangular recess 1122 provided in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and a rectangular shape thereof. A through-hole formed in a rectangular shape perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of support recesses 1121 to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 operating along the right end of the recess 1122 back and forth of the thin plate member 1110 1123.

  The support recess 1121 is formed to be slightly larger in width than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300. In the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening is closed on the back surface of the covering front plate 1200. The That is, the opening / closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the pre-covering plate 1200.

  The rectangular recess 1122 has a larger surface area than the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the depth of the recess is slightly deeper than the plate portion 1310. Thereby, in the posture (closed state) in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is tilted, the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122, and the opening / closing plate 1300 can be prevented from projecting to the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

  The protruding portion 1140 is protruded to a position where it comes into contact with a sphere flowing down the storage flow path 1231 of the covering front plate 1200. The ball that flows down is decelerated by contacting the projecting portion 1140. A similar projecting portion 1235 is also disposed in the storage flow path 1231 of the covering front plate 1200 at a position that does not overlap with the projecting portion 1140 in the front-rear direction.

  The rotation support portion 1160 has a shaft portion 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a protruding height that is uniform to the back side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular or arc shape that is coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. And a circular rib 1162 formed in the shape of a rib.

  The circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between the rotational tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angle range in contact with the rotating tip portion 1421.

  The covering front plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 to the front side, and a side wall portion extending from the left end portion in front view of the thin plate member 1210 to the back side. 1220, a container 1230 extending in a box shape opened to the back side toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall 1220 in the left-right direction, and an upper end of the container 1230. The detection sensor 1240 is mainly provided.

  The thin plate member 1210, the right side wall portion in front view of the side wall portion 1220, the left side wall portion in front view of the housing portion 1230, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow path that is a hole through which a sphere flows down in the vertical direction. The part is composed.

  The storage portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and has a storage channel 1231 formed with a width that allows a sphere to flow down, and protrudes toward the back side in the middle part of the storage channel 1231. It mainly includes a protruding portion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side when viewed from the front.

  The storage flow path 1231 is configured in such a manner that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross section that opens to the back side is extended while being bent into a front U-shape, and the opening passes through the main body member 1100 to pass a sphere. A flow path is formed. In the present embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the region where the storage flow path 1231 is formed is formed from a light transmissive material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231.

  The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12) that is an inclined surface that guides the sphere toward the back side at the lowermost end, and rolling that rolls the sphere guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-rear direction. And a surface 1231b.

  The inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the front side (right side in FIG. 12) reaching the rolling surface 1231b of the storage channel 1231 with respect to the horizontal plane.

  The protruding portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the projecting portion 1235 projects to a position where it can abut against the sphere flowing down the storage flow path 1231 and decelerates the sphere by abutting the sphere.

  The inclined surface 1237 is inclined downward toward the left in front view. Thereby, the sphere landed on the inclined surface 1237 can be rolled leftward and guided to the flow path forming unit.

  The detection sensor 1240 includes a through hole as the first specific prize winning opening 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage, and the number of winning prizes is counted.

  The opening / closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between a case where the sphere rolls toward the detection sensor 1240 and a case where the sphere is dropped downward without coming into contact with the sphere due to a difference in posture. And a pair of shaft portions 1320 projecting along the longitudinal direction from the short-side end portion of the plate portion 1310 and a base portion of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side when viewed from the front, along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320. And a loaded portion 1330 to be provided.

  The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which a ball rolls in an ascending posture (open state), and the length in the short direction is covered in the ascending posture (open state) along the short direction. The distance from the front plate 1200 is set to a length equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is close to the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 that is chamfered in a cross-sectional arc shape at an upper corner portion of the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1320 in the raised posture (open state).

  The plate portion 1310 is long in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

  The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped entrance prevention portion 1331 extending on the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an intermediary transmission portion 1332 extending on the back side of the rolling surface 1311, and the intermediary transmission portion. And an engaging portion 1333 that protrudes from the right side of the rear view 1332 (the side on which the power transmission member 1400 is disposed).

  The engaging portion 1333 includes a chamfered portion 1333a that extends to a position that interferes with the operation locus of the power transmission member 1400 and is chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, the chamfered portion 1333a instead of the corner portion contacts the power transmission member 1400, so that concentration of stress at the time of contact between the engagement portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. .

  The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disk-shaped main body portion 1410 and an extending portion 1420 extending from the main body portion 1410 in the axial radial direction.

  The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a projecting pin 1412 that projects from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel to the drilling direction of the support hole 1411.

  The projecting pin 1412 is a portion that engages with the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the projecting pin 1412 is displaced as the tip member 1520 linearly moves by switching the excitation of the drive device 1500, thereby transmitting power. The member 1400 rotates.

  The extending portion 1420 has a rotating tip portion 1421 formed from an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extending tip portion, and a pushing portion 1422 protruding from the rotating tip portion 1421 to the front side. Is provided.

  The driving device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly moves the movable member by switching excitation, and a front end member 1520 having a front view H-shape (a shape that includes a concave portion on the top and the bottom) disposed at the distal end of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. Is mainly provided.

  The tip member 1520 is configured such that the concave portion on the upper side thereof can accommodate the protruding pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, a recess is formed in a shape that keeps the protruding pin 1412 accommodated inside while the power transmission member 1400 rotates (see FIG. 20).

  The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 that is pivotally supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extension portion 1620 that extends in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, and a main body. The member 1100 side surface is mainly provided with the extended portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 having a thickness larger than that of the extended portion 1620.

  The extending portion 1620 is disposed on the movement trajectory of the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the intervening transmission portion 1332 when the opening / closing plate is in the rising posture (open state).

  The ball receiving portion 1630 is configured to overlap with the discharge port 1150 (the sphere discharges the opening of the discharge port 1150) in a tilted posture (posture where the opposite end of the shaft portion 1610 is disposed at the lower position, storage state). In such a manner that it is narrowed to such an extent that it is not performed.

  The restricting member 1600 is biased by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction to maintain the rising posture (the posture in which the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1610 is disposed at the upper position, the discharge state).

  The rear cover 1700 includes a discharge port 1710 that is a through hole through which a sphere discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes. The sphere discharged from the discharge port 1710 is guided to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

  The closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line IX-IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in a closed state, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken.

  As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122, so that the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 is covered. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be placed along the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without reducing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 are juxtaposed at intervals through which the spheres can pass, in the state shown in FIGS. By guiding the sphere in between, the sphere can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 of the loaded portion 1330 partially covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 on the front side of the main body member 1100. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and an irregular prize (for example, a ball hitting a nail or the like without being guided by the opening / closing plate 1300 is blown laterally and is detected). 1240) can be prevented.

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, since the control member 1600 will be in a discharge | emission state in the closed state of the opening-and-closing plate 1300, a ball | bowl is discharged | emitted from the storage flow path 1231. FIG. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which a sphere is not stored in the storage channel 1231.

  The open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XI-XI in FIG. 10 and 11, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in an open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated with an imaginary line in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is less than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the sphere guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the pre-covering plate 1200 is prevented from falling.

  The sphere guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 rolls along the rolling surface 1311 of the opening / closing plate 1300 along the inclination, and the detection sensor 1240 from its right end. And enters the storage channel 1231.

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the pre-covering plate 1200. Therefore, as compared with the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to such an extent that it abuts against the pre-covering plate 1200, the necessary material can be reduced, and the material cost required for the opening / closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

  In addition, by reducing the diameter of the movement trajectory of the short end of the opening / closing plate 1300, it is easy to avoid interference between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the ball passing through the front of the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

  Here, although details will be described later, since the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state in the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, and the sphere that has passed the detection sensor 1240 is stored in the storage channel. It is stored in. Therefore, in FIG. 10, a state where a sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the storage flow path 1231 of the present embodiment is formed with a length capable of storing a sphere up to a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). When ten spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, the tenth sphere stops at a position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

  Therefore, the tenth ball serves as a stopper, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, the resistance when the eleventh sphere attempts to pass the detection sensor 1240 becomes extremely large, and the eleventh sphere can hardly enter the detection sensor 1240.

  In this embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state when the detection sensor 1240 detects the tenth ball, the ball remaining on the opening / closing plate 1300 flows down below the opening / closing plate 1300. Then, when the regulating member 1600 is switched to the discharged state in accordance with the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300, the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 is discharged.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the sphere is not discharged from the storage flow path 1231, the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but is stopped at a position where it cannot pass through the detection sensor 1240. To do.

  When the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, and the tenth sphere is stored while receiving a load from the entrance prevention unit 1331 during the switching. It is pushed into the inside of the path 1231 (see FIG. 21B). That is, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stops in a manner that blocks the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and in the middle of the switching of the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state, Since the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is closed while being in contact (rubbed) with the ball, the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates are shifted. The moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened can be prevented, and the eleventh ball can be prevented from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, there is no need to set a limit for a period from when the predetermined number of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240 until the opening / closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and the setting can be arbitrarily set. For example, the opening / closing operation may be started at 0.2 msec from the detection, or the opening / closing operation may be started one second after the detection. In the present embodiment, after waiting until the tenth sphere comes into contact with the ninth sphere (after the center of the sphere passes the front side of the entrance prevention unit 1331 and is located on the detection sensor 1240 side). ) In order to operate the opening and closing plate 1300, the opening and closing plate 1300 is controlled to open and close 0.5 seconds after being detected by the detection sensor 1240.

  According to the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 described above, in this embodiment, the number of spheres passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening / closing plate 1300 forms the open state. In this embodiment, the prevention (delay) of the entry of the sphere can be performed only for the eleventh sphere. In other words, the first to tenth spheres can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special gaming state as compared with the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in the whole ball.

  For example, in the case of a structure in which the winning of the following ball is delayed by decelerating the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 once at the passing position, it is easy to suppress the winning of the eleventh ball, while the first ball Since each of the tenth spheres is partially linked and rolls on the rolling surface 1311, the spheres are decelerated, so the time until the tenth sphere passes through the detection sensor 1240. There was a problem that the game became longer and the game was prolonged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a configuration for decelerating the first ball to the tenth ball is not adopted, and only the eleventh ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240. Even if the balls flow down in a row, the detection sensor 1240 can be passed at the flow speed, so that the game can be sped up.

  In addition, even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in an open state due to repairs such as ball clogging and a game is started at the end of the period, there is no ball entering the detection sensor 1240. Since there is no slowdown in meaning, more balls can be entered.

  For the eleventh sphere, no matter how fast it flows down toward the detection sensor 1240 (at a speed that can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the opening / closing plate 1300 starts the tilting operation), regardless of the speed. The eleventh sphere can be physically prevented from passing the detection sensor 1240 by the tenth sphere.

  With reference to FIG. 12, the arrangement | positioning of the sphere which retains in the storage flow path 1231 is demonstrated. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 12, a sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is illustrated.

  Here, the mechanism by which the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are arranged the same every time will be described. First, the ball P <b> 1 that first enters the empty storage flow path 1231 is guided by the guide surface 1231 a that is inclined rearward at the bottom of the storage flow path 1231, and is disposed at a position that contacts the front surface of the regulating member 1600. The

  The sphere P <b> 1 is weighted when the subsequently entered sphere P <b> 2 reaches the lower end, and settles to the arrangement shown in FIG. 12. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom of arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side of the sphere P1 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 12). In other words, depending on the state of tilting in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 10 is disposed, the pachinko machine 10 may approach the covering front plate 1200 side, or may approach the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. As shown in FIG. 12, the projecting portion 1140 is disposed at a position where the projecting tip of the projecting portion 1140 contacts the sphere P2, so that the sphere P2 is in contact with the sphere P1 when the sphere P2 is in contact with the main body member. There is no contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

  The sphere P2 is weighted by reaching the position where the subsequently entered sphere P3 contacts the sphere P2. Here, in the present embodiment, the protruding portion 1235 arranged on the covering front plate 1200 has the sphere P2 and the protruding portion 1235 on the right side of the sphere P2 at any position in the front-rear direction. The ball P3 is inserted between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 so that the ball P3 cannot contact the thin plate member 1210 (a position where the gap with the ball P2 is kept small).

  Therefore, regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction, the center position of the sphere P3 is arranged on the back side of the center position of the sphere P2, and the sphere P3 is located on the back side (upper side in FIG. 12). ). Therefore, the sphere P2 is moved toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 12) by the load of the sphere P3. Thereby, the sphere P2 settles in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the sphere P3 receives a load from the sphere P4 that subsequently enters the ball, and the sphere P3 receives a load under substantially the same conditions (except that the front-rear direction is reversed). Settles to the arrangement shown in FIG.

  That is, the arrangement of the nth ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n + 1) th ball. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the spheres is not fixed by narrowing the storage flow path 1231, but the cross-sectional area of the storage flow path 1231 is maintained larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the protruding portions 1140, This is realized by arranging 1235. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning of the stored ball | bowl can be fixed to a unique position, preventing generation | occurrence | production of a ball | bowl clogging.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by arranging the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the spheres are stored in a fixed arrangement every time an action of storing the spheres in the storage flow path 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to unify the number of stored items every time.

  With reference to FIG. 13, the discharge | release of the sphere from the storage flow path 1231 is demonstrated. FIGS. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 13A, the state in which the sphere P1 is discharged and the sphere P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b is shown in FIG. 13B. In FIG. 13B, the sphere P2 is discharged and the sphere P3 is the position of the sphere P2 in FIG. A state of being arranged in FIG.

  As will be described later, when the solenoid 1510 is de-energized and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the restricting member 1600 is in a discharge state, and the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231. When discharging the ball. The sphere (sphere P1 in FIG. 12) arranged at the lowermost end is discharged to the back side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following sphere (sphere P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space formed thereby. The balls are discharged in order.

  Here, since the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231 (channel extending in the left-right direction), the flow velocity of the sphere P1 is reduced. Since the direction becomes larger than the flow speed of the sphere P2, a gap is generated between the sphere P1 and the sphere P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, since the load applied from the sphere P2 to the sphere P1 when the sphere P1 is discharged can be minimized, the speed at the time of discharging the sphere P1 is uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored after the sphere P1. Can be

  After the sphere P1 is discharged, the following spheres P2, P3, and P4 flow down to the downstream side (left side in FIG. 12) along the inclination of the extending portion of the storage channel 1231. Here, the sphere P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the spheres P3 and P4 abut against the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13A). By this contact, the spheres P3 and P4 are turned to the directions DP3 and DP4 having the front-rear direction component, and pass through the positions of the leading spheres P2 and P3, respectively, and decelerate.

  In other words, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the storage flow path 1231 by contacting the projecting portions 1140 and 1235, and the previously stored balls are stopped. It is rearranged to the position where it was, and decelerates.

  As a result, a gap is generated between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load applied from the sphere P3 to the sphere P2 when the sphere P2 is discharged can be minimized. The speed at the time of discharge of the sphere P2 can be made uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored after the sphere P2.

  That is, as the following sphere flows down the storage channel 1231 for a longer distance, the increase in the number of stored spheres causes a change in the acceleration method of the subsequent sphere due to gravity, and accordingly, the discharge mode of the sphere P2 (the speed at the time of discharge, The discharge interval between the ball P1 and the like may change, but the change in the discharge mode is caused by the action of the projections 1140 and 1235 described above (the ball discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent one) It is possible to suppress this by the action of eliminating a load due to gravity by making a gap between the ball and the ball.

  Thereafter, the subsequent spheres repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13A to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13B, whereby the spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. As described above, by creating a gap between the ball that rolls out on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball, the discharged ball is discharged without receiving the weight of the subsequent ball. Therefore, regardless of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231, the discharge mode of the spheres (e.g., the speed during discharge and the discharge interval) can be made uniform.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 can make the discharge mode of the spheres (speed during discharge, discharge interval, etc.) uniform. In addition, the discharge | emission aspect of a sphere is made into the aspect which requires about 0.2 second for one sphere to be discharged | emitted in this embodiment. Therefore, by maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharged state for 2 seconds or more, it is possible to discharge all the maximum number (10) of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231.

  14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning device along line XVI-XVI in FIG. FIG. 14 to 16, the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state, and the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is located above the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300. Spaced apart.

  Since the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the upper side and is separated from the restricting member 1600, the restricting member 1600 is not subjected to a load from the intervening transmitting portion 1332, and the restricting member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). It is maintained in the discharged state by the biasing force.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16, in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 protrudes in such a manner that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is less than the projected area of the sphere. Thereby, it is possible to physically prevent the sphere from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

  17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning device along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. FIG. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an excited state, and the rotational tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced counterclockwise. The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

  The intermediate transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the lower side as the power transmission member 1400 rotates. In this state, the extending portion 1620 of the restriction member 1600 receives a load from the intermediate transmission portion 1332 and the posture of the restriction member 1600 Is switched to a tilting posture (the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state).

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, a load associated with the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and an urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) are applied to the regulating member 1600. In this embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring is applied. The structure that can suppress the driving force of the solenoid 1510 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state is maintained. The large biasing force of the torsion spring allows the restriction member 1600 to be immediately switched to the discharge state, thereby leading to the effect of quickly discharging the sphere from the storage flow path 1231. Hereinafter, the adopted structure will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the operation locus E1 of the power transmission member 1400 when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operation from the closed state, while the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state. Is switched to the outside of the operation locus E1 along the rotation axis direction of the power transmission member 1400. The operation locus E1 is illustrated as an outer shape of a movement locus of a portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

  Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operation direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member 1400 but the surface that forms the rotation direction. And applied in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft portion 1320 applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

  That is, the urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) that urges the restricting member 1600 is directed to push the opening / closing plate 1300 back toward the closed state, but this urging force is the power regardless of how large the urging force is. The solenoid 1510 is not applied via the transmission member 1400.

  Thus, once the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state can be prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300. Accordingly, it is unnecessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the opening / closing plate 1300 at the maximum value.

  That is, after the solenoid 1510 is excited so as to generate a driving force enough to switch the regulating member 1600 to the storage state against the biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown) at the start of operation, the applied voltage is reduced. However, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

  Therefore, even when a variable load is applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state and the regulating member 1600 can be maintained in the storage state without being affected by the load.

  In addition, the load given by the weight of a sphere is illustrated as a fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600. That is, for example, the opening / closing plate 1300 is configured such that a sphere is landed on the rolling surface 1311. Therefore, when the sphere is landed, a load due to the weight of the sphere is received, and the number of the spheres frequently changes. 1300 is given a fluctuating load. Further, for example, the regulating member 1600 is loaded from a sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231, particularly a sphere disposed at the lowermost end of the storage flow path 1231, and therefore there is a case where the sphere is present or not. A variable load is given.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked, the regulating member 1600 cannot be discharged while the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept open. For this reason, even if the opening / closing plate 1300 is illegally maintained in the open state, it is physically determined that more spheres (10 or more spheres in this embodiment) that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 pass through the detection sensor 1240. Can be prevented. Thus, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be kept in an unauthorized state to prevent an unauthorized increase in the number of winning balls to be acquired.

  20 and 21 illustrate the operations of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 in time series. 20 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20 (a). 20 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (b) is a diagram of FIG. 21 (a). FIG. 21C is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XXIb-XXIb, FIG. 21C is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21D is XXId of FIG. 21C. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 1000 in -XXId line.

  20 and 21, only the opening / closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 maintain the assembly state (see FIG. 5) for easy understanding. The other configurations are not shown, and the state in which the opening / closing plate 1300 changes state from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in time series.

  That is, in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the state in which the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state). In FIG. 20C, the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1, as shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B. In FIG. 21 (c) and FIG. 21 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2. The states of 1520 being displaced and arranged at positions (final arrival positions when the solenoid 1510 is excited) separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 are respectively illustrated.

  In FIG. 21B, the first specific winning opening 1000a arranged on the front side is illustrated with an imaginary line as a reference, and the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross section as illustrated is an imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening / closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21B without interfering with the sphere.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20A to the state shown in FIG. 20C, the power transmission member 1400 rotates, but the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains the posture as it is. In FIG. 20C, the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 come into contact with each other.

  As a result, the power transmission member 1400 can be given momentum before the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated from the closed state to the open state, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 starts rotating simultaneously with the start of rotation of the power transmission member 1400. Thus, the driving force required at the start of rotation (at the time of initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be increased.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), while the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharged state, the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and the closed state and the open state (See FIG. 21B).

  In the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the ball portion flows down to the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 (right side of FIG. 21 (b)) by the plate portion 1310 projecting to the front side. The ball can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the sphere acts in the direction of pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (FIG. 21 (b) clockwise), but the tip member 1520 moves rightward in the rear view (FIG. 21 (a) rightward) to transmit power. Since a load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 via the member 1400, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be prevented from rotating by the weight of the ball.

  Therefore, in the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21 (b), it is possible to prevent the sphere from passing downward through the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 while allowing the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150. .

  Thus, the problem of maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharged state during the time required to discharge the sphere from the storage flow path 1231 and the problem of shortening the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 (which shortens the interval) conflicting therewith. In the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the sphere is sandwiched between the rolling surface 1311 and the covering front plate 1200 by extending the plate portion 1310 to a middle position while maintaining the discharge of the sphere. Can be achieved together.

  At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the opening / closing plate 1300 is configured to prevent the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240 while preventing the ball from passing downward. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the rolling surface 1311 is located at a position spaced below the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent the ball on the vehicle from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the regulating member 1600 is in the discharged state, and the function of limiting the number of winning balls by the first variable winning device 1000 can be effectively maintained. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG.21 (d), at the same time as the opening-and-closing plate 1300 switches to an open state, the control member 1600 is switched to a storage state. Further, as illustrated in FIGS. 20 and 21, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked by the operation of the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can be shared with the driving force of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

  20 and 21, the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the opened state has been described. However, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the opened state to the closed state, it can be grasped by going back to FIGS. 20 and 21. can do.

  When switching from the open state to the closed state, first, the state shown in FIG. 21 (d) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 21 (b). Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operation direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move more than the movement amount of the loaded portion 1330.

  That is, since the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharged state after the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated, it is impossible to maintain the open / close plate 1300 in the open state after the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharged state. Can do. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent an irregular winning that the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 at a slightly later timing after the ball starts to be discharged.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 as long as the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still open and the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311 and jumps. In the present embodiment, this can be made impossible.

  That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the middle of being opened from the open state, the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward, so that the rolling surface 1311 When the sphere contacts, a load that supports the opening / closing plate 1300 acting in the opposite direction to the weight direction of the sphere does not occur. Therefore, when the sphere comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the plate portion 1310 moves down with the weight of the sphere, and thus the sphere cannot be bounced to the detection sensor 1240. Thereby, irregular winning can be prevented.

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 22B schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. FIG. 22 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is stored. When the value of the first per-random number counter acquired based on the start winning matches with any one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22B) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each big hit type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”. Is defined in association with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot is A, 15 rounds of jackpot game are executed according to the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 49”, the big hit B is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot is B, the 8-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 1200 prize balls.

  A jackpot C is defined in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99” (see 202b3 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot C is reached, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 600 prize balls.

  As described above, in any case, if the big win is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance slot 64), the first variable prize winning device 1000 has the first operation pattern. Works with. Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds. As the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases and the time required for the big hit game also increases.

  In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance slot 64), the jackpot of 15 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 20%, but the jackpot of four rounds with a probability of 50%. So basically you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time compared to the 15-round jackpot game, so that it is possible to start launching a ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition early.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 79”, The jackpot a is defined in association with it (see 202b4 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot is a, as in the jackpot A, a 15-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 89”, the big hit b is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot b is reached, the 15 round jackpot game is executed with the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (in this embodiment, 1200), and the time taken for the jackpot game exceeds the case of jackpot a.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, the big hit c is associated and defined (see 202b6 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot c is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed with the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1875 in this embodiment), and the time taken for the jackpot game exceeds the jackpot a, and the prize is paid out for each round. The time required for a ball or jackpot game varies.

  As described above, when the big win is made in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the type of the big win. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, while the number of jackpot rounds remains unchanged, the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while providing a difference in the number of payouts. In the present embodiment, when the number of payouts is small (big hit b and jackpot c), the time required for the big hit game can be lengthened compared to when the number of payouts is large (big hit a). That is, when a big hit (big hit b and big hit c) with a small number of payouts is acquired, the timing of hitting the ball aiming for the next big hit is delayed as compared with the case of the big hit a.

  Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of award balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency can be reduced) obtained by the jackpot game due to the difference in the jackpot type. Difference in the number of payouts included).

  As a result, in the jackpot breakdown of the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the jackpot (bonus a) that can receive a large amount of time-efficient payout, and the time-efficient payout Also, a small jackpot (big hit b, big hit c) can be provided, and the player's profit obtained when the big hit a is obtained can be increased. Thereby, while maintaining a large probability of winning the jackpot a, the difference in the number of payouts when playing a game for a predetermined time (the maximum value of the total number of acquired balls and the minimum value of the total number of acquired balls) A gaming machine capable of increasing the difference) can be configured.

  As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when hitting the normal symbol is reached. It is set to be long (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd entrance 640, it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2 lottery. Therefore, once the transition to the probable change state of the special symbol can be made, the special symbol prone change state is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol, and when the big win is likely to become a big hit a (the biggest hit of big ball). Since it becomes easy, it becomes easy for a player to acquire a lot of prize balls. Thus, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 22C) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 22C). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 22C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance 67 and the second per random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a win. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the variation pattern display mode is defined for each display mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening pattern of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 23A is a diagram showing a change in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23B is a timing of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. FIG. 23 (c) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a in the third operation pattern.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the first operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the first specific winning opening 1000a by displacing the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. During the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time during which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged as a whole. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the spheres are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per unit regardless of the number of storage. Is done. Therefore, in order to discharge 10 balls, it takes 2 seconds of furniture.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first time. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

  In the first operation pattern, a state in which no sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round can be formed by discharging the sphere at the first interval time Int1 between rounds. Therefore, since the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a after the second round, the maximum length of the first operation time T1 of each round The round game R can be ended without waiting for (30 seconds). Therefore, the round game R can be advanced rapidly.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. And the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 controls the drive so that the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot b, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the first specific winning opening 1000a by displacing the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the second round game R is started.

  The second interval time Int2 between rounds is set as a time during which at least a part of the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the spheres are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per unit regardless of the number of storage. Is done. Accordingly, since the number of balls that can be discharged in one second is five, for example, if ten balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, the balls may be discharged in the second interval time Int2 between rounds. In this case, five spheres still remain in the storage channel 1231.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first time. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

  In the second operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the sphere at the second interval time Int2 between rounds. Accordingly, in the second and subsequent rounds, there may occur a state where a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Accordingly, the progress of the round game R is delayed compared to the first operation pattern.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third to fifteenth rounds is repeated between the round games R with the second interval time Int2 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace and open and close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 controls the drive so that the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

  Here, in the 15-round jackpot game, the elapsed time and the number of payouts are compared between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern. The sphere can be launched at intervals of the shortest 0.6 seconds.

  First, when a jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern, the time required for 10 balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is 6 seconds at the shortest. When the time required for continuing 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( = OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int1 (2s)) × 15R + ED (11s)). The number of payouts is 2250 (= 15 × 10C × 15R).

  On the other hand, when the big hit game is performed in the second operation pattern, ten balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first round, but only five in the second round can be won. The time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (= OP (10 s) + (T1 (6 s) + Int2 (1 s)) + (T1 (30 s) + Int2 (1 s)) × 13R + T1 (30 s) + Int1 ( 2s) + ED (11s)). Further, the number of payouts is 1200 (= (10C × 1R + 5C × 14R) × 15) because only 5 balls can be won in round games R in the second and subsequent rounds.

  Therefore, when playing a jackpot game with the second operation pattern, while it takes more than three times as long as playing the jackpot game with the first operation pattern, the payout ball is about half, and the time efficiency of getting a ball Is dramatically worse.

  Thereby, the interest of the player when a jackpot game is performed with the first operation pattern can be improved. That is, the rarity value of jackpot A and jackpot a can be increased, the attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot can be improved, and the interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Although the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.0 seconds, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be set to various numerical values and can be changed at each round.

  For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible.

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, only two spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. When 10 are stored, the round game R is started with 8 balls remaining. Accordingly, in the round game R of the round, only two balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so the number of payouts is also small (30).

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, since seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, for example, 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. When the number of the balls is stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Accordingly, in the round game R of the round, seven balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a certain number (105) of payouts can be desired.

  In addition, the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds can be set to 2.0 seconds (more time). In this case, there is no ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the next round game R, and it is possible to win 10 balls in the first specific winning opening 1000a. It can be desired to shorten the progress time of the ball and the round game R.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot c, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the first specific winning opening 1000a by displacing the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. During the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first time. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Since the ball is discharged in the first interval time Int1 between rounds, a state where no ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R in the second round is formed. (In this embodiment, ten) pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the corresponding balls can be paid out, and the first operating time T1 of each round The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Accordingly, the award ball can be paid out in the same manner as in the first operation pattern while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third to tenth rounds is repeated between the round games R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace and open and close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the tenth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses. After the second interval time Int2 has elapsed, the eleventh round game R is started.

  In the eleventh round, the solenoid 1510 starts to measure the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means, and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the 11th round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eleventh round is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the 12th to 15th rounds is repeated between each round game R with the second interval time Int2 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace and open and close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

  By discharging the sphere at the second interval time Int2 between rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the sphere remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R after the eleventh round. Therefore, after the 11th round, there may occur a state in which a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Accordingly, the progress of the round game R is delayed compared to the first operation pattern.

  In addition, the number of prize balls to be paid out in each round game is reduced compared to the 10th round. Therefore, the total number of payouts is smaller than the big hit of the first operation pattern (1875 = (10C × 10R + 5C × 5R) × 15) and the degree of payout in the jackpot game (number or speed, etc.) It can be changed (by timing) depending on how many round games are being played.

  In the third operation pattern, the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the final stage is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of payouts may be small at the beginning, but the number of payouts may be increased toward the end of the game, or the payout number may be peaked in the middle round.

  When the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 controls the drive so that the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

  According to this operation pattern, by changing the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game depending on what round game R is performed, the jackpot game is moderated and the interest of the player is improved. Can be made.

  In addition, when a jackpot game is played in the third operation pattern, there is no change from the first operation pattern until the round game R of the 10th round, so the player pays out the expected payout in the first operation pattern. The jackpot game can be performed with the expectation that the number can be obtained.

  Further, the second interval time Int2 between rounds set in one second in the present embodiment can be set to an arbitrary numerical value corresponding to each round for each jackpot type. For example, in a certain jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between rounds of the third operation pattern is set to be 1.5 seconds, and in the other jackpot type, the second second between rounds of the third operation pattern is set. The interval time Int2 can be set in advance such that the odd round is set to 0.5 seconds and the even round is set to 1.0 seconds.

  That is, it is possible to form various jackpot games with different second interval times Int2 between rounds by further subdividing the jackpot type. Accordingly, in the eleventh round and thereafter, the number of balls finally paid out can be made unpredictable until the jackpot game is completed, and the attention to the jackpot game can be improved.

  Moreover, you may make it respond | correspond with the change of the grade of payout, and the presentation displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 (refer FIG. 2). For example, when playing a big hit game with the third action pattern, the LCD screen displays the figure of the character to be run, and the character's stamina remains in the beginning (the first round) is displayed. Characters that run will perform well and many prize balls will be paid out in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the character's stamina disappears (in the final round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run and walks, and in conjunction with this, the payout of prize balls decreases.

  In this way, by matching the degree of payout of the prize ball and the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible to make it easier for the player to transfer the emotion to the liquid crystal effect, and to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game be able to.

  In addition, by performing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern described above, each round can be advanced based on the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the jackpot game It is possible to proceed over the production time. In other words, for example, when a ball is awarded to the first specific winning opening 1000a at an unexpectedly high speed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game ends during the first playback of a moving image that is loop-played over a predetermined production time. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending before the effect of winning the jackpot is completely watched.

  In addition, when playing a jackpot game with the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a support message from a character (such as “Do your best” next) is displayed, the longer the jackpot game time, the easier it is to display a support message from a character with a lower appearance rate. Thus, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can be advanced (rather happily) without stressing the player.

  On the other hand, it is good also as a display of the aspect which gives a stress by a player. For example, a case will be described in which a character running during a jackpot game is displayed and the character is displayed to rest in a rest area in an interval between rounds. In the first operation pattern, every time a specified number of balls are won, an interval is set between rounds, so the character can complete without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the 11th round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the prescribed number of winnings is not achieved and the interval between rounds is not reached unless the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 is waited. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which fatigue accumulates without causing a deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between rounds is short in the first place, An effect that there is no time to rest can be performed. Therefore, since the player can visually recognize the exhausted character and stress the player, it is possible to increase the player's aspiration to recover at the next jackpot.

  Further, in the case where the same display is performed, it may be an effect that the character rehydrates in accordance with the winning timing. In this case, in the first operation pattern, water can be sufficiently replenished, but in the second and third operation patterns after the 11th round, the number of times of water replenishment (number of winning prizes) is the first. Compared to the action pattern, the character will run for a longer period (the jackpot game period), so the amount of water that can be replenished is less than the character's sweat, and the character gets tired more and more. The effect can be performed without any deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). This makes it possible to match the character's appearance with the profits obtained by the player (payout ball including time efficiency), and how much the jackpot won by the player is (medium hit? The player can easily determine whether the game is a big jackpot or a super jackpot) through the production of the whole jackpot game.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Although 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the number of the balls which can be stored inside the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 1000 was fixed, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 2000 in 2nd Embodiment is a ball which can be stored inside. It is comprised so that the number of can be changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In FIG. 24, when a ball enters from the second specific winning port 2255a, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the arrangement of the spheres stored in the second storage channel 2251 are illustrated by hidden lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable prize winning device 2000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a drive device 1500 similar to those in the first embodiment, and a body member slightly different from that in the first embodiment. 2100, a covering front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600, and a rear cover (not shown), and a second variable winning device 2800 that is newly provided in the second embodiment. It should be noted that the second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable winning device 2800 includes a second specific winning port 2255a through which a ball serving as a reference for payout in the big hit game passes.

  The second specific winning port 2255a is a winning port having the same function as the first specific winning port 1000a. That is, when a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the first specific winning port 1000a or the second specific winning port 2255a that is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed). (Or until 10 balls are won), the opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). Although details will be described later, the opening operation can be performed by a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern, fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  The main body member 2100 is in addition to the configuration of the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (thin plate member 1110, accommodating portion 1120, holding hole 1130, protruding portion 1140, outlet 1150, rotation support portion 1160, and support claw portion 1170). Also, a slide guide hole 2181 that is a through-hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110 and a holding hole 2182 that is similarly a through-hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110 and can be fitted with the second detection sensor 2255. A pair of wall portions arranged in parallel along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and linearly extending in the left-right direction, and a pair of walls along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 A transmission guide rib 2184 having wall portions arranged in parallel and extending in a straight line in the vertical direction, and a shaft portion 21 that pivotally supports a transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800. And 5, a mainly includes.

  The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole that guides the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 disposed on the covering front plate 2200 is inserted.

  Each of the ribs 2183 and 2184 is a rib that guides the sliding operation of the interposition rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

  The covering front plate 2200 is connected in the upper right direction of the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the housing portion 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) provided in the front covering plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A second housing 2250 is provided.

  The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back side of the thin plate formed at the surface position with the thin plate member 1210, and has a second opening whose upper end is connected to the middle of the storage flow path 1231. A second detection disposed in the second storage flow path 2251 in a posture along the opening in the extending direction of the second storage flow path 2251 near the upper end of the storage flow path 2251 and the second storage flow path 2251. The front side of the second housing 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 are closed at the left side of the opening of the sensor 2255 and the second storage channel 2251 when viewed from the front, and the upper surface is inclined downward toward the left. And an inclined surface 2257 to be mainly provided.

  When the sphere is stored inside the second storage portion 2250 through the second detection sensor 2255 and the discharge port 1150 is blocked and the sphere is stored, the second storage flow path 2251 has the number of stored spheres. It is configured to have a maximum of 14 pieces.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device that has the second specific prize opening 2255a and produces the same action as the detection sensor 1240. That is, when the sphere enters the accommodation unit 1230 by switching the opening / closing plate 1300, the sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the sphere is accommodated via the second accommodation unit 2250 by switching the second variable winning device 2800. When entering the ball 1230, the second detection sensor 2255 detects the ball.

  The inclined surface 2257 causes the sphere to flow down to the side where the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed. Accordingly, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and have not entered the second storage flow path 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are configured in a mode toward the flow path forming portion on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. The Therefore, during the jackpot game, the player can open any one of the specific winning ports 1000a and 2255a regardless of whether the first specific winning port 1000a is open or the second specific winning port 2255a is open. If it is in a state, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out by playing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an unfamiliar player can easily play a game.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is disposed inside the second storage flow path 2251 with a margin for arranging one sphere on the upstream side. Accordingly, when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (when the remaining one sphere passes through the second detection sensor 2255, a predetermined number is reached), a plurality of spheres flow into the second storage flow path 2251. , A structure in which more than a specified number of balls can enter.

  In addition to the configuration (the shaft portion 1610, the extending portion 1620, and the ball receiving portion 1630) provided in the restricting member 1600 of the first embodiment, the restricting member 2600 further extends to the left, and the extending portion 1620. The second extending portion 2640 is formed in a symmetrical relationship with the extending portion 1620 when viewed in the plane direction.

  As will be described later, the second extending portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load when the second variable winning device 2800 operates. Due to the formation of the second extending portion 2640, the regulating member 2600 allows the second variable winning device 2800 or the opening / closing plate 1300 to be used regardless of whether the second variable winning device 2800 performs a switching operation or the opening / closing plate 1300 performs a switching operation. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation.

  The second variable prize-winning device 2800 includes a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left-right direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and an abdomen with one end supported by the tip member 2820. A transmission member 2830 that is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 2185, a slide plate 2840 that is connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830 and projects from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100; One end of the rod 288 is fixed to the member 2820 and is slidably disposed inside the drive guide rib 2183, and one end is disposed at a position where the end can be brought into contact with the intermediate rod 2850. 2184 is extended along the inside of 2184 and the other end of the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 A transmission rod portion 2860 that is disposed against possible position, mainly comprises.

  The intervention rod portion 2850 is guided in the left-right direction by the drive guide rib 2183 while being restricted from moving in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured in such a manner that the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 increases as the distance from the thin plate member 1110 increases. Movement in the front-rear direction is restricted.

  The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided in the vertical direction by the transmission guide rib 2184 while being restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured to approach each other as the distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 becomes longer (narrow each other), so Movement in the front-rear direction is restricted.

  In addition, the surface of the mutual edge part which the interposition rod part 2850 and the transmission rod part 2860 contact | abut is inclined and formed in the aspect which faces an other party member. Thereby, the force can be smoothly transmitted from the interposition rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

  FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along the line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the restricting member 2600 is formed in a cross-sectional arc shape in which the facing surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860 is curved, and the restricting member 2600 is directed to the discharged state. The urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) that urges is transmitted to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the opposing surface 2641. As a result, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained at the standby position in the state shown in FIGS.

  In the state shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, the sphere cannot enter both the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 2800 for making the second detection sensor 2255 in a state where a ball can be entered will be described.

  27 (a) to 27 (c), the operations of the restricting member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in time series. FIG. 27A to FIG. 27C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. FIG. In FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), for ease of understanding, illustration of components unnecessary for explanation is omitted, and the state of the slide plate 2840 changing from the closed state to the open state is omitted. This is illustrated in time series.

  In FIG. 27A, the solenoid 2810 is de-energized, and the state where the tip member 2820 is disposed farthest from the solenoid 2810 is immediately after the solenoid 2810 is excited in FIG. In FIG. 27C, the state in which the tip member 2820 is disposed at the middle position of the movement range is disposed in the state in which the tip member 2820 is most attracted to the solenoid 2810 (the final position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). Each of these states is illustrated. In the state shown in FIG. 27A, the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255, and in the state shown in FIG. The open state that enables the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255 is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state, the regulating member 2600 is in the discharged state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in a non-excited state, it is possible to prevent the restricting member 2600 from being stored due to the action of the second variable winning device 2800. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, the control mode that does not cause the operation of the solenoid 2810 (maintains with non-excitation) (for example, the control mode of the first embodiment). Thus, a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment can be configured.

  Further, when the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 or the second storage channel 2251, the sphere can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the slide plate 2840 is displaced via the transmission member 2830 and the transmission rod portion 2860 is started to be displaced via the interposition rod portion 2850 due to the displacement of the tip member 2820. To do. Here, in the present embodiment, the portion where the interposition rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 abut is slightly spaced in the state of FIG. The operation of the bar 2860 is started almost simultaneously.

  When the transmission rod portion 2860 is displaced downward by being pushed by the end portion of the interposition rod portion 2850, the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 applies a load in the downward direction to the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600. As a result, the regulating member 2600 is pushed down slightly, and is in the middle of the discharge state and the storage state.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (c), when the tip member 2830 has completely moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the end position by the interposition rod portion 2850, and the regulating member 2600 is maintained in the storage state. As shown in FIG. 27 (c), the interposition rod portion 2850 faces the transmission rod portion 2860 side and slides so that the inclined surface passes through the transmission rod portion 2860. The load applied toward 2850 can flow in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the interposition rod portion 2850.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the interposition rod portion 2850 from fluctuating along the moving direction of the interposition rod portion 2850 due to the variation of the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulating member 2600. Therefore, the load applied to the tip member 2820 via the regulating member 2600 can be prevented from fluctuating, and accordingly, the solenoid 2810 for maintaining the slide plate 2840 whose state changes due to the displacement of the tip member 2820 in the open state. Can be prevented from fluctuating. Thereby, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

  Unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the sliding direction generated by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod portion 2860, and the state of the regulating member 2600 is even changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness of the operation of the regulating member 2600 with respect to switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810. Thereby, since it is possible to finely adjust the state change timing of the restricting member 2600, it is possible to suppress the deviation between the control value of the discharge number designated for each interval time between rounds in the jackpot game and the actual discharge number, The number of discharges can be stabilized.

  FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent of the contact portion between the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 and the facing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 forms an angle with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod portion 2860. Therefore, the urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) that urges the regulating member 2600 toward the arrangement in the discharged state effectively acts on the transmission rod portion 2860.

  Therefore, if the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27C) toward the closed state (see FIG. 27A) and the restriction by the interposed rod portion 2850 is released, the biasing force of the torsion spring Thus, the transmission rod portion 2860 can be raised, and the transmission rod portion 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27A).

  FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol in the present embodiment.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each big hit. It is defined in association with the type and the type of the entrance that became the special symbol lottery opportunity. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Note that the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case of a big win in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64), Since it is the same as that described in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. In the following, in this embodiment, a special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big hit. explain.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”. Is defined in association with jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

  When the jackpot d is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed with the fourth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the player can receive the number of payouts obtained by adding a limited increase to about 2250 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “30 to 99”, the big hit e is associated and defined (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

  When the jackpot e is reached, the 15-round jackpot game is executed in the fifth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is 2250 prize balls plus a limited increase amount, but the difficulty of increasing the number of payouts is higher than that of the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing at which the number of payouts is increased, the time required for the big hit game is configured to greatly exceed the case of the big hit d.

  As described above, when the big win is made in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the type of the big win. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, while the number of jackpot rounds is unchanged, the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while providing a difference in the number of payouts.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (round game R in the first to seventh rounds). When a predetermined number of balls are entered into the first variable winning device 2000, the extra payout amount is deducted and the progress of the eighth round is made in a specific round game R (round game R of the eighth round) thereafter. It is configured to maximize the time required. On the other hand, in the round game R after the specific round game R, the player can obtain the extra amount of balls to be paid out by causing the first variable winning device 2000 to enter a predetermined number of balls or more without being deducted. Configured as follows.

  In this case, in the case of jackpot e, the game method that allows the player to obtain the highest profit as the profit including time efficiency is to keep the specified number of winnings until the eighth round, and round games R after the ninth round. The goal is to increase the number of payouts in order to win more than the prescribed number. Therefore, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or unfavorable to put more than a specified number of balls in the first variable prize-winning device 2000 depending on the round game R, and the player's attention to the jackpot game Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an opening pattern of the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 (a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 30 (b) is a diagram showing changes in the fifth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 1st specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot d, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 holds the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning port 2255a, and the first round game R ends.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means solenoids 1510 and 2810 keep the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state to close the second specific prize opening 2255a, and the second round game R is completed.

  The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as the time for discharging ten balls from the discharge port 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12 balls) in each round game R can be awarded to the second specific winning opening 2255a according to the passing timing of the second specific winning opening 2255a. Is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, so that more than 10 balls in each round game R have won the second specific winning port 2255a. At the start of the round game R immediately after that, the exceeding number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

  In the present embodiment, since the maximum number of stored balls when entering the ball from the second storage channel 2251 side is 14, in the jackpot game of jackpot d, the number of winnings exceeding the prescribed number is 15 rounds. Limited to 4 through jackpot games. Accordingly, it is possible to limit the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over-winnings) more than a predetermined number that can be acquired by a player who performs a jackpot game of jackpot d to 60 (= 15 × 4C). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the number of payouts from greatly changing due to a difference in game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows the player to enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between the round games R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. And the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the second specific prize opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round is finished, the solenoid 2810 controls the drive so that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with a jackpot e, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 holds the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning port 2255a, and the first round game R ends.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 closed until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. During the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state to close the second specific prize opening 2255a, and the second round game R is completed.

  The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as the time for discharging ten balls from the discharge port 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12 balls) in each round game R can be awarded to the second specific winning opening 2255a according to the passing timing of the second specific winning opening 2255a. Is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, so that more than 10 balls in each round game R have won the second specific winning port 2255a. At the start of the round game R immediately after that, the exceeding number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third to seventh rounds is repeated between the round games R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace and open and close the second specific prize opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the seventh round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval time Int1 between rounds. After the elapse of time, the eighth round game R is started.

  In the eighth round, the solenoid 1510 starts to measure the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the eighth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eighth round is completed.

  Here, in the round game R before the seventh round, if more than the specified number of balls have passed through the second specific prize opening 2255a, the number of balls exceeding the specified number at the start of the eighth round game R Since the ball remains in the storage channel 1231, in the round game R of the eighth round, only the winning of the number obtained by subtracting the remaining number (the number exceeding the prescribed number up to the seventh round) from the prescribed number is performed. Therefore, the payout of prize balls including the 8th round is made uniform to the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls up to the 8th round. In addition, since the specified number of pachinko balls cannot be won in round game R of the eighth round, after waiting for the lapse of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1, the round of the next round It will move to the game.

  For this reason, the player must feel that the extra balls that were paid out in the 7th round will be lost, and the 8th round game R will be longer than necessary. Will receive. As a result, by the seventh round, it is possible to direct the game to be played carefully so as not to win more than the specified number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the winning of balls exceeding the prescribed number, and to improve the fairness of the game.

  If there are no winnings exceeding the specified number up to the seventh round, the specified number of balls can be passed through one specific winning port 1000a in the round game R of the eighth round, and the specified number of balls are paid out. The round game R of the eighth round can be completed without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round. Accordingly, a predetermined number of prize balls can be paid out while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

  Therefore, in the jackpot game of jackpot e, intentionally suppressing the winnings exceeding the specified number until the seventh round leads to the player's profit. Accordingly, it is possible to maintain the player's attention in the games up to the seventh round.

  When the eighth round of jackpot game R ends, the timer means controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval between rounds. After the elapse of time Int1, the ninth round game R is started. In addition, at the time of the start of the round game R of the ninth round, it is possible to make a state in which no sphere remains in the storage channel 1231.

  In the ninth round, the solenoid 2810 starts to measure the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific prize winning opening 2255a. To control the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the ninth round, The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state to close the second specific prize opening 2255a, and the round game R of the ninth round is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the 10th to 15th rounds is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace and open and close the second specific prize opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 controls the drive so that the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the round game R after the ninth round, the opening / closing plate 1300 does not open / close, so the prize balls paid out by the balls that have won the second specified prize opening 2255a beyond the prescribed number after the ninth round are , The player can receive without being deducted.

  Therefore, when a jackpot game with a jackpot e is performed, until the seventh round, the jackpot game R is controlled so as not to win the second specific winning port 2255a exceeding the specified number, and the jackpot game R after the ninth round is defined. Aiming to win more than the number of second specific winning holes 2255a is a gaming method that allows the player to obtain the greatest profit when considering profit including time efficiency.

  In other words, in the round game R of each round, by placing more than the specified number of balls into the second specific prize opening 2255a, it is possible to cause the player to gain profit and to suffer damage. As a result, different gameplays can be given for each round of the jackpot game, and the attention of the player who plays the jackpot game can be improved (can prevent the jackpot game from being played casually) .

  Further, according to this operation pattern, the round in which the player can receive payout of additional prize balls by winning more than the specified number of balls in the second specific prize opening 2255a is substantially the 9th round or later. Can be limited. As a result, the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to differences in the game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.) can be narrowed, and the payout ball can be prevented from changing greatly. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows the player to enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere that reaches the flow path forming portion when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed and flows down to the downstream of the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is open falls as it is, but the third embodiment is described. The first variable prize-winning device 3000 is configured such that when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the fall of the sphere is delayed so that a part of the spheres can be awarded to the first specific prize opening 1000a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the first variable winning device 3000 in the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the pre-installation plate 3200.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable prize-winning device 3000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a drive device 1500, a regulating member 1600, and a rear cover 1700 similar to those in the first embodiment. A main body member 3100 and a covering front plate 3200 that are slightly different from those of the first embodiment are provided. In FIG. 32, the open / close plate 1300 is shown in a closed state.

  The main body member 3100 is in addition to the configuration of the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (thin plate member 1110, accommodating portion 1120, holding hole 1130, protruding portion 1140, discharge port 1150, rotation support portion 1160, and support claw portion 1170). An additional prize opening 3181 disposed in a manner connected to the left side wall in front view of the covering front plate 3200 on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and upward from the left side wall part in front view of the additional prize opening 3181 And a curved extending plate 3182 that is curved and extended.

  The additional prize opening 3181 is a ball outlet that discharges the balls flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and the upper limit is set to 15 when the balls enter the additional prize opening 3181. The number of prize balls will be paid out. In the present embodiment, 11 balls are set to be paid out.

  The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that restricts the passage of the sphere flowing down the game area by setting the gap in the vertical direction in the game area to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere, and extends in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. . Further, the curved extending plate 3182 is formed in a shape that inclines downward as it goes from the middle abdomen to the left in the front view and descends as it goes from the middle abdomen to the right in the front view.

  In addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, storage portion 1230, and detection sensor 1240) provided in the front cover plate 1200 of the first embodiment, the front cover plate 3200 is provided between the side wall portion 1220 and the storage portion 1230. In this region, a fall delay plate 3250 is provided extending from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the back surface side.

  The fall delay plate 3250 is disposed on the front side of the movement path of the opening / closing plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the opening / closing plate 1300, and is disposed below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. The extended plate portion 3251 extending vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 are connected, and the upper surface has a concave curved shape. A rolling arc portion 3252 to be formed.

  The fall delay plate 3250 has a long shape on the left and right, and decelerates so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the sphere to flow down (including bounce and flow down by rolling) half the length of the plate. It is formed from the shape to do. The opening / closing plate 1300 is formed in such a manner that the ball flows down in one second or less when the sphere flows down a distance half the length of the plate in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the extending plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is inclined and formed in such a manner that the separation width from the main body member 3100 becomes longer as the detection sensor 1240 is approached. An opposing surface 3251a and a terminal surface 3251b which is a surface facing the surface facing the side wall portion 1220 of the housing portion 1230 and is spaced from the housing portion 1230 by a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere.

  The distance between the opposing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is such that the radius of the sphere in the portion disposed vertically below the center of the sphere when the sphere is disposed on the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). In a portion that is switched to a radius greater than or equal to the radius of the sphere at the intermediate position (the middle position in the left-right direction in FIG. 32) and that is disposed vertically below the center of the sphere in the state of being disposed on the most downstream side (right side in FIG. The radius is greater than or equal to the sphere and less than the sphere diameter.

  The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end portion of the opposing surface 3251a extends along the front-rear direction, and smoothly intersects the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 3200. (A tangent drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

  The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 when viewed in the axial direction is set larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, the resistance at the time of a sphere rolling on the rolling arc part 3252 in the front-back direction can be reduced.

  When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the sphere that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the covering front plate 3200 rolls down on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At that time, as shown in FIG. 32, the path from the upstream position Pf1 on the most upstream side to the falling position Pf3, which is the position immediately before the ball is dropped from the rolling arc portion 3252, is positioned downstream as Pf2. To flow down.

  In this embodiment, since the distance from the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 of the opposing surface 3251a of the extension plate portion 3251 is less than the diameter of the sphere, until the sphere reaches the fall position Pf3. The sphere is prevented from passing through the rolling arc portion 3252 and falling. Therefore, the sphere falls from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the sphere reaches the drop position Pf3. Hereinafter, an aspect of the flow of the sphere on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

  34 (a) to 34 (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. In FIG. 34B, a sphere disposed at the upstream position Pf1 is illustrated, and in FIG. 34C, a sphere disposed at the downstream position Pf2 is illustrated. In FIG. 34, illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 34B and FIG. 34C, the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and is in contact with the plate portion 1310. The diameter of the sphere to the contact portion with the drop delay plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion and the center of the sphere in the axial direction) is shortened as it flows down.

  That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34 (b), the diameter length r1 up to the portion where the sphere contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the sphere. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34 (c), the radial length r2 up to the portion where the sphere contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is made shorter than the radius of the sphere.

  These radial lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of rotation of the sphere when the sphere is rotated about the axis along the front-rear direction as the rotation axis. In other words, if the rotational speed of the sphere is the same, the rolling speed of the sphere decreases (the sphere is delayed) as the diameter lengths r1 and r2 are shorter. According to the present embodiment, the facing surface 3251a is formed to be inclined in such a manner that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases toward the downstream side. Therefore, the radius of rotation of the sphere is gradually shortened as the sphere flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (right side in FIG. 31). Therefore, the rolling speed of the sphere can be reduced as the sphere flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side.

  Further, the extended plate portion 3251 extends along the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300. In FIG. 34 showing the axial view, FIG. 34 (c) is compared with the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). In the state shown in (), the sphere is displaced downward. That is, as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the ball can be separated from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, the ball flowing down the fall delay plate 3250 can be displaced from the first specific winning opening 1000a. it can.

  Thus, even if the ball preventing portion 1331 is not formed on the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream end and is directed toward the first specific winning opening 1000a with its momentum. It is possible to prevent a situation where a prize is won by flying.

  Next, a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 moves upward to the open state while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 3000, and FIG. 35 (c) shows the first variable winning device 3000 along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 35A shows the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300, FIGS. 35B and 35C show the opened state of the opening / closing plate 1300, and FIG. 35C shows the opening / closing plate 1300. The external shape of the plate portion 1310 and the sphere in the closed state is illustrated with an imaginary line, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. Moreover, in FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B, an example of a sphere that has entered the flow path forming portion of the first variable prize-winning device 3000 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the sphere that has landed on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 moves to the right in front view along the extending direction of the extending plate portion 3251. When the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains the closed state as it is, it drops after reaching the drop position Pf3. At this time, due to the action of the extension plate portion 3251 described above, the rolling speed of the sphere can be gradually reduced, the rolling time of the sphere can be maintained longer, and the attention to the sphere can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 35B, when the opening / closing plate 1300 moves upward (rotates) while the ball rolls, the ball pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 rolls. It smoothly moves up and down along the arc shape of the moving arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent of the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the portion where the sphere contacts at the start of the movement of the sphere faces in the front-rear direction, the operation of the sphere at the start of the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be made smooth. it can.

  The flow-down direction when the sphere moves upward and rolls down on the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 is parallel to the flow-down direction illustrated in FIG. Therefore, compared with the case where the flow direction of the sphere changes before and after the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300, the feeling of discomfort felt by the player who visually recognizes the operation of the sphere before and after the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be alleviated. it can.

  As described above, when the sphere is disposed below the plate portion 1310 of the open / close plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35C), the open / close plate 1300 moves upward to open the sphere. Is pushed back (reversely flows) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300, so that it is possible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a. In other words, a ball that is disposed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and has once been unable to win the first specific winning opening 1000a can be put into the first specific winning opening 1000a by moving upward. Since it can be returned, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In other words, both FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B illustrate a state in which the sphere is disposed on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 because there is still a possibility that the sphere passes through the detection sensor 1240. It can be said that. That is, due to the action of the fall delay plate 3250, the sphere can be maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed.

  In addition, even when it becomes impossible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 flows down in the direction approaching the first specific winning opening 1000a. The player can have a sense of expectation that he may win the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the player's attention can be maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the opening / closing plate 1300 forms the closed state, the falling of the sphere reaching the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 is delayed, and then the rolling surface 1311 when the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the open state. By being configured to be able to be revived above, it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball that has reached in front of the opening / closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds in the jackpot game will win the first specific winning opening 1000a in the next round game. The number of balls passing through the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and entering the first out port 66 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the opening of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be prevented from being hindered due to the sphere being arranged on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. That is, in a structure in which a ball can freely flow down the front side of an opening / closing plate as in a conventional gaming machine, the opening / closing plate operates to insert a ball between the opening / closing plate and the glass plate, thereby opening and closing the ball. There was a problem that the opening of the board was hindered, and there was a risk of loss for the player.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, while the sphere rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 in front of the opening / closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotation shaft of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sphere is maintained almost constant (restricted). can do. Therefore, the sphere is sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the glass plate as compared with the case where the sphere freely flows down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the separation distance of the sphere from the rotation shaft is freely changed. The risk of hindering the operation of the plate 1300 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the sphere is sandwiched between the glass plate in the middle of the opening / closing plate 1300 changing to the open state, and is slightly higher than the arrangement of the spheres that may hinder the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. The fall delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the sphere is maintained at the position.

  36 (a) and 36 (b) are schematic diagrams showing the flow-down mode of the sphere that has reached the first variable prize-winning device 3000. FIG. In FIG. 36 (a), when the ball is left unattended, the flow of the two balls that have reached the first variable prize-winning device 3000 is shown in time series. In FIG. 36 (b), for example, the first ball A ball when the two balls reach the first variable winning device 3000 by performing a special method of hitting the ball weakly and hitting the second ball strongly (so-called “twisting”). Are shown in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the sphere is released and the first sphere P1 and the second sphere P2 reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 with a predetermined interval, When the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state when P1 wins the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball P2 can still be placed on the upstream side of the fall delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, since it is possible to secure a long time until the ball P2 flows down the fall delay plate 3250, it is easy to maintain the ball on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 until the next time the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened. Can do.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when two balls reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 in series, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by the ball P1 winning the first specific winning opening 1000a. When switching to the state, since the ball P2 is arranged near the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 (falling position Pf3), it is not possible to wait until the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened next, and the ball P2 is dropped. Fall from plate 3250.

  Thus, in this embodiment, compared to the case where two spheres flow down in a series by a special hitting method, the case where two balls flow down at a predetermined interval by releasing (normal hitting) It is easier to receive the action of the fall delay plate 3250 (changing the ball that has reached the front of the opening / closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds into a state in which it can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a). Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game due to a special method such as twisting.

  FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 37, a state immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 changes from the closed state to the opened state is illustrated, and a ball that jumps upward by colliding with the opening / closing plate 1300 is illustrated.

  In this embodiment, when a ball lands on the open / close plate 1300 in the open state, a bounce as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball that has landed on the open / close plate 1300 bounces back while the open / close plate 1300 moves upward. Only the ball bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

  The subsequent flow of the bounced ball is limited to either returning to the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 or winning the additional prize opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. Is done. Therefore, the player can receive a payout of the winning ball by the bound ball. Therefore, a situation in which a ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing during which the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state eventually enters the first out port 66 and the player cannot obtain profits. Can be prevented.

  In addition, even when a ball wins in the additional winning opening 3181, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls can be awarded in the first specific winning opening 1000a separately. The payout due to winning in the mouth 3181 becomes a prize ball (additional profit) to be paid out beyond the prescribed number. That is, since the player can make a difference in the profits obtained by whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing that the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, It is possible to improve attention to the sphere that flows down.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In 1st Embodiment, the case where the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol was provided as added value after the end of jackpot was given irrespective of the difference in the flow-down mode of the ball that entered the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable prize-winning device 4000 in the fourth embodiment includes a probability variation determination unit that performs a determination regarding acquisition of the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol based on a difference in the flow-down mode of the sphere. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is shown in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 39, in this embodiment, a probability window is formed in which a transmission window is formed in the game board 13 in the lower portion of the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable prize winning device 4000 and is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable prize winning device 4000 has the same configuration as the first embodiment (main body member 1100, covering front plate 1200, opening / closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, driving device 1500, regulating member 1600. And a rear cover 1700), and a new probability variation determination unit 4800 in the fourth embodiment.

  The probability variation determination unit 4800 is a flow path in which a sphere discharged from the discharge port 1150 flows down, and is a flow path branched into a bifurcated flow that communicates with a communication path 4810 that extends vertically downward and a lower end of the communication path 4810. A probability variation determination channel 4820 that is a road, a specific region 4830 that is in communication with the channel on the left side of the probability variation determination channel 4820 in front view, and a channel that is in communication with the channel on the right side in front view. A non-specific region 4840, a sorting device 4850 arranged to be able to interfere with the game ball at a branch portion of the probability variation determination flow path 4820, a specific region detection sensor 4860 for detecting the passage of the game ball in the specific region 4830, And a non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects passage of a game ball in the specific area 4540.

  The communication path 4810 is formed with a length of approximately one second before the ball that has entered from the discharge port reaches the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

  The distribution device 4850 is disposed so as to protrude inside the probability variation determination flow path 4820, and causes the sphere to flow down to the specific area 4830 (form an open state) and to flow to the non-specific area 4840 (closed state). A sorting operation member 4851 that is operable between the closed position and a solenoid 4852 that drives the sorting operation member 4851 is mainly provided.

  It is only in the special round (the fifth round in this embodiment) during the jackpot game that the probability variation determination unit 4800 makes a determination regarding acquisition of the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In the special round, the sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the right side for a time that allows the game ball to pass. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in an open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in a closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game is over, the state shifts to a special symbol probability change state (high probability state). The present embodiment is configured in such a manner that, in a high probability state of a special symbol, the hit probability of a normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and a ball can easily win a second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol probable state), for example, 40 A special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1 /.

  When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game is over, a special symbol probability variation state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times. After the end, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, there are five types of special jackpot types: “big hit D”, “big hit E”, “big hit F”, “big hit G”, and “big hit f” (see FIG. 40). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific prize opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the distribution device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 4000, The special symbol is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state).

  FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 includes each jackpot type and special It is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”. Is defined in association with jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot D is reached, a five-round jackpot game is executed with the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “30 to 49”, the big hit E is associated and defined (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot E is reached, a five-round jackpot game is executed in the seventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 675 prize balls, and can rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability variation state (high probability state).

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79”, the big hit F is associated and defined (see 202b43 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot F is reached, a five-round jackpot game is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, the big hit G is associated and defined (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot is G, five rounds of jackpot game are executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 750 prize balls and can rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state).

  As described above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64), the right to shift the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state) with a probability of 50%. Can be surely acquired. On the other hand, even with the remaining 50%, it is possible to acquire the right to shift to a probable change state (high probability state) of special symbols.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 94”, The jackpot f is defined in association with it (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot f is reached, similarly to the jackpot D, a five-round jackpot game is executed with the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99”, the big hit g is associated and defined (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot g is reached, a five-round jackpot game is executed with the tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 600 prize balls, and can rarely acquire the right to shift to a probable change state (high probability state) of a special symbol.

  As described above, if the big win is made in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the first variable prize-winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850 have a 95% probability. Operates with an operating pattern. At this time, the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol can be acquired almost certainly, so the special symbol 1 can be drawn by lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64). It is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the jackpot is won. Therefore, in order to obtain a big win in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player plays the right-handed game. Do.

  During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting the normal symbol is lengthened (1 Second x 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd entrance 640, it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2 lottery. Therefore, once it is possible to make a transition to the probable change state of the special symbol, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and if it is a big win, it will make a big hit f (almost certainly the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state). It is easy for players to win a large number of prize balls because the probabilistic state of special symbols that are likely to become a big hit) can be repeated. Thus, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. 43, the opening pattern of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 41A is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific prize opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41B is a first specific prize in the seventh operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the sixth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 are operated based on the sixth operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses in a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are controlled to be held, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the first specific winning opening 1000a by displacing the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. During the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first time. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

  When the second round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the third round game R is started.

  In the third round, as with the start of the second round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first specification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the case of the round game R in the third round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R in the third round is completed.

  When the round game R of the third round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds has elapsed. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to receive the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) performs measurement until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time. After the passage of OP3, the solenoid is operated to move the sorting operation member 4851 to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 0.1 second) and to keep the sorting operation member 4851 in the closed state again after the predetermined time has passed. 4852 is driven to cause the sorting operation member 4851 to perform a short-time operation. This predetermined time is set as a time during which passage of the sphere to the specific area 4830 is not permitted.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is completed.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to launch a ball one by one at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the fastest speed, but it takes 6 seconds to fire a prescribed number. That is, as a general estimate, only about 5 balls can be made to enter the first specific prize winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R in the fourth round is completed in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage flow path 1231 is filled by approximately 5 winnings that can be made in 3 seconds, so that the feeling of discomfort given to the player due to the time of the round game R of the fourth round being shorter than the other rounds is suppressed. can do.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds) after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  When the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is less than seven (when the number of stored items is up to six), the second opening time OP2 is the probability variation determination channel 4820. When the number of spheres discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is 7 or more (when the number of storage is 7 or more), at least one of the discharged spheres is longer. It is set as a time shorter than the time when the part of the sphere passes through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  In this embodiment, the round game R of the fourth round is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, even if the round game of the fourth round ends at the second operation time T2, Seven or more spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be easily formed. Accordingly, since the sorting operation member 4851 can be opened while the sphere remains in the probability variation determination flow path 4820, the remaining sphere can flow down to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of time.

  Here, unlike the prior art, in this operation pattern, it is not necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the sorting operation member 4851 is closed before the operation in the round game R of the fifth round. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be operated without a sense of incongruity. This will be described below.

  In the prior art, when the specified number of balls have won the first specific winning opening 1000a and the round game R has ended before the start of the operation of the distribution operation member 4581, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. However, there is a possibility that the ball cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the sorting operation member 4851 is closed before the operation (it was opened twice within one round).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game is to switch whether or not the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a by the round game R immediately before the fifth round can enter the specific area 4830. Even if the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a while the sorting operation member 4851 is closed before the operation, the sorting operation member 4851 is in the open state. Since the sphere heading for the specific area 4830 has already won the first variable winning device 4000, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

  Therefore, in this operation pattern, even when the sorting operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation in the round game R in the fifth round, the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates. On the other hand, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol due to the winning mode. can do.

  In addition, since the ball that won the first specific prize opening 1000a in the round game R in the fifth round stays in the storage flow path 1231 during the first operation time T1, the first game in the round game R in the fifth round It is possible to prevent the ball that has won the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability variation determination channel 4820 while the sorting operation member 4851 is in the open state. Accordingly, the player may acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol according to the winning mode to the first specific winning port 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that whether or not it can be changed.

<When operating in the seventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 are operated based on the seventh operation pattern. Since the process up to the end of the third round of round game R is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, the description thereof is omitted. The driving mode of the sorting device 4850 is the same as that of the sixth operation pattern.

  When the third round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to receive the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) performs measurement until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time. After the passage of OP3, the solenoid is operated to move the sorting operation member 4851 to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 0.1 second) and to keep the sorting operation member 4851 in the closed state again after the predetermined time has passed. 4852 is driven to cause the sorting operation member 4851 to perform a short-time operation. This short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow passage of the sphere to the specific region 4830.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is completed.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to launch a ball one by one at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the fastest speed, but it takes 6 seconds to fire a prescribed number. That is, as a general estimate, only about 5 balls can be made to enter the first specific prize winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R in the fourth round is completed in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in this operation pattern, 10 balls (all balls) are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Accordingly, the storage channel 1231 is not filled by approximately five winnings that can be made in 3 seconds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state in a state where the balls that have won in 3 seconds remain in the storage channel 1231. .

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds) after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  In this operation pattern, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the round game R in the fifth round is about 5 balls, so that for some rare reason, 8 balls or more in 3 seconds are the first specific prize. Unless the prize is won in the mouth 1000a, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced after all the discharged balls have passed through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

  Therefore, when the sorting operation member 4851 is in the open state, no sphere remains in the probability variation determination flow path 4820, so that the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of time.

  In this operation pattern, since the operation modes of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the round game R of the fifth round are the same as the sixth operation pattern described above, the sixth operation pattern also in this operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as in the above.

  Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not the ball can be stored to the vicinity of the full capacity of the storage channel 1231 during the round game R of the fourth round. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol due to the difference in the accumulation state of the sphere, so that it accumulates in the storage flow path 1231. The attention to the sphere can be improved. Thereby, attention to the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

  In addition, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter the round game R in the fourth round, it is possible to almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Yes, but because the time of the round game R is short, the more the player gets used to the game, the more the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state) of the special symbol in the sixth operation pattern will fail. Easy situations are formed.

  In other words, an unfamiliar player is easier to play while hitting a jackpot game, while a player who is used to playing is easier to avoid hitting and avoiding a round to avoid wasted balls between the big hits. Is the difference arising from

  More specifically, in the case of a play game, a plurality of balls are always flowing in the vicinity of the opening / closing plate 1300, and a ball is awarded to the first specific winning port 1000a immediately after the start of the round game R in the fourth round. Therefore, if there are 3 seconds, there is enough room for 3 or more balls to enter. Therefore, an unfamiliar player can acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

  On the other hand, when the round game R is started after the start of the round game R in the fourth round, and when the ball is stopped between rounds so as to prevent the ball from flowing down near the opening / closing plate 1300 during the interval period, Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening / closing plate 1300 if it has not been for a while since the start of the round game R of the fourth round (for example, if 2 seconds have not elapsed). Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more spheres in the remaining one second, and it becomes difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to direct a player who has become accustomed to the game to hit the game while hitting the jackpot game.

  In this way, the sixth operation pattern inherently has a risk that the profits obtained by those who are used to the game will be reduced depending on the manner of launching. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or accustomed, it is possible to direct the player to play with a big hit and to ensure the fairness of the profits obtained by the game.

  On the other hand, on the other hand, it is possible to provide a jackpot game requiring concentration that cannot be tasted by other pachinko machines 10 for a player who stops the rounds after grasping the risks described above. . That is, the number of wasted balls can be reduced by performing a round-stop shot in which the calculation is started so that the ball flows into the first specific prize opening 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specific prize opening 1000a in the fourth round. However, it is also possible to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In this case, before the end of the round game R of the third round, the round is stopped, and the start is started before the end of the round game R of the third round. That is, it is necessary to perform advanced calculation to start launching while predicting the timing of entering the ball while considering the randomness of the flow of the ball entering during the round game R of the third round. Accordingly, when the timing at which the ball that has started launching reaches the vicinity of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a is as calculated, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Fig.42 (a) is a figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific prize opening 1000a and the specific area | region 4830 in an 8th action pattern, FIG.42 (b) is the 1st specific prize in a 9th action pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the eighth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with a jackpot F, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 are operated based on the eighth operation pattern. Since the process up to the end of the third round of round game R is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  When the round game R of the third round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds has elapsed. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses in the timer means (not shown). And after the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the sorting operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is completed.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Accordingly, in the round game R in the fourth round, a specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific prize opening 1000a. Therefore, the round game R in the fourth round is 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1. The process ends when

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds) after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. This opening operation is performed simultaneously with the opening operation after the third opening time OP3.

  When the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the round game R of the fourth round continues at the maximum value of the first operating time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage) When the number is 7 or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time when at least some of the discharged spheres pass through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  In this operation pattern, the fourth round game R starts with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the fourth round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Therefore, if there are seven or more spheres stored in the storage channel 1231, the sorting operation member 4851 may be opened with the spheres remaining in the probability variation determination channel 4820. it can. Therefore, the remaining ball can flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of time.

  In this operation pattern, since the operation modes of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the round game R of the fifth round are the same as the sixth operation pattern described above, the sixth operation pattern also in this operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as in the above.

<When operating in the ninth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with a jackpot G, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 are operated based on the ninth operation pattern. Since the process up to the end of the third round of round game R is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, the description thereof is omitted. The driving mode of the sorting device 4850 is the same as that of the eighth operation pattern.

  When the third round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses in the timer means (not shown). And after the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the sorting operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is completed.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Accordingly, in the round game R in the fourth round, a specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific prize opening 1000a. Therefore, the round game R in the fourth round is 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1. The process ends when

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 0.2 seconds) after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it closed again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a short time. This short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow passage of the sphere to the specific region 4830.

  When the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the round game R of the fourth round continues at the maximum value of the first operating time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage) When the number is 7 or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time when at least some of the discharged spheres pass through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  In this operation pattern, the round game R in the fourth round is started in a state where no balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, in the round game R in the fourth round, a prescribed number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to finish the round game R of the fourth round without waiting for the maximum value of the first operation time T1. However, when the round game R of the fourth round is terminated without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1, as in the case where the round game R of the fourth round is terminated by a predetermined number of winnings, in many cases Immediately after that, the sphere discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability variation determination flow path 4820, and then the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced.

  On the other hand, if the sorting operation member 4851 ends the round game R of the fourth round until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 is finished, and if there are 7 or more balls discharged in the immediately following interval, The sphere can flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, the player does not rush the specified number of winnings, but by making the specified number of balls win at the first specific winning opening 1000a just before the end of the round game R of the fourth round, It is possible to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state).

  As another method, the round game R of the fifth round immediately after the fourth round is terminated at an appropriate timing, so that the balls discharged in the interval immediately after the round game R of the fifth round are placed in a specific area. Even by making it flow down, the player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state).

  As described above, according to this operation pattern, the player can change to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol at the discretion of the player (selection of the timing of winning the ball to the first specific winning port 1000a, etc.). Whether or not the right to transfer can be acquired can be varied.

  When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of time.

  Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the round game R in the fourth round is specified. When the operation time is designated (in the case of the eighth operation pattern), the player can receive a special symbol no matter how the game is played by continuing to enter the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a. Since it is possible to acquire the right to shift to a certain probability change state (high probability state), it is possible to play a game with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when the operation time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operation pattern), the player himself selects the operation time according to the game mode (when the predetermined number of balls are to be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a). In some cases, it is possible to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to concentrate on the round game R, improve the attention to the sphere flowing down the game area, and give the player a sense of uplifting to acquire the promising state by himself. Thereby, improvement of a player's interest can be aimed at.

  As a feature of the sixth operation pattern to the ninth operation pattern, the round game of the fourth round with the interval remaining immediately after the round game R of the third round is shorter than usual and the ball remains in the storage channel 1231. When R is started, it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol. That is, when the number of prize balls obtained in the round game R in the fourth round is small, it is possible to realize a gameability in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the round game R in the third round is long enough to discharge all the balls in the storage channel 1231, the right to transition to the probable state (high probability state) of the special symbol is granted. It is difficult to get. That is, it is possible to realize the gameability that the payout of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game is increased when it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. This makes it possible to prepare a larger number of balls that the player launches in a normal state to be continued later, so that it is possible to easily suppress the player's cash investment.

  Since these differences can be grasped by whether or not a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fourth round, at the start of the round game R in the fourth round, the player expects the state after the end of the jackpot game can do. And even in the case of an operation pattern where it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to a certain symbol (high probability state) of a special symbol, the right to shift to a certain symbol (high probability state) depending on the form of the sphere It is possible to get

  Here, in this embodiment, the player's concentration can be maintained by pressing the player to select. In other words, the game mode that makes it easier to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is the opposite.

  Specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the round game R of the fourth round, before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses, as many balls as possible are placed in the first specific winning opening 1000a. While winning the chance increases the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to a probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol (there is an advantage in winning many balls from the start of the fourth round) In the case of 9 operation patterns, in the round game R of the 4th round, a predetermined number of balls are won until the end of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and the period of the round game R is extended. This increases the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol (there is an advantage in suppressing the winning of the ball at the start of the fourth round).

  In this way, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol changes depending on the way of winning the ball in the round game R (the game mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to maintain concentration on the game.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the tenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 are operated based on the tenth operation pattern. Note that the process up to the end of the round game R in the fourth round is the same as that in the case of the sixth operation pattern described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 0.2 seconds) after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it closed again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a short time.

  When the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  In this operation pattern, since the opening operation of the sorting operation member 4851 after the elapse of the second opening time OP2 is a short-time operation, the sphere cannot basically flow down to the specific region 4830.

  In addition, since the sorting operation member 4851 is opened during the round game R of the fifth round, if the round game can be finished early, the ball that won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round flows down to the specific area 4830. However, in this operation pattern, the round game R in the fifth round starts with a ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be entered, and the fifth round game cannot be terminated early. Therefore, the ball won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R cannot flow down to the specific area 4830.

  When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of time.

  In this operation pattern, the operation modes of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the round game R in the fifth round have the same parts as the above-described sixth operation pattern. The effect similar to the effect in 6 operation | movement patterns can be show | played.

  Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning opening 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the round game R in the fourth round. Since the pattern of the other parts is the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

  In the tenth operation pattern, in relation to the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern, even if the storage channel 1231 can be filled in the round game R of the fourth round, the ball flows down to the specific area 4830. It differs in that it can not.

  That is, by mixing this operation pattern, even if the player can store the ball in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in the fourth round to the full, the discharged ball is not relieved. It can be prompted to confirm whether or not to pass 4830. That is, in the jackpot game, the stage (first step) of whether or not the storage channel 1231 can store the ball, and the sorting operation member 4851 operates before the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes. It can be divided into the stage (second step) of whether or not, and attention can be paid to different parts for each stage. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing casually and to improve the concentration of the player.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a winning ball corresponding to a jackpot type can be obtained regardless of the progress of the game in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment The 5000 includes a pitch adjustment device 5900 that makes it easier for a player to acquire more balls as the number of changes until the jackpot is acquired in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is reduced. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable prize-winning device 5000 disposed near the lower right corner of the game board 13 includes a main body member 2100, a covering front plate 2200, and the like, as in the second embodiment. In addition to including the opening / closing plate 1300, the drive device 1500, and the restriction member 2600, a power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, A ball exit adjusting device 5900 that adjusts the ball exit by entering the ball entering the second entrance 640 into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 is mainly provided.

  The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 extending downward from the lower end portion of the rotating tip portion 1421 of the extending portion 1420 along the shape of the rotating tip portion 1421.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the time difference forming portion 5423 has its lower end extended to a position where it contacts the engaging portion 1333 of the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state when the solenoid 1510 is not excited.

  The second variable prize-winning device 5800 can be slid up and down in the left direction in the rear view of the interposition bar part 5850 and the transmission bar part 2860 in addition to the configuration described in the second embodiment. It is arranged so that it can be brought into contact with the movable closing member 5931 of the ball adjusting device 5900 by being pushed down by the branching portion of the interposition rod portion 5850 (the L-shaped portion in rear view added to the configuration of the interposition rod portion 2850 of the second embodiment). A pressing action portion 5870 is provided.

  The exit ball adjusting device 5900 is formed so as to penetrate the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end portion of the downflow passage forming portion 5910 for flowing down the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 and at the lower end portion of the downflow passage forming portion 5910. A communication hole 5920 provided in a manner (opening diameter and arrangement) that allows a sphere to flow into the flow path 1231, and an opening / closing member 5930 that opens and closes the communication hole 5920 in conjunction with driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810. Prepare for. In addition, the flow-down passage forming portion 5910 is arranged in a mode of passing through the back side (the front side in FIG. 45) of the second variable prize-winning device 5800, but is illustrated with an imaginary line for easy understanding. In addition, the intermediate portion is not shown.

  The flow-down passage forming portion 5910 is a bifurcated flow path in which a ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640 flows down, and an opening at the lower end is arranged to face the communication hole 5920, and the ball enters the communication hole 5920. The adjustment flow path 5911 formed so as to be allowed to flow in, and the number of balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911 exceeds the specified number (30 in the present embodiment), and further enters the second entrance 640. And a surplus sphere discharge channel 5915 for discharging the collected spheres to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

  The adjustment flow path 5911 includes a deceleration flow path 5912 formed as a reverse U-shaped flow path that is curved by a half turn near the lower end portion, and the second entrance 640 from the upper end portion of the deceleration flow path 5912. And a drop channel 5913 extending in the vertical direction toward the rear.

  Due to the shape of the deceleration flow path 5912, the load applied to the opening direction of the communication hole 5920 by the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 from the subsequent sphere staying in the deceleration flow path 5912 is reduced regardless of the number of staying balls. be able to. In other words, the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 is subjected to a load due to the weight of the subsequent sphere from the subsequent sphere, so that the deceleration flow path 5912 has a gentle inclination near the communication hole 5920 (an inclination close to horizontal). Therefore, the influence of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, the speed at which the sphere immediately before the communication hole 5920 is discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load applied from the sphere to the opening / closing member 5930 can be made uniform, regardless of the number of staying balls.

  Since the falling flow path 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the ball that flows down does not undergo deceleration and falls freely. Accordingly, when balls enter the second entrance 640 in succession, the previous ball is decelerated earlier than the subsequent ball, and the subsequent ball is erroneously prevented by preventing the subsequent ball from flowing down. Thus, it is possible to prevent the balls from entering the surplus ball discharge channel 5915.

  In this embodiment, the adjustment flow path 5911 causes the spheres to stay in order from the front of the communication hole 5920, and when the number of staying spheres is 30, the upper end of the 30th sphere becomes the surplus sphere discharge flow path 5915. The channel length is designed to exceed the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, the balls after the 31st ball enter the surplus ball discharge channel 5915. In other words, 30 balls at the maximum stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, after the jackpot game is over, the state shifts to a high probability state of 30 rotations. During this time, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and the player can aim the next jackpot while suppressing the ball loss by advancing the game by right-handed game. On the other hand, since the ball that entered the second entrance 640 enters the adjustment flow path 5911, the ball stays in the adjustment flow path 5911 from the start of the high probability state toward the end of the high probability state. The sphere increases.

  The opening / closing member 5930 is disposed at a position protruding to the inside of the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are not energized, and closes the opening below the outer shape of the sphere, while one of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is excited. Accordingly, the movable closing member 5931 disposed at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, the movable closing member 5931 and the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500 are connected, and can be moved in the left-right direction as the solenoid 1510 is driven. A connecting rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110, a slide rail portion 5933 which is disposed at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supports the movable closing member 5931 with respect to the connecting rod portion 5932 so as to be relatively movable up and down. One end of the connecting rod portion 5932 is provided to apply an upward biasing force to the movable closing member 5931. An elastic spring 5934, mainly comprising.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 along the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. FIG. 46A illustrates a state where the communication hole 5920 is opened, and FIG. 46B illustrates a state where the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and a sphere can flow into the storage channel 1231 from the communication hole 5920 and can stay, the third ball sphere AP53 flows into the storage channel 1231. The fourth ball AP54 is held at a position where it does not come out of the communication hole 5920.

  In the jackpot game, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) that have passed through the first specific winning port 1000a or the second specific winning port 2255a in this state flow into the storage channel 1231. A space for entering the storage channel 1231 is filled with the sphere IP 51 into which the sphere AP 54 held at a position not missing from the 5920 flows. Therefore, the sphere retained at a position where it does not escape from the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 and is maintained at the position as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized, and the movable closing member 5931 moves from the overhanging adjustment channel 5911 to the storage channel 1231 as the regulating member 2600 changes to the discharged state. Inflow of the sphere is restricted.

  When the discharge of the sphere from the storage flow path 1231 is completed, the sphere AP 54 that has been retained at a position where it has not been removed from the communication hole 5920 is the top by switching to the state shown in FIG. 46A again. Until the sphere flows into the storage channel 1231.

  In the jackpot game, as described above, the inflow of the spheres from the adjustment channel 5911 to the storage channel 1231 is repeated, and the number of inflows is defined at a maximum of three for each opening of the communication hole 5920. The

  Referring to FIG. 47, a case where a big hit game progresses by driving solenoid 1510 will be described. 47 (a) to 47 (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 47 (a) to 47 (c), the operations of the opening / closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600, and the opening / closing member 5930 by driving the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in time series.

  47A, the solenoid 1510 is energized, and in FIG. 47B, the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the tip of the time difference forming portion 5423 is the back side of the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 47). FIG. 47C shows a state where the time difference forming portion 5423 is placed above the engaging portion 1333, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the communication hole 5920 is opened when the solenoid 1510 is excited, so that the ball can pass therethrough.

  When the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), the movable closing member 5931 moves with the movement of the tip member 1520 to close the communication hole 5920, while the opening / closing plate 1300 is engaged. Since the portion 1333 still contacts the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction and the movement of the opening / closing plate 1300 is restricted, the restriction member 2600 maintains the storage state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), the regulating member 2600 is in the discharge state, and the spheres that have stayed in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged. That is, in the drive of the solenoid 1510, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the sphere from the discharge port 1150 is started, so that the adjustment flow path is adjusted according to the momentum of the discharge of the sphere from the discharge port 1150. It is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing in from 5911.

  48 (a) and 48 (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the opening / closing member 5930 by driving the solenoid 2810 are shown in time series. FIG. 48A shows a state where the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 are not excited, and FIG. 48B shows a state where the solenoid 2810 is excited.

  As shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B, when the solenoid 2810 is energized, the movable closing member 5931 is pushed down by the pressing action portion 5870, thereby opening the communication hole 5920. Thereby, the sphere can flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the biasing force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  Accordingly, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened and the sphere can flow into the storage flow path 1231. On the other hand, when the solenoid 1510 is not excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened. It is closed and the inflow to the storage channel 1231 is restricted.

  In the jackpot game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled by the mechanism described above, a certain number of balls (maximum of three in this embodiment) flow into the storage flow path 1231 through the communication holes 5920.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes A special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1. And if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, after the jackpot game is finished, the special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times. After the end, it is configured to be set to the normal state. The present embodiment is configured in such a manner that, in a high probability state of a special symbol, the hit probability of a normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and a ball can easily win a second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, there are three types of special jackpot types: “hit H”, “hit h”, and “hit i” (see FIG. 49). Although the details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a are different depending on the type of jackpot so that the number of balls that can enter the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. Composed.

  FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 includes each of the big hit types and the special hit types. It is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”. Is defined in association with jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

  When the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19” and the big hit h Are defined in association with each other (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

  When the jackpot H or jackpot h is reached, the 15 round jackpot game is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls, can receive a specified number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive a specified upper limit payout.

  When the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “20 to 99” and the big win i Are defined in association with each other (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

  When the jackpot is i, 15 rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the number of winning balls to be paid out and the time required for the jackpot game are variable according to the number of balls entered at the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is acquired.

  In other words, when a special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big hit, it is possible to pay out a specified number of prize balls regardless of the timing of the big hit, If the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the winning ball will be awarded according to the number of entrances to the second entrance 640 until the big hit. Since the maximum number of payouts and the time required for a jackpot game are variable, the game in which the winning of a right-handed game is different from the game of winning a jackpot in a right-handed game is different. Can add sex. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the right-handed game from being played loosely, and to improve the attention to each variation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the opening pattern of the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50A is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the time change of 1st specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the eleventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 are operated based on the eleventh operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 holds the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning port 2255a, and the first round game R ends.

  In the round game R of the first round, with the opening of the second specific prize opening 2255a, the communication holes 5920 are opened, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48). 2 When storing spheres from the storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, 13 spheres can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, so that the number of spheres flowing from the communication hole 5920 (1 to 1) 3), the round game R can be ended with a predetermined number (10C) of winnings.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means solenoids 1510 and 2810 keep the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 closed until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. And the second round game R is started after the elapse of the third interval time Int3 between rounds. Here, since a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 at intervals of 3 seconds, a part of the storage flow path 1231 and the second storage flow path 2251 at the end of the round game R of the first round. It is possible to discharge all balls that can be stored continuously (up to 14 balls).

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state to close the second specific prize opening 2255a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between the round games R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. And the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the second specific prize opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round is finished, the solenoid 2810 controls the drive so that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 closed until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

  According to this operation pattern, three spheres flow from the adjustment channel 5911 to the storage channel 1231 every time the solenoid 2810 is driven (excitation). Therefore, even when the maximum number (30) of balls are stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, the entire flow is stored until the end of the big hit game (at the end of the round game R of the tenth round). Since the ball can be entered into the path 1231, the big hit game can be completed in a state where no ball remains in the storage flow path 1231.

<When operating in the twelfth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with a jackpot i, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 holds the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started. Since the fourth round game R is the same as the eleventh operation pattern, the description thereof is omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the third interval time Int3, the fifth round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  Here, in the round game R of the fifth round, it is possible for the ball to flow from the communication hole 5920, but unlike the fourth round, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. For this reason, when the inflow of the balls from the communication hole 5920 is actually performed, a prescribed number of balls cannot be won. Accordingly, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the round game R of the fifth round of this operation pattern is smaller than the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the round game R of the same round in the eleventh operation pattern. Since the end of the round game R is waited until the operating time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the jackpot game is lengthened.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the sixth to fifteenth rounds is repeated between the round games R with the third interval time Int3 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace and open and close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round is finished, the solenoid 1510 controls the drive so that the timer means holds the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

  In this operation pattern, the decrease in the number of prize balls that can occur in the subsequent round game R and the extension of the round time from the round game R in the fifth round, the ball flows into the storage channel 1231 from the communication hole 5920. Depending on the number of spheres remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the start of the big hit, how much a decrease in the number of prize balls or an extension of the round time varies. While the number of spheres remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of spheres that have passed through the second entrance 640, the lottery of the special symbol 2 (second entrance) Therefore, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 is related to the number of lotteries for the special symbol 2.

  In the following description, in this operation pattern, the number of lotteries of special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) in the high probability state and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 are described. Will be described assuming that the number is the same.

  As described above, in the jackpot game of this operation pattern, the three specific balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 by opening the first specific winning port 1000a or the second specific winning port 2255a once. In other words, up to round game R in the fourth round, a maximum of 12 balls have already flowed into storage channel 1231. Therefore, in the round game after the fifth round, the ball flows into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920, and the jackpot game is started with 13 or more balls stored in the adjustment channel 5911. Is the case. In other words, after the transition to the high probability state, the jackpot game is started in a state where the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) has been received 13 times or more. .

  Therefore, the number of winning balls will be reduced if the jackpot is acquired 12 times after the transition to the high probability state until the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is received 12 times. Since the round time is not extended, it is possible to improve the player's attention to winning the jackpot by the 12th lottery.

  Also, after the 13th lottery, the number of prize balls is reduced for each lottery and the round time is extended for every 3 lotteries, so the player for how many lotteries can win the jackpot You can improve your attention.

  That is, for example, when a big win is obtained with 14 balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (14th lottery of special symbol 2), it is stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round. Since the number of spheres flowing into the flow path 1231 is two, the number that can be won in this round is eight. Further, when a big hit is obtained with 15 balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (15th lottery of special symbol 2), the storage flow path through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round of the game R Since the number of balls flowing into 1231 is 3, the number that can be won in this round is 7. Therefore, as the remaining number increases, the number of award balls paid out in the round game R of the fifth round decreases.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is won in the 13th to 15th lottery, in any case, the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 by flowing into the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round Will be 0. Accordingly, from the round game R of the sixth round, a specified number of balls can be won in the first specific winning slot 1000a, and thus the round game R of the sixth round can be ended. There is no change in the degree of extension.

  Further, when the jackpot is won, the remaining number of the adjustment flow paths 5911 is 16 to 18, in the round game R of the sixth round, and when it is 19 to 21, it is 22 to 24 in the round game R of the seventh round. The number of prize balls in the round game R of the 8th round in the case of the number, the number of prize balls in the round game R of the 9th round in the case of 25 to 27, and the number of prize balls in the round game R of the 10th round in the case of 28-30 pieces And an increase in round time.

  Thus, as in this embodiment, in the game where the high probability state ends with the number of lotteries, when winning a jackpot shortly after the transition to the high probability state, and when winning the jackpot just before the end of the high probability state Thus, it is possible to make a difference in the profits given to the player (the number of prize balls paid out, the progress time of the jackpot game, etc.).

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the profit given to the player is reduced as the number of lotteries from the transition to the high probability state to the jackpot acquisition is increased, when the number of lottery until the jackpot acquisition is small, Originally, there should have been a chance to receive a lottery even with the remaining number of lotteries, but the dissatisfaction of the player that the lottery cannot be received can be partially solved.

  In other words, if you win a jackpot in the first lottery after entering the high probability state, you should have added the remaining 29 lotteries and then received 59 lotteries. Actually, the player's dissatisfaction with the high probability state after the jackpot game is limited to 30 times can be partially solved. Thereby, the fairness of a game can be maintained.

  Even in the high probability state, when the big winning is won by the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64), the second specific prize opening 2255a is set in the 11th operation pattern. It is possible to receive the maximum payout regardless of the number of lotteries after opening and closing and shifting to the high probability state. Therefore, the player may perform a game (left-handed game) aiming to win a ball at the first entrance 64 in a high probability state.

  In this case, as compared with the case where a right-handed game is performed, the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 does not lead to the special symbol lottery, and the interval for receiving the lottery increases, and the game time is increased. There is a risk of becoming longer.

  Therefore, as a method of gaming in a high probability state, the player can reduce the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 until winning the jackpot, and can receive a maximum number of payout types in a short time ( If you aim to win jackpot h) (whether you play right-handed), be prepared to increase the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 by the time you win the jackpot, and the game time will be longer. It is possible to appropriately select whether to aim at winning a jackpot type (hitting jackpot H) that can eliminate the risk of a decrease in the prize ball in the game (whether to make a left-handed game). Thereby, the range of the game method to select can be expanded according to a player's taste and the situation (game possible time etc.) put.

  Note that after the high probability state ends, the second entrance 640 becomes difficult to open, and the player shifts to the left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911. However, in the big hit type of jackpot type (hit H) that can be obtained by the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911. Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by a predetermined number of winnings, the profits given to the player (the profits in both the number of winning balls and the game time) are not impaired. Therefore, even when the player stops playing with the ball remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 and the next player plays a game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being lost. The player can start the game at an arbitrary timing.

  In the present embodiment, the number of lotteries of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) in the high probability state and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (the second entrance) In the actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the time of winning the jackpot is that of the special symbol 2 until the jackpot is acquired. It should be noted that the number is not the same as the number of lotteries.

  That is, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed as the ball wins the second entrance 640, and the player recognizes whether or not the lottery has been won by the lottery, Since it is after a button press effect or the like, it is normal that the player keeps driving the ball into the second entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to hold up to 4 balls entering the second entrance 640, an ordinary game mode (a game mode in which a player can draw lots efficiently, so-called hold stop) In addition to the number of lotteries in which the player can recognize the jackpot determination, a state where a maximum of about four balls are entering the second entrance 640 is maintained.

  Also, even if a player enters the second entrance 640 when the number of reserves is maximum, the lottery is not received, but the ball enters the adjustment channel 5911. Therefore, there is a profit that the player can obtain in the jackpot game. Increased chance of decline. Since the hold is digested when the change stops and the next change starts, in other words, the longer the period until the stop of the change, the more likely the player's profit to be reduced in the jackpot game It will be.

  Therefore, if the ball is left unattended during a highly anticipated performance such as long reach, it is possible to form a game that increases the possibility that the profits that the player can obtain in the jackpot game are reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to launch the ball during a highly anticipated performance such as long reach, thereby eliminating the concentration that the player has spent on adjusting the shooting power of the ball. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's concentration on production such as long reach, and to improve attention to the production.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In 1st Embodiment, although the case where the arrangement | positioning of the sphere stored by the storage flow path 1231 was fixed to a unique position was demonstrated, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 6000 in 6th Embodiment interferes with a sphere by drive. Thus, the arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the probability variation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is arranged below the first variable winning device 6000 in the present embodiment, and the sphere discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is in the specific region 4830. The state after the jackpot game is changed depending on whether or not it passes.

  FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of first variable winning device 6000 taken along line LII-LII in FIG. 52 shows the retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable prize winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable prize winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (a main body member 1100, a covering front plate 1200, an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, and a regulating member 1600. And a rear cover 1700), and a new interference device 6900 in the sixth embodiment.

  The interference device 6900 is disposed on the back side of the main body member 1100 and has a solenoid 6910 whose slide movable shaft is disposed along a plane that is flat with the surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and the distal end of the movable portion of the solenoid 6910. And an interference member 6930 that slides in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the tip member 6920.

  The tip member 6920 includes a long hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The long hole 6921 is formed so as to be inclined so as to approach the thin plate member 1110 toward the distal end side of the distal end member 6920.

  The interference member 6930 is supported by a through-hole H61 formed in the thin plate member 1110 disposed to face the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the rear end is a long hole 6921. As the solenoid 6910 is driven, the rear end moves back and forth along the long hole 6921. By this back-and-forth operation, it is possible to enter the storage channel 1231 through the through hole H61.

  The through hole H61 is disposed at a position slightly separated to the left from the center of the third sphere P3 stored in the storage channel 1231. By causing the interference member 6930 to slide forward from the through hole H61, the ball P3 is pressed and pushed upstream of the storage flow path 1231.

  53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. FIG. FIG. 53A shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53B shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state. A sphere that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 is indicated by an imaginary line, and “V” is described in a sphere that first enters the specific region 4830 according to a thirteenth operation pattern and a fourteenth operation pattern described later. .

  As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 when the interference member 6930 is retracted, while the third ball is stored when the interference member 6930 is extended. Subsequent spheres are pushed into the upstream side of the storage flow path 1231 and remain in the storage number of less than 10 spheres. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the prescribed number for each round game R of the jackpot game is 10, if the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the prescribed number of balls cannot be won. Since the round game R cannot be ended due to the specified number of winnings, the end of the round game R is waited until the specified time. The effects that can be realized using this difference will be described below together with the description of the game mode in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, four minutes A special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game is finished, a special symbol probability variation state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed ten times, and the special symbol lottery is performed ten times. The game is configured to be set to a normal state after the game ends. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, it is normal until the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured to be in a short time state of the symbol.

  In the present embodiment, there are two types of special jackpot types, “big hit I” and “big hit j”. Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 6000, The special symbol is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state).

  Specifically, in the case of a big win in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64), the jackpot I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). . When the jackpot is I, two rounds of jackpot game are executed in the thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 285 prize balls, and can almost certainly not obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, in the case of a big win in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the jackpot j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

  When the jackpot j is reached, a two-round jackpot game is executed in the fourteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 300 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  As mentioned above, when a big win is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol is almost certainly obtained. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player as compared to the case where the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big win. Therefore, in order to obtain a big win in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player plays the right-handed game. Do.

  During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting the normal symbol is lengthened (1 Second x 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd entrance 640, it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2 lottery. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and if it is a big win, the jackpot j (almost certainly the transition to the probable state (high probability state) of the special symbol) It is easy for the player to win a large number of prize balls because the probable state of the special symbol that becomes a big hit that can be acquired) is easily repeated. Thus, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54A and FIG. 54B, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific prize opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54 (b) is a first specific prize in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

  In FIG. 54, for easy identification, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long-term operation time TL). Is done. Therefore, it is not used for the relative comparison of the length of each time in FIG. 54, and the relative comparison of the length of each time is performed by the time relationship described below.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300, the sorting operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the thirteenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the sorting operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 are operated based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses in a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled to hold the interference members 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the first specific winning opening 1000a by displacing the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And after the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment) is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it closed again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer unit (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state for the long-term operation time TL, and the solenoid 6910 is driven so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again after the elapse of the long-time operation time TL. Control the interference member 6930 to operate for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in the overhang state only for the long-term operation time TL. During this time, a prescribed number of balls cannot be won in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53B). In this embodiment, the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operation time TL is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and therefore, the interference member 6930 is not waited until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Therefore, it is impossible to win a prescribed number of balls, and the first round game R ends when the first operating time T1 elapses.

  Simultaneously with the end of the first round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 cannot be passed to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. During the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first time. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, and the interference member 6930 The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold them respectively in the retracted state, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the 14th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the sorting operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 are operated based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses in a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled to hold the interference members 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the first specific winning opening 1000a by displacing the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And after the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment) is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it closed again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer unit (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state for a minute time (in this embodiment, 0.2 seconds), and after the minute time has elapsed, the interference member 6930 is again held in the retracted state. The solenoid 6910 is driven and controlled so that the interference member 6930 operates for a short time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In this embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for a very short time, it is in the retracted state for most of the time, so as shown in FIG. 53 (a), a prescribed number of round games are played in the first round game. It is possible to win a ball. Accordingly, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the restriction member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the sphere can be discharged toward the probability variation determination flow path 4820. It can flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. During the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first time. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, and the interference member 6930 The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold them respectively in the retracted state, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time when the number of winning balls is 3 or more and less than 6 in the first round game R. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is arranged on the back side of the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231, the sphere of the player is blocked by the sphere, and it is difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to confirm the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

  Therefore, the change due to the protrusion of the interference member 6930 is limited to the movement of the third and subsequent spheres within the storage flow path 1231, so that the player recognizes whether or not the change due to the interference member 6930 has occurred. It is possible to make the player enjoy the game of winning the ball in the first specific winning port 1000a and storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 without causing the player to feel uncomfortable by the operation of the interference member 6930. Can do.

  Then, the ball is stored up to the vicinity of the entrance of the storage channel 1231, and yet the first round game R does not end so that the player feels strange and actually counts the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. It is possible to form a new gameability that recognizes the difference in jackpot type for the first time.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the situation visually recognized through the game board 13 (the change in the state of the interference member 6930). It is possible to notify the player of the difference in jackpot type by notifying the change in the situation of the game board 13 in a manner that is easy to recognize from the sense of incongruity given. Accordingly, it is possible to improve attention to the first variable winning device 6000.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. In 3rd Embodiment, when the opening-and-closing plate 1300 became a closed state, the case where the ball | bowl arrange | positioned in the perpendicular position of fall position Pf3 fell as it was was demonstrated, but the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 7000 in 7th Embodiment is as follows. The second fall delay plate 7260 is configured in such a manner that when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball arranged at the vertical position of the fall position Pf3 can flow down to the fall delay plate 3250 side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning device 7000 in the line corresponding to a line. The first variable winning device 7000 of the present embodiment is the same as the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment, except for the pre-covering plate 7200, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has the same configuration as the configuration described in the third embodiment (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, housing portion 1230, detection sensor 1240, and fall delay plate 3250. ) In addition to the second fall delay plate 7260 newly provided in this embodiment.

  The second fall delay plate 7260 is a plate member extending to the back side of the thin plate member 1210 between the end surface 3251b and the accommodating portion 1230, and descends as the upper surface 7261 is separated from the detection sensor 1240. Tilt. As shown in FIG. 57, the second fall delay plate 7260 is extended backward so as not to interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the second fall delay plate 7260 has a distance from the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 near the detection sensor 1240 that is less than the diameter of the sphere, and at a position farthest from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is less than the diameter of the sphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second fall delay plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) from the movement locus of the ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second fall delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member that changes whether or not it comes into contact with the sphere depending on the path of arrival of the sphere. This will be described below.

  58 (a) and 58 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 7000 along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 58A shows a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state in a state where the sphere is arranged in the vicinity of the vertical position of the drop position Pf3. In FIG. 58B, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state. The case where the ball rolls toward the drop position Pf3 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the sphere is arranged in the vicinity of the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, the sphere becomes a front cover plate as the plate portion 1310 tilts forward when the opening / closing plate 1300 operates. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, it contacts the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, flows down to the fall delay plate 3250 side along the inclination of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 to fall again to the drop position Pf3. To reach.

  Since the distance between the second fall delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the sphere, the momentum of the sphere Is large, it is possible to prevent the sphere from falling vertically on the back side of the second fall delay plate 7260.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the ball rolling on the fall delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 moves along the rear slope of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. It flows down while touching.

  At this time, since the center position (maximum diameter position) of the sphere is disposed below the second fall delay plate 7260, the length of the second drop delay plate 7260 extending to the back surface is determined from the movement trajectory of the sphere. Also, the ball falling from above can be received by the upper surface 7261 while being fastened on the front side.

  The sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not contact the second drop delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and falls as it is after reaching the drop position Pf3. Therefore, as in the third embodiment, the sphere can be dropped without a stagnation from the lower end of the fall delay plate 3250.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the case where the sphere is subjected to the action of the second fall delay plate 7260 and the case where it is not received can be switched depending on from which side the sphere approaches the second fall delay plate 7260.

  In this embodiment, two balls are rolled on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 while maintaining the action of smoothly dropping the ball rolling the fall delay plate 3250 to a position facing the end surface 3251b, and the previous ball Even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state by passing through the detection sensor 1240, the fall of the sphere disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240 can be delayed.

  In addition, even when two balls are not connected, when the ball that was rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged in front of the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 happens to be closed. Also, the sphere can flow down to the fall delay plate 3250 side. In this case, the ball resumes rolling to the right along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250 after rolling the upper surface 7261 of the second fall delay plate 7260 to the left.

  Therefore, the sphere can be substantially maintained on the near side of the opening / closing plate 1300 for a time longer than the time required for rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of useless balls (spheres that flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and are discharged from the first out port 66) that may occur during the interval time.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 65. 59 and 60 are front views of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment, and FIGS. 61 and 62 are rear views of the first variable winning device 8000. FIG.

  In FIGS. 59 and 60, the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away so that the opening / closing plate 8300 is visible, and a part of the side wall part 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 59 and 61, after the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the open state (upward position), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the open state (extended position). 60 and 62, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is released, the open / close plate 8300 is closed (tilted posture), and the auxiliary open / close member 8340 is closed (immersion posture). ) Is shown. Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the element same as embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the following description, the front side of the paper is the front (front) side and the back side of the paper is the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 59 to FIG. 62, the opening / closing plate 8300 of the first variable prize-winning device 8000 is about 4 etc. between the shaft portion 1320, the loaded portion 1330, and both shaft portions 1320 described in the above embodiments. And a plate portion 8310 formed in a plate shape in three sections on the left side in the front view (side away from the detection sensor 1240).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a gap is formed between the opening / closing plate 8300 and the detection sensor 1240 on the front surface of the thin plate member 1110, and the fixed receiving portion 8250 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are arranged in the gap. Established.

  In addition, since the length in the axial direction of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 is shorter than that in the first embodiment, the formation range of the rectangular recess 1122 can also be shortened. In the present embodiment, the rectangular recess 1122 is formed in the minimum range necessary for the plate portion 8310 to enter (see FIG. 59).

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a portion fixed to the covering front plate 8200 and serves as a rolling surface of a sphere guided to the detection sensor 1240. The configuration of the front cover plate 8200 is the same as that of the front cover plate 1200 described in the above embodiment, except for the fixed receiving portion 8250. Description is omitted.

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a rod-shaped member that protrudes from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the main body member 1100 side, and its protruding end portion (rear side end portion) is a support recess 1121 on the right side of the main body member 1100. The main body member 1100 comes into contact with the open end (front side end portion). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 8300 is rotatably supported by the support recess 1121 and the fixed receiving portion 8250.

  The fixed receiving portion 8250 is formed as an inclined surface whose upper surface (rolling surface of the sphere) is in a surface position with the upper surface (rolling surface) of the open / close plate 8300 in an open state, that is, as it is inclined downward toward the right. The lower surface is formed in an arc shape with the rotation axis of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 as the center. The arc that is the basis of the shape of the lower surface is formed as an arc having a shorter radius than the radius of the movement locus (arc) of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (the longest radius, that is, the radius of the movement locus of the upper end of the opposing surface 8341b). Is done. As a result, the upper corner portion of the facing surface 8341b and the fixed receiving portion 8250 come into contact with each other in the moving direction of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 moves (rotates) the fixed receiving portion 8250 by a predetermined angle or more. Be regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the protrusion of the fixed receiving portion 8250 (the protruding length to the left) is designed so that the ball that has dropped from the left end of the inclined surface 1237 does not get on the rolling surface as it is. The That is, in the present embodiment, the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the inclined surface 1237, but the overhang length is less than the radius of the sphere. Therefore, when the sphere falls from the inclined surface 1237 in the vertical direction, even if the sphere may collide with the fixed receiving portion 8250, the center of gravity of the sphere is on the left side of the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250. The event that the ball flows down to the detection sensor 1240 hardly occurs, and the ball spills leftward from the fixed receiving portion 8250 and falls toward the first out port 66.

  In addition, when a ball spilled to the left from the fixed receiving portion 8250 rolls on the opposing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, a load applied from the ball to the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 closes the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is directed in the direction of rotating clockwise when viewed from the front. Therefore, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be prevented from changing to an open state due to a load applied from the ball.

  In addition, a ball having a speed downward to the right from the configuration on the upstream side of the first variable prize-winning device 8000 in the game area (arrangement of nails, second entrance 640, etc., see FIG. 2) to the fixed receiving portion 8250. The possibility of a jumping event is very low.

  Therefore, while the fixed receiving portion 8250 having the rolling surface is disposed on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240, the fixed receiving portion 8250 alone does not have an effect that the detection sensor 1240 is easily guided to the sphere excessively. Configured.

  The essence of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is to suppress the occurrence of problems in the flow of a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 while opening and closing the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. Hereinafter, details of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 will be described.

  The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is a member rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110, and a receiving plate 8341 disposed on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and extends from the receiving plate 8341 toward the rotating shaft. The bar-shaped connecting portion 8342, the loaded portion 8343 arranged on the back side of the thin plate member 1110 and configured to be able to contact the power transmission member 1400, and the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 are made relatively unrotatable. It is a rod-shaped member to be connected, and mainly includes a shaft support bar portion 8344 that is rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110.

  In this embodiment, the shaft support bar portion 8344 has a circular support section supported by the thin plate member 1110, and a support portion that supports the connecting portion 8342 on the front side and a load portion 8343 on the rear side. The supporting portion to be supported is formed in a D-shaped cross section (a shape that is not circular). A fitting portion (hole or recess) having a shape corresponding to the D-shape is formed in the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343, and the support portion and the fitting portion are fitted in the use state (see FIG. 59). By being combined, the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 are configured to rotate integrally.

  The loaded portion 8343 is a substantially fan-shaped portion whose end is pivotally supported by the shaft support rod portion 8344, a contact curved surface 8343 a that is a curved upper surface that contacts the power transmission member 1400, and a loaded portion 8343. And a center of gravity 8343b including the position of the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the contact curved surface 8343a is a straight line that overlaps the lower surface of the extended portion 1420 during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, and is extended when the extended portion 1420 is lowered (tilted). A right end portion that starts to contact the extended portion 1420 has a substantially parallel surface with respect to a contact start line FL1 including a point at which the portion 1420 and the loaded portion 8343 start to contact.

  Since the smooth curved surface is formed in such a manner that the rotation radius gradually decreases from the right end portion toward the left end portion that is the contact end point with the extending portion 1420, the extending portion 1420 and the load-receiving portion The load transmission with the 8343 can be generated smoothly (with a small dynamic friction). Thereby, the followable | trackability of the to-be-loaded part 8343 with respect to the extension part 1420 can be improved.

  The center of gravity 8343b is a part for maintaining the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in a closed state (immersion posture) when a load from the power transmission member 1400 is not generated. That is, since the gravity center position of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is included in the center of gravity 8343b, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes its posture toward the closed state (immersion posture) by rotation due to its own weight. Further, when the receiving plate 8341 of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 comes into contact with the left end portion of the fixed receiving portion 8250, further rotation of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is restricted, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state (immersion posture). Is done.

  The connecting portion 8342 is coupled to the receiving plate 8341 at a left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 (that is, a portion adjacent to the opening / closing plate 8300 and possibly causing a load). Thus, the rigidity of the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 can be improved while narrowing the arrangement range of the connecting portion 8342. Therefore, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is moved to the opening / closing plate 8300. Even if it collides, the possibility that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is damaged can be reduced.

  In addition, the connection part 8342 should just be able to connect the receiving plate 8341 and the axial support bar part 8344, and the structure aspect is not restricted to this. For example, in addition to connecting the left end of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support bar 8344, the right end of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support bar 8344 may be connected (that is, two The right and left end portions of the receiving plate 8341 may be supported by a rod), and the two rods in that case may be connected and reinforced by a planar plate portion along a plane orthogonal to the shaft support rod portion 8344. Also good.

  The receiving plate 8341 is a plate-like portion having a front-rear width that is approximately the same as the width of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300, and is connected to the planar rolling plane 8341a and the left end of the rolling plane 8341a. And a facing surface 8341b disposed to face the right end surface of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state (see FIG. 59).

  The rolling plane 8341a is formed as a parallel plane connected to the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 8310 of the opening / closing plate 8300 in the open state (upward posture) in the open state (projecting posture).

  The facing surface 8341b is configured as a plane orthogonal to the rolling plane 8341a, and its lateral width (thickness of the receiving plate 8341) is configured to be substantially equal to the thickness of the plate portion 8310. Thereby, the surface that receives the load at the time of contact between the facing surface 8341b and the plate portion 8310 can be increased, and therefore the receiving plate 8341 or the plate portion 8310 is damaged by the load at the time of contact (breakage or chipping occurs). It is possible to easily avoid occurrence or breakage).

  Here, the facing surface 8341b is disposed on the left side (side away from the detection sensor 1240) of a plane that passes through the shaft support bar portion 8344 and is orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, the movement locus LC1 of the facing surface 8341b when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 operates in the open state (see FIG. 59) and the closed state (see FIG. 60) is a rolling plane in the open state. It swells upward from 8341a (the radially outer side of the shaft support bar portion 8344). Thereby, it is possible to easily push the sphere (one in the present embodiment) on the upper surface of the rolling plane 8341a into the detection sensor 1240, but details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, operation modes and operation sequences of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the opening / closing plate 8300, and the regulating member 1600 due to the load transmitted through the power transmission member 1400 will be described.

  63 and 64, operations of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 are illustrated in time series. Also, FIG. 65 illustrates changes in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and changes in time and position of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600.

  63 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 along the line LXIIIb-LXIIIb in FIG. 63 (a). 63 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 along the line LXIIId-LXIIId in FIG. 63 (c).

  64 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64 (a). 64 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 along the line LXIVd-LXIVd in FIG. 64 (c).

  63 and 64, in order to facilitate understanding, fixing of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the covering front plate 8200 are fixed. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown while maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 59 to 62), the other components are not shown, and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are closed (see FIG. The state of state change from the a) and FIG. 63 (b)) toward the open state (see FIG. 64 (c) and FIG. 64 (d)) is shown in time series.

  That is, in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the state where the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state). 63 (c) and 63 (d), the distal end member 1520 is displaced, and the auxiliary second distance shorter than the second distance h2 (see FIG. 20 (c)) shorter than the first distance h1 from the reference line O1. In FIGS. 64A and 64B, the tip member 1520 is displaced and separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 that is shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a. 64 (c) and 64 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 that is shorter than the third distance h3 (the solenoid 1510 is disposed). Excited State of being arranged in a final arrival position) of the focus is illustrated, respectively.

  When the tip member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 63C), the power transmission member 1400 contacts the lower surface of the extending portion 1420 with the contact start line FL1. It is a state to agree with and agreement. That is, in the state shown in FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts to receive a load from the power transmission member 1400 (from the state shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b)). The auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is kept closed until the state shown in FIG. 63 (c) and FIG. 63 (d) is reached.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating changes in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 and changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 65, the distances h1, h2, h2a, h3, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520.

  The opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven by the drive (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but there is a time difference in the operation timing as shown in FIG.

  That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end toward the right end, the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operating earlier than the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the operation ends earlier. .

  Further, the regulating member 1600 starts to operate toward the storage state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts to operate toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time as the opening / closing plate 8300 enters the open state. As shown in FIG. 65, the timing charts are symmetrically illustrated, and when the solenoid 1510 is de-energized, each member operates in the reverse order of driving (excitation).

  As shown in FIG. 65, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 has not reached the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific prize opening 1000a. The state in which the hemisphere can enter is maintained (see FIG. 63 (c) and FIG. 63 (d)). Therefore, in a period in which the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state, a state in which the sphere can pass through the detection sensor 1240 is maintained.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the operation locus LC1 of the facing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is configured to swell above the rolling plane 8341a, and at the timing when the detection sensor 1240 detects the sphere P81, the sphere P81. The plane of the sphere P82 that flows down upstream from the sphere P81 is a plane orthogonal to the center axis of the shaft portion 1320 and passing through the center of the shaft support rod portion 8344 (the maximum bulge point of the motion locus LC1 is It is arranged closer to the detection sensor 1240 than the plane passing through (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes state from the open state to the closed state, it is possible to apply a rightward load (direction to push into the detection sensor 1240) to the ball P82 at the upper end portion of the facing surface 8341b.

  Accordingly, the ball P81 is detected by the configuration of the present embodiment on the assumption that a continuous ball is formed (see the balls P81 and P82 in FIG. 59 where the condition of the ball upstream of the detection sensor 1240 satisfies the condition). When the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 1510 is released by detection by 1240 (for example, when a specified number of balls in the round game R are detected by detecting the ball P81 by the detection sensor 1240) Even so, only one ball (which corresponds to the ball P82) riding on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (so-called over-winning, that is, the prescribed number of round games R (this number) In the embodiment, it is configured to allow the detection sensor 1240 to detect more than 10) (passing through the first specific prize winning opening 1000a)). Can.

  In the present embodiment, while the receiving surface 8341 operates in an arcuate path, a load is applied to the ball P82, and after the load is pushed into the detection sensor 1240 side, the upper surface of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is rolled. Therefore, as compared with the case where it is pushed into the detection sensor 1240 along the circular arc trajectory, the ball P82 flutters when passing through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 (the ball P82 collides with the inner surface of the detection sensor 1240, and the flow falls). The occurrence of stagnation and rebounding can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a sphere can be stored downstream of the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231), and as described in the above embodiments, the detection sensor is configured by the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231. The passage of 1240 spheres can be restricted. Therefore, when the storage flow path 1231 is full of spheres, the ball P82 does not enter the storage flow path 1231 by being restricted by the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231. After the member 8340 is in the closed state, it spills and flows down toward the first out port 66.

  On the other hand, if there is a gap in the storage flow path 1231, it is possible to allow an excessive prize for only one ball riding on the rolling plane 8341 a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. Therefore, the ease of occurrence of the overwinning can be changed by the arrangement of the spheres downstream of the detection sensor 1240 (that is, the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage flow path 1231). This can be executed by controlling the flow of the sphere in the path 1231.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The contact curved surface 8343a of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is smooth in such a manner that the rotation radius gradually decreases from the contact start portion (right end portion) to the power transmission member 1400 toward the contact end portion (left end portion). A curve was formed. Thereby, load transmission can be produced in a state where dynamic friction is small. Thereby, the followable | trackability of the to-be-loaded part 8343 with respect to the extension part 1420 can be improved.

  In a state in which a continuous ball is formed on the upstream side of the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning port 1000a), the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is limited to only one ball riding on the rolling plane 8341a. When the state changes (rotates) from the open state to the closed state, a load is applied from the rolling plane 8341a to the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific prize winning opening 1000a). Thus, when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is rotated (when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is rotated), a limited number (one in this embodiment) of balls enters the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a). It can be made easy to sphere. Thereby, possibility that the excessive winning with a limited number will arise can be raised.

  In addition, the possibility that this excess winning will change varies depending on how the balls of the storage flow path 1231 are stored. That is, it is possible to change the possibility that an excessive winning will occur depending on the arrangement state (the number of stored items) of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 rotates (operates toward the closed state). Furthermore, the arrangement state of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be adjusted by the drive (excitation) control mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the operation mode of the interference member 6930. In other words, by controlling the drive (excitation) mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the interference member 6930, the number of payout balls can be leveled out due to excessive winning.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. 66 and 67 are front views of the first variable winning device 9000 in the ninth embodiment, and FIGS. 68 and 69 are rear views of the first variable winning device 9000. FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same element as embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  66 and 68, the state after the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening / closing plate 8300 is in the open state (upward position), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the open state (extended position). 67 and 69, the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 is in a closed state (tilting posture), and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in a closed state (immersion posture). The state after becoming is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the first variable prize-winning device 9000 is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiment except that the thin plate member 9110 of the main body member 9100 is different from the above embodiment. Briefly described, this corresponds to the power transmission member 1400 of the first variable prize winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment replaced with the power transmission member 5400 described in the fifth embodiment.

  As in the above embodiment, in the power transmission member 5400, the front side overhanging end of the pushing portion 1422 and the front side overhanging end of the time difference forming portion 5423 are the same orthogonal to the rotation axis of the power transmission member 5400. Arranged on a plane. Therefore, even when the time difference forming portion 5423 pushes the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 8300 (corresponding to the state of FIG. 71A even before being pushed by the pushing portion 1422), the opening / closing plate 8300 is opened. The state changes to a state (see FIGS. 66 and 68).

  The thin plate member 9110 is extended to the front side of the thin plate member 9110 with a length capable of guiding the sphere to the auxiliary entrance port 9111, and an auxiliary entrance port 9111 that is pierced with a size through which the sphere can pass. And a rolling plate 9112.

  The auxiliary entrance 9111 is a through-hole arranged on the left side of the outlet 1150 in a front view, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) balls are paid out by detecting the passage of the sphere. It is a prize ball opening. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the auxiliary entrance 9111 may be an entrance (for example, an out entrance) where no prize ball is paid out.

  The rolling plate 9112 is configured as a plate in which a sphere flowing between the main body member 9100 and the covering front plate 8200 rolls on the upper surface, and as the upper surface approaches the auxiliary entrance 9111 (as it goes to the right). ) It is formed as an inclined surface inclined downward. Further, the rolling plate 9112 is formed in a form connected to the lower side of the auxiliary entrance 9111. On the front side of the auxiliary entrance 9111, the rolling plate 9112 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward as the upper surface approaches the back side. The

  That is, the ball on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 is guided to the front side of the auxiliary entrance 9111 along the inclination, and then passes through the auxiliary entrance 9111 and is discharged from the game area. At this time, in this embodiment, three prize balls are paid out to the player.

  The length of the rolling plate 9112 is designed such that it does not pick up a sphere that rolls down the flow path FK1 of the sphere that rolls on the inclined surface 1237 and falls freely. In other words, in a state where the first variable winning device 9000 is not driven, the ball is configured not to pass through the auxiliary entrance 9111 no matter how much the right hand is continued.

  On the other hand, the opening / closing plate 8300 having an upper surface inclined downward as it goes to the right is driven even slightly (for example, excited for 0.1 second and the opening / closing plate 8300 rotates toward the open state). When the ball flows down the load flow path FK2 through which the loaded ball flows down, the ball can roll on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 and pass through the auxiliary entrance 9111. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 8300 is driven, the ball that is in contact with the opening / closing plate 8300 can pass through the auxiliary entrance 9111 in addition to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Here, since the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 is different from that described in the eighth embodiment, it will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  70 and 71, operations of the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 are illustrated in time series. FIG. 72 also illustrates changes in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 and changes in time and position of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600.

  70 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 along the line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a). 70 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 along the line LXXd-LXXd in FIG. 70 (c).

  71 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 along the line LXXIB-LXXIb in FIG. 71 (a). 71 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 along the line LXXId-LXXId in FIG. 71 (c).

  70 and 71, in order to facilitate understanding, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the covering front plate 8200 are fixed. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown while maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 66 to 69), the other components are not shown, and the open / close plate 8300 and the auxiliary open / close member 8340 are closed (see FIG. The state of state change from the a) and FIG. 70 (b)) toward the open state (see FIG. 71 (c) and FIG. 71 (d)) is illustrated in time series.

  That is, in FIGS. 70A and 70B, the state in which the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state). 70 (c) and 70 (d), the state where the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIG. In FIG. 71 (c) and FIG. 71 (b), the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by an auxiliary second distance h2a shorter than the auxiliary first distance h1a. In FIG. 71 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a (final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited). State is shown, respectively.

  When the tip member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a (see FIG. 70 (c)), the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 8300 pushed down by the power transmission member 5400 is restricted. This is in agreement with the state in which the extended portion 1620 of the member 1600 starts to contact. That is, in the state shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 70 (d), the regulating member 1600 starts to receive a load from the opening / closing plate 8300 (from the state shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b) to FIG. c) and the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the raised posture (discharged state) until the state shown in FIG. 70 (d) is reached.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the eighth embodiment, the open / close plate 8300 is opened in a state where the tip member 1520 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 71 (a)). The state (ascending posture) is set, and the regulating member 1600 is set in the storage state. Then, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (see FIG. 71 (a)) that is in the closed state is in the open state in a state in which the tip member 1520 is disposed at a position that is separated from the reference line O1 by the fourth distance h4 (see FIG. 71A). 71 (c)).

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b) to the state shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (d), the open / close plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (upward posture), and the regulation is restricted. The member 1600 is maintained in the storage state.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 and changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 72, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520.

  The opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven by driving (excitation) a single solenoid 1510, but there is a time difference in the operation timing as shown in FIG.

  That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end toward the right end, the opening / closing plate 8300 starts operating earlier than the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the opening / closing plate 8300 After the operation is completed, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts to operate.

  In addition, the regulating member 1600 starts to operate toward the storage state before the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 starts to operate toward the open state, and enters the storage state simultaneously with the opening / closing plate 8300 being in the open state. 72, the timing charts are symmetrically illustrated, and when the solenoid 1510 is de-energized, each member operates in the reverse order of driving (excitation).

  As shown in FIG. 72, when the solenoid 1510 is driven from a non-excited state, only the opening / closing plate 8300 starts to operate, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 has not yet started to operate. Therefore, by shortening the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 (by performing short opening), the state of the opening / closing plate 8300 can be changed while the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 and changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 73, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520.

  FIG. 73 illustrates a case where the period for driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 is half of the time required for the state of the open / close plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state (0.1 second in this embodiment). (That is, the case where driving (excitation) is performed for 0.05 seconds is shown).

  In this case, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state, and the operation of raising only the opening / closing plate 8300 to the intermediate state is repeated. According to this operation, since a load can be applied to the sphere flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300, the flow path of the sphere that has reached the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 is driven flows down. The path FK1 can be switched to the load flow path FK2 (see FIG. 66). Accordingly, by continuing to fire the right-handed ball, the ball can be passed through the auxiliary entrance 9111, and a prize ball can be paid out to the player.

  With this configuration, for example, it is possible to configure a game property in which a prize ball is paid out by a small hit game. In the small hit game, by driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 in the opening pattern shown in FIG. 73, the flow path of the sphere that has reached the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300 is switched at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 operates. The ball can be guided to the entrance 9111 and the payout of the winning ball can be generated.

  The driving of the small hit game solenoid 1510 can be continuously executed a plurality of times, so that the timing at which the ball reaches the front side of the opening / closing plate 8300 can be set at a plurality of times. For example, since one drive (excitation) period is 0.05 seconds, when the drive (excitation) period of the solenoid 1510 is set to 1.8 seconds in total, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excitation) 36 times. be able to.

  Further, by setting the driving (excitation) interval, it is possible to easily apply a load to the sphere via the opening / closing plate 8300. For example, when a sphere is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 0.6 × X (the number of times the ball has reached) = 0.5 × X + 0.1 × X =. By driving (exciting), a load can be applied to the spheres via the opening / closing plate 8300 at a rate of about 1 in 5 spheres, regardless of the timing of starting driving (excitation).

  In this case, about seven balls can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 in one small hit game, and about 21 prize balls can be paid out to the player.

  In this case, the small hit game period is 0.5 second interval × 36 times = about 18 seconds. In this way, by increasing the time for one small hit game, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reserved balls of special symbols disappear (run out) by the end of the small hit game. Thereby, a small hit game can be generated without interruption.

  In the present embodiment, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 disposed above the auxiliary entrance 9111 is maintained in the closed state, so that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 operates (above the auxiliary entrance 9111). The ball that flows down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 side (that is, the ball that flows down in the load flow path FK2) is repelled by receiving a load from the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, or the auxiliary opening / closing It is possible to prevent riding on the rolling plane 8341a of the member 8340 and being guided by the detection sensor 1240.

  Returning to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening / closing plate 8300 has not reached the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific prize opening 1000a. It is the same as that described in the eighth embodiment that the state where the ball can enter is maintained. Therefore, as described in the eighth embodiment, the present embodiment can also be configured to easily make an excess winning with a limited number of balls.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the control member 1600 is controlled to change to the discharge state after the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is closed. Since the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 can be prevented from being accidentally advanced when the storage channel 1231 is full, it is possible to prevent an excessive prize from occurring.

  Here, in this embodiment, at the timing when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is in the closed state, the opening / closing plate 8300 maintains the open state (see FIG. 71A). Therefore, it is possible to change the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 while maintaining a state where the sphere can be put on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300 (open state). This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating changes in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 and changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 74, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520.

  In FIG. 74, the period for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is ¼ of the time required for the state of the open / close plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). The case is shown (that is, the case where the drive (excitation) is released for 0.025 seconds is shown). In the following, this driving (excitation) release mode is also referred to as “1/4 release”.

  In this case, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the regulating member 1600 maintain the state (maintaining the storage of the sphere in the storage flow path 1231), and only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 changes its state from the open state to the closed state. According to this operation, among the balls on the upper surfaces of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, several balls (the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the opening / closing plate 8300, which are arranged on the upstream side of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340). Can be caused to flow downward toward the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66).

  Thereby, when the ball rolled on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300 passes through the detection sensor 1240 when the opening / closing plate 8300 is still in the open state (when 15 prize balls are paid out). The detection sensor 1240 can be configured to pass through the auxiliary entrance 9111 without passing through (when the payout of three prize balls occurs).

  In this case, since the time until the specified number of balls pass through the detection sensor 1240 is extended, the time of the round game R can be extended without causing a ball loss.

  It should be noted that the upper and lower surfaces of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are provided with projections and depressions, or a vertically long rib projecting to the front side at a position in front of the thin plate member 9110 and in contact with a ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 8300. Alternatively, the flow velocity of the sphere may be suppressed, and the spheres may be arranged on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240. Thereby, when 1/4 release of driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is executed, it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball is arranged at the boundary position between the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 and the opening / closing plate 8300. The function of guiding the sphere to the auxiliary entrance 9111 can be improved by releasing 1/4 of driving (excitation).

  Moreover, the timing and frequency | count which perform 1/4 cancellation | release of the solenoid 1510 can be set in multiple types by matching with jackpot type.

  For example, when the spheres are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 1/4 release of driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is required during 9.0 seconds required for 15 spheres to reach the opening / closing plate 8300. Occurs 5 times, that is, once every 1.8 seconds, 1/4 release of driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 occurs once, thereby assisting about 5 balls during the round game R It is possible to guide to the entrance 9111.

  In this case, in the round game R, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player can be made equal to the case where only one extra ball is won in the first specific prize opening 1000a.

  In addition, by doubling this interval, that is, once every 3.6 seconds, 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs once, so that about 5 balls are played while the round game R is executed twice. It is possible to guide to the auxiliary entrance 9111.

  In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player can be made the same as the case where only one extra ball is won in the first specific prize opening 1000a while the round game R is executed twice.

  In order to satisfy 5 times in 9.0 seconds, it is not necessary to have an equal interval of 1.8 seconds. For example, 1.4 seconds, 1.6 seconds, 1.8 seconds, 2.0 seconds, and 2.2 seconds are added in order of 0.2 seconds in order, and 5 times during 9.0 seconds, the solenoid 1510 May be canceled. Further, 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 may be generated at different timings. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs.

  In addition, for example, by concentrating the timing of 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 in the first half of the round game R, the ball is guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 by continuing to fire the ball from the start of the round game R. It is possible to configure a game that increases the probability of being played.

  In this case, if the firing of the ball is stopped at the interval between rounds, the ball may not reach the first variable winning device 9000 at the timing when the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed. Can be suppressed.

  That is, a player who has launched a ball in the interval between rounds can start the next round game R in a state where the launched ball has reached the vicinity of the first variable prize-winning device 9000. The probability that the ball is guided to the ball opening 9111 can be increased, and as a result, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls to be paid out may be increased. it can.

  In addition, for example, by concentrating the timing at which 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is performed in the second half of the round game R, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10) of winnings (first identification) until the middle of the round game R It is possible to promote a relaxed jackpot game in which balls are intermittently fired so that a winning opening 1000a does not occur.

  In this case, in the latter half of the round game R, if the round game R is extended until the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed, the prize ball is paid out due to the ball passing through the auxiliary entrance 9111. Since the number of payouts can be increased, it is possible to cause the player to execute a loose jackpot game in which balls are intermittently fired eagerly.

  In this case, a difference is set in the number of times that the solenoid 1510 is released 1/4 in the second half of the round game R (for example, there are cases of 0 times, 1 time, and 5 times). As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the additional prize balls obtained as a result of the loose jackpot game, so that the player's attention to the flow-down mode of the balls that have reached the first variable prize-winning device 9000 is maintained at a high level. can do.

  On the other hand, the ball may continue to be fired, and a prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls may be awarded to the first specific winning opening 1000a before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released. . In this case, an increase in payout of prize balls due to the passage of the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111 is not expected, but by shortening the time required for the round game R, the start timing of the next round game R and the end of the big hit game The timing for receiving a lottery later can be advanced.

  In this way, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim for payout of the winning ball through the auxiliary entrance 9111 or to ignore it and terminate the round game R early.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The ball that collides with the opening / closing plate 8300 during the operation of driving the opening / closing plate 8300 from the closed state to the intermediate state can enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 by being given a load toward the auxiliary entrance 9111. did. Thereby, even in the case of an operation mode in which the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in an open state, it is possible to make it easy to pay out a prize ball. Can be executed eagerly.

  While the state where the opening / closing plate 8300 continues guiding the ball to the detection sensor 1240 is executed, the ball reaching the upstream of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 at a specific timing by executing 1/4 release of excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510. Flowed down toward the auxiliary entrance 9111. Thereby, a variation can be provided in the progress mode of the round game R in the jackpot game and the mode of payout of prize balls.

  For example, even if the number of passing balls of the first specific winning opening 1000a does not exceed a prescribed number, the player can receive an extra winning ball (first shooting) by paying out the winning ball by entering the auxiliary entering hole 9111. It is possible to obtain a number of prize balls (more than 150 prize balls in this embodiment) that are paid out when a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) enter the specific prize opening 1000a.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. 75 is a front view of the first variable winning device 10000 in the tenth embodiment, and FIGS. 76 and 77 are rear views of the first variable winning device 10000. FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same element as embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  75 and 76 show a state where the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is de-energized and the sphere flowing down the storage flow path 1231 reaches the lowest end. In FIG. 77, the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is shown. Is driven (excited), and a state where the sphere flowing down the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged in the middle is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the first variable prize winning device 10000 includes a case where the sphere can be discharged from a midway position of the storage flow path 1231 formed by the main body member 10100 and the covering front plate 10200. Except for the difference from the embodiment, the configuration described in the above embodiment is combined. Briefly, the movable parts (that is, the opening / closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the interference device 6900) excluding the intermediate discharge device 10180 are configured in the eighth embodiment. Is used as is.

  In the present embodiment, a mechanism for discharging a sphere at a midway position of the storage channel 1231 will be described. In this embodiment, the pre-covering plate 10200 is provided in a box shape that opens toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and includes a storage portion 10230 that includes a storage channel 1231, a protruding portion 1235, and an inclined surface 1237. .

  The accommodating portion 10230 includes a bulging portion 10232 formed in such a manner that the lower wall portion of the box bulges downward, and a through hole 10233 drilled in the front-rear direction near the bulging portion 10232.

  The bulging part 10232 bulges in a volume equal to or larger than the sphere vertically below the sphere whose flow is restricted by the interference member 6930, and a through-hole 10233 having a cross-sectional area larger than the sphere connected to the storage flow path 1231 in that portion. Is formed. Thereby, it is possible to configure such that the ball staying at the position near the interference member 6930 is dropped downward from the storage channel 1231 toward the bulging portion 10232.

  The through-hole 10233 has a horizontal hole 10233a extending in the left-right horizontal direction below the bottom surface of the storage channel 1231, and a vertical hole spatially connected to the horizontal hole 10233a and extending downward with a width equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. 10233b and an inclined surface 10233c that inclines downward toward the back side as the upper bottom surface of the vertical hole 10233b.

  The horizontal hole 10233a is disposed above the bulging portion 10232 at the left and right ends, and is disposed below the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 in the vicinity of the right end, while the storage channel 1231 is disposed in the vicinity of the left end. It is comprised in the aspect which approachs the upper side of the plane (plane of fixed inclination) along the extension line of a lower bottom face.

  The main body member 10100 has substantially the same shape as the horizontal hole 10233a in the thin plate member 10110 formed from a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board in addition to the configuration described as the main body member 1100 in the above embodiment. A horizontal hole 10111 that is drilled, a discharge port 10112 that is drilled so that a ball sent to the back side along the inclined surface 10233c can be passed, and a thin plate member 10110 that moves along the horizontal hole 10111. An intermediate discharge device 10180 having a portion.

  The intermediate discharge device 10180 mainly includes a movable member 10181 that is inserted into both of the horizontal holes 10111 and 10233a and is movable left and right, and a solenoid 10182 that generates a driving force that moves the movable member 10181 left and right. Prepare.

  The movable member 10181 is energized by the solenoid 10182 in a closed state (see FIGS. 75 and 76) that closes an opening in the middle of the storage channel 1231 (opening connected to the through hole 10233) in a non-excited (non-driven) state of the solenoid 10182. In the (driving) state, each is switched to an open state (see FIG. 77) that allows passage of a sphere through an opening in the middle of the storage channel 1231 (opening connected to the through hole 10233).

  The movable member 10181 is maintained in a non-contact state with the bulging portion 10232 in a state where no ball is on the movable member 10181. Thereby, it can avoid that friction arises between the movable member 10181 and the bulging part 10232, and movement resistance can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the closed state, the movable member 10181 is supported by the upper surface and the left and right end portions of the bulging portion 10232 abutting vertically. Thereby, even when the ball is on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 in the closed state of the movable member 10181, the movable member 10181 can be prevented from drooping excessively, and the ball inside the storage channel 1231 can be prevented. Can flow smoothly.

  The movable member 10181 is an upper surface, which is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward as it goes to the left, and an inclined upper surface 10181a that functions as a rolling surface on which a sphere rolls in a closed state, and a lower surface that is a front view. And an inclined lower surface 10181b that is formed at the left end and descends downward toward the right.

  The inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state before a sphere is on, and in a state where the movable member 10181 is not in contact with the bulging portion 10232 in the vertical direction (the movable member 10181 is floating), the right end portion is adjacent to the storage. The channel 1231 is disposed slightly below the bottom surface. Thereby, the load (resistance) which a sphere receives when the sphere moves from the storage channel 1231 to the inclined upper surface 10181a can be reduced.

  In addition, the inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state after the ball is on, and in a state in which the movable member 10181 is in contact with the bulging portion 10232 in the vertical direction (a state in which the movable member 10181 is sunk), the left end portion is adjacent to the storage. The shape is a bottom surface and a surface position of the channel 1231. Thereby, the load (resistance) which a sphere receives when the sphere moves from the inclined upper surface 10181a to the storage channel 1231 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shape of the above-described inclined upper surface 10181a is not the same shape as the degree of inclination is gentle compared to the shape of the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231. However, since the difference is slight, the time required for one sphere to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the closed state of the movable member 10181 is 0.2 mm in this embodiment as well, in the same manner as the above embodiment. Seconds.

  The inclined lower surface 10181b makes it easy to get on the bulging portion 10232 even when the ball rides on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 before the movable member 10181 reaches the open state and the movable member 10181 is about to fall forward. It is an inclined surface provided. As a result, the movement of the distal end portion of the movable member 10181 is restricted to the inner side surface of the vertical hole 10233b and can be prevented from stopping in this state, and the flow of the sphere of the storage channel 1231 is kept smooth. be able to.

  When the intermediate discharge device 10180 is in an open state (see FIG. 77), the upstream sphere including the third storage ball counted from the downstream end flows down the vertical hole 10233b and loads from the inclined surface 10233c. The ball is sent to the rear side and is sent to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the discharge port 10112.

  In the present embodiment, the discharge port 10112 is provided with a detection sensor 10112a that detects the passage of a sphere, and is configured to be able to determine the number of spheres that have passed through the discharge port 10112. Then, the sphere that has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a is a detecting means for detecting the sphere discharged from the detection sensor 10112a or the outlet 1150 (for example, a specific area detection sensor 4860, a non-specific area detection sensor 4870, FIG. And the control is executed to determine whether or not the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged match.

  According to the present embodiment, when the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls enters the first specific winning opening 1000a by the operation mode of the intermediate discharge device 10180 in the round game R, the storage channel It is possible to switch between a case where 1231 is full and a state where the storage channel 1231 is not full. This will be described with reference to FIG. In the description of FIG. 78, it is assumed that the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state for easy understanding.

  78 (a) to 78 (d) are diagrams showing an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning port 1000a and a change in the time of the state of the movable member 10181 in the round game R. FIG. In FIG. 78A, the first specific winning opening 1000a is in an open state (in the figure, also indicated as “open”. The closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also indicated as “closed” in the figure. The change in time when the movable member 10181 is maintained in a closed state (also shown as “closed” in the figure. The same applies in the following figures) over a period of time that is the same in the following figures. In 78 (b), the movable member 10181 is maintained in the open state (also indicated as “open” in the figure, the same applies in the following figures) over the period in which the first specific prize winning opening 1000a is in the open state. Each time change in the case is illustrated.

  In FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes to the open state after the first predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the first specific winning opening 1000a starts to change to the open state. 2 When the movable member 10181 changes to the closed state after a predetermined time (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed and is maintained as it is, in FIG. 78 (d), the first specific prize winning opening 1000a is in the open state. The movable member 10181 changes to the open state after the reference time T11s (about 15 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the state change, and then the movable member 10181 closes after the second predetermined time (2 seconds in this embodiment) has passed. Each time change when the state changes and is maintained as it is is illustrated.

  As described above, the driving of the movable member 10181 (the driving of the solenoid 10182) is linked to (or associated with) a combination of what round game R is executed and what kind of jackpot type. It can be executed in various driving modes.

  For example, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (a), the movable member 10181 is always closed during the round game R, so that the ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 is discharged as in the above embodiments. It is discharged from the outlet 1150. That is, since the sphere is not discharged from the midway position of the storage flow path 1231, the storage flow path 1231 is formed by entering a specified number of balls (10 in the present embodiment) into the first specific winning opening 1000a. It becomes full. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for an excess prize to exceed the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment) (it can be impossible).

  Also, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (b), the movable member 10181 is always open during the round game R, so that the ball that entered the storage channel 1231 is different from the above embodiments. , Before reaching the discharge port 1150, it falls into the through-hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112. That is, even if a prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage flow path 1231 does not become full. For this reason, it is possible to easily cause (can be made) an excess winning exceeding the prescribed number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

  In FIG. 78 (b), after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is released at the end of the round game R, the movable member 10181 is passed after 2 seconds (a period required for the ball to pass through the storage channel 1231). Changes to the open state, so that the ball including the ball that has passed through the first specific prize opening 1000a at the end (immediately before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released) can be dropped toward the through hole 10233. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the first specific prize winning opening 1000a can be configured not to flow down to the discharge opening 1150 at all.

  Further, for example, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the movable member 10181 changes from the closed state to the opened state 1.0 seconds after the start of the round game R, and after 3.0 seconds, the movable member 10181 is moved. Since it is controlled to change from the open state to the closed state, if a ball can be dropped toward the through-hole 10233 before 4 seconds elapses from the start of the round game R, a specified number (in this embodiment, 10 Even if the ball is entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage flow path 1231 does not become full. For this reason, it is possible to easily cause (can be made) an excess winning exceeding the prescribed number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

  In order to place the ball above the through-hole 10233 before 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R, considering the time for the ball to flow down the storage channel 1231, it is about 2.5 from the start of the round game R. Before the second elapses, the ball needs to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  In this embodiment, the time of about 2.5 seconds is the time required for the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to flow down the game area and reach the first specific winning opening 1000a (the shortest time). Shorter than about 4 seconds). Therefore, it is not in time to fire a ball from the start of round game R.

  Therefore, in order to prevent the storage flow path 1231 from becoming full, it is necessary to continue to launch the ball even in the interval between rounds before the round game R. Thereby, the game aspect which stops discharge | release of a ball | bowl in the interval between rounds can be suppressed.

  In addition, an effect by the display device or the like is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the information about whether the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c) occurs in the round game R or whether it occurs in the first place. Thus, regardless of whether or not the round game R is driven in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), the game mode that stops the ball firing in the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R is suppressed. Can do.

  Also, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), the movable member 10181 is opened when the reference time T11s (15 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the round game R, and then 2.0 seconds have elapsed. Later, the movable member 10181 is controlled to change to a closed state.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the movable member 10181 is effectively executed during the period in which the round game R continues, but when the round game R ends, the control is skipped and the movable member 10181 is forced to the closed state. Can be switched automatically.

  In the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (d), for example, when a first end time T11a (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R (in this embodiment, 10 Pieces of balls passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, since the round game R ended before the movable member 10181 was opened, all the balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a 1231 is stored, and the storage flow path 1231 becomes full. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for an excess prize to exceed the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment) (it can be impossible).

  On the other hand, for example, when a second end time T11b (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, a prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of balls is the first specific prize. When passing through the opening 1000a, the movable member 10181 is opened before the round game R ends, and the ball falls toward the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112. It will not be a tongue. For this reason, it is possible to easily cause (can be made) an excess winning exceeding the prescribed number of round games R (10 in this embodiment).

  Therefore, according to the driving mode of FIG. 78 (d), the prescribed number of round games R (10 in this embodiment) is determined depending on whether the time taken for the round game R is less than the reference time T11s or more than the reference time T11s. It is possible to switch whether or not an excess prize is exceeded.

  In the case of this driving mode, it is preferable to execute the round game R over a long period of time if the payout number of prize balls in the round game R is important. In other words, it is preferable to intermittently stop the firing of the balls so that a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls does not enter the first specific winning opening 1000a early. Therefore, there is a possibility that a game mode in which the launch of a ball is stopped at an interval between rounds is promoted.

  On the other hand, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78 (c), as described above, it is possible to aim at the occurrence of an overwinning by continuously firing balls at intervals between rounds.

  In this way, by disposing the drive modes in which the preferred ball launch modes are opposite to each other in the round game R of the jackpot game (the same round is controlled so as to be different depending on the jackpot type), Compared to the case where the jackpot game is always executed in the same launch mode (the player can obtain the same profit), the concentration of the player on the jackpot game can be improved.

  According to the present embodiment, when the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state and the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is determined by the operation mode of the movable member 10181. Can be changed. That is, it is possible to switch between the case where the storage flow path 1231 is filled with 10 balls and the case where the storage flow path 1231 is not filled with 10 balls.

  In addition, when the interference member 6930 is in an overhanging state, the number of the storage flow paths 1231 is seven (9 if two spheres are already arranged downstream of the interference member 6930, see FIG. 75). ) And the case where the storage channel 1231 does not become full even if seven (or nine) balls are entered.

  Although the case where the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting the interference member 6930 in an overhanging state in response to the movable member 10181 being in the open state, the ball rides on the momentum and passes (jumps over) the through hole 10233 in the left-right direction. Can be prevented.

  Note that the driving mode of the movable member 10181 is not limited to that described above. For example, you may comprise so that it may drive by operation of the operation button 300. FIG.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  By making the movable member 10181 open, the ball can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. Thereby, the number of the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be changed independently of the state of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

  That is, while maintaining the 1st specific winning opening 1000a in the open state, when the number of balls entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a is the same as the number of stored in the storage flow path 1231, and when entering the first specific winning opening 1000a The case where the number of spheres and the number of stored in the storage channel 1231 are different can be configured. Thereby, the possibility that an excessive winning to the first specific winning opening 1000a may occur can be changed depending on the driving mode of the movable member 10181.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85. 79 is a front view of the first variable winning device 11000 according to the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 11000 taken along the line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the pre-installation plate 11200.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, in the first variable winning device 11000 of the present embodiment, the shape of the opening / closing plate 11300 is changed, the formation of the upstream portion of the fall delay plate 3250 is omitted, and the main body member 11100 is 2 The same structure as the first variable winning device 3000 of the third embodiment is provided except that an additional winning opening 11183 and the like are added. For this reason, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In addition to the configuration already described in the above embodiments, the main body member 11100 is formed by separating a thin plate member 11110 formed from a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere. A pair of right and left protruding ribs 11111 protruding to the front side of the thin plate member 1110, a guide hole 11112 which is perforated as a horizontally long slot and guides the movement of the opening / closing means 11190 described later, and extends to the left of the guide hole 11112 And a guide recess 11113 configured as a bottomed recess formed as described above.

  The main body member 11100 mainly includes a second additional prize opening 11183 configured to allow passage of a sphere, and an opening / closing means 11190 that changes a probability of winning the sphere to the second additional prize opening 11183. Details of the opening / closing means 11190 will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the fall delay plate 3250 formed on the covering front plate 11200 is maintained only on the right side of the cut surface SP12 formed at a position farther from the side wall portion 1220 than the diameter of the sphere on the upstream side, The left part of the cut surface SP12 is omitted.

  The position of the cut surface SP12 is set as a position where a sphere that rolls on the inclined surface 1237 and reaches the fall delay plate 3250 cannot reach alone. That is, the sphere that rolls on the inclined surface 1237 and reaches the fall delay plate 3250 flows down to the lower right (in the direction approaching the detection sensor 1240) along the tilt of the fall delay plate 3250 unless an external force is applied. To do.

  On the other hand, when a load is applied to the sphere and the sphere is sent to the left side of the cut surface SP12, the sphere falls to the second additional prize opening 11183 side with a high probability. The falling ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 after passing through the opening / closing means 11190 newly described in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the second additional winning opening 11183 is configured as a winning opening from which three winning balls are paid out by detecting passage of a ball.

  The opening / closing plate 11300 includes an inclined surface 11340 that remains after being scraped in a shape that is inclined so as to approach the left shaft portion 1320 from the rotation tip side toward the rotation shaft side in the left half portion.

  The inclined surface 11340 has a position where the end on the rotation tip side is on the right side of the cut surface SP12 and after landing on the fall delay plate 3250 (the final arrival position FP12, FIG. 82 (a)) is arranged to the right of the center of the sphere that has reached.

  Therefore, when the open / close plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state when a ball is at a position where the lateral speed is 0 (final arrival position FP12, see FIG. 82 (a)), the inclined surface 11340 is interposed. The ball is loaded. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  82 (a) to 82 (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 11000. FIG. 82 (a) to 82 (c), the change in the state of the first variable winning device 11000 is illustrated in time series, and in FIG. 82 (a), the opening / closing plate 11300 is in the closed state, and the inclination is changed. The final arrival position FP12 of the sphere that rolls on the surface 1237 and lands on the fall delay plate 3250 is indicated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 82 (b), the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 82 (a). The state after the change is illustrated, and FIG. 82 (c) illustrates a state in which the sphere falls from the state illustrated in FIG. 82 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the sphere disposed at the final arrival position FP12 is brought into contact with the inclined surface 11340 when the opening / closing plate 11300 is changed to the open state, and is given a leftward load. The ball given a leftward load is pushed to the left of the cut surface SP12, spills from the fall delay plate 3250, and enters the second additional prize winning port 11183.

  On the other hand, when the ball has not reached the final arrival position FP12 (for example, when the ball slightly flows down from the final arrival position FP12 and is disposed at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 82A), the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened. Even if the state changes, the inclined surface 11340 does not come into contact with the sphere, and the sphere has a rotation direction of the opening / closing plate 11300 (since the rotation axis is inclined to the lower right with respect to the horizontal, it has a rightward component). Direction) and is pushed toward the detection sensor 1240 side. Therefore, in this case, the ball does not enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, at the timing when the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, depending on which position on the front side of the opening / closing plate 11300 the sphere is directed to the detection sensor 1240, , It can be switched to the second additional prize opening 11183.

  The payout of the winning ball due to the passing of the ball through the second additional winning opening 11183 is an extra winning ball exceeding the scheduled winning ball for the jackpot game, so the ball passing through the second additional winning opening 11183 The more there are, the more profits the player can get.

  Compared to the case where the ball is stopped by continuing to fire the ball toward the first specific prize opening 1000a while the open / close plate 11300 is kept closed (interval period between rounds), the open / close plate Since the situation that the ball is arranged at the final arrival position FP12 at the timing when the 11300 changes to the open state can be easily generated, it is possible to promote a game mode in which the ball is continuously fired over the interval period between rounds. it can. Thereby, the game aspect in which a player stops the launch of a ball during the interval period between rounds can be suppressed.

  Note that the ball entering the second additional winning opening 11183 is based on the condition that the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, so that the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven to the open state (big hit game or small hit game). In a state other than the above, even if the right hand is continued, it is configured such that it is difficult for the second additional winning opening 11183 to be entered.

  As a result, in a situation where the opening / closing plate 11300 does not change to the open state (for example, a situation where the right-handed instruction effect is not executed), even if the right-handed game is performed, the ball enters the second additional prize winning opening 11183. It is possible to configure the player so that it is difficult for the player to obtain the benefit. That is, the second additional winning opening 11183 can function as a winning opening that makes it easier for a ball to enter in a situation where the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven (small hit game or big hit game).

  Next, the opening / closing means 11190 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. 83 and 84 are rear views of the first variable winning device 11000, and FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) show the arrangement of the protruding rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190, and the second additional winning port 11183. FIG. It is a front schematic diagram of the projecting rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190, and the second additional prize winning opening 11183 schematically shown. 85 (a) to 85 (c) illustrate the time change of the state of the opening / closing means 11190.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the opening / closing means 11190 is a movable means that is guided by the guide hole 11112 and moves to the left and right in conjunction with the movement of the tip member 1520, and is supported by the guide hole 11112 in an inserted state. A main body support portion 11191, a transmission portion 11192 that extends upward from the back side portion of the main body support portion 11191 and is supported by the tip member 1520, and extends leftward from the front side portion of the main body support portion 11191. An extended portion 11193, a first protruding portion 11194 protruding to the front side at the left end of the extended portion 11193, and a space slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere to the right of the first protruding portion 11194. And a second projecting portion 11195 projecting in the same shape as the first projecting portion 11194.

  A method for assembling the opening / closing means 11190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, the right end of the guide hole 11112 is enlarged vertically so as to be slightly longer than the transmission portion 11192, and the other portions are slightly longer than the main body support portion 11191. Are formed as horizontally long holes.

  Therefore, after the transmission portion 11192 projects to the back side through this enlarged portion, the opening / closing means 11190 is slid to the left, and then the drive device 1500 is assembled to the main body member 11100 and the transmission portion 11192 is supported by the tip member 1520. Thus, the opening / closing means 11190 can be assembled in a manner interlocked with the tip member 1520. In addition, since the transmission part 11192 does not reach the enlarged portion at the right end of the guide hole 11112 in the movable range of the solenoid 1510 (see FIGS. 83 and 84), it is possible to prevent the opening / closing means 11190 from being disconnected from the guide hole 11112. can do.

  The extending portion 11193 is formed with a thickness enough to be completely accommodated in the guide recess 11113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sphere flowing down the front side of the opening / closing means 11190 from colliding with the extending portion 11193, the flow path of the sphere changes in the front-rear direction, or the extending portion 11193 is caused by the load from the sphere. It can be prevented from being damaged.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the first protruding portion 11194 and the second protruding portion 11195 are formed as inclined plates that are inclined downward toward the left in a front view. In the present embodiment, when a ball on the fall delay plate 3250 flows to the left of the cut surface SP12, it falls between the projecting ribs 11111 and enters the second additional prize opening 11183 by the opening / closing means 11190. Whether to do is switched. This will be described in detail.

  FIG. 85A shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) and the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the left end of the movement range (see FIG. 84). In this case, the upper end portion of the second projecting portion 11195 and the right projecting rib 11111 are arranged on the center line of the second additional winning opening 11183.

  When the sphere falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (a), the sphere contacts the second protruding portion 11195 and flows to the left. Therefore, since it flows away from the second additional winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be lowered.

  FIG. 85 (b) shows a state where the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at an intermediate position in the movement range (see FIG. 20 (c)). That is, it corresponds to immediately after the opening / closing plate 11300 is closed.

  In this case, the upper end portion of the first projecting portion 11194 is disposed to the left of the vertical line passing through the intermediate position of the pair of projecting ribs 11111, and the upper end portion of the second projecting portion 11195 is the second additional prize. It is arranged to the right of the center line of the mouth 11183.

  Therefore, when the sphere falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85B, the sphere contacts the first protruding portion 11194 and flows to the right, and contacts the second protruding portion 11195. It flows to the left. Since the falling ball flows down toward the second additional winning port 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning port 11183 can be increased.

  FIG. 85 (c) shows a state where the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the right end position of the movement range (see FIG. 83). Also in this case, the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained in the closed state, as in FIG.

  In this case, the upper end portion of the first projecting portion 11194 is disposed to the right of the vertical line passing through the intermediate position between the pair of projecting ribs 11111.

  Therefore, when a sphere falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85 (c), the sphere contacts the first protruding portion 11194 and flows to the left. Since the falling ball deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be reduced.

  That is, the opening / closing means 11190 maintains a low probability that a ball will enter the second additional prize opening 11183 while the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained in the open state or the closed state, and the second additional prize is received during the state change. The probability that a sphere enters the mouth 11183 is high.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing means 11190 is interlocked with the state of the opening / closing plate 1300, so that the probability that a ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 changes. Here, a description will be given of the occurrence of a case where a ball can be expected to enter the second additional prize opening 11183 and a case where it cannot be expected due to a difference in driving control of the solenoid 1510.

  The phenomenon in which the sphere flows to the left of the cut surface SP12 of the fall delay plate 3250 occurs when the open / close plate 11300 changes to the open state (see FIGS. 82B and 82C).

  Therefore, in the driving pattern in which the solenoid 1510 continues to maintain the driving (excitation) state (an operation pattern with a low probability of entering the ball), when the ball that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 passes through the protruding rib 11111, the tip member 1520 Similar to the arrangement in FIG. 5, the opening / closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position. Since the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is maintained, the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is maintained, so that the sphere that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down (see FIG. 82). ).

  On the other hand, immediately after the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the driving (excited) is once released (the opening / closing plate 11300 is opened short), and in the driving pattern (operation pattern with a high entrance probability), the cutting surface SP12 When the ball that has flowed to the left passes through the protruding rib 11111, the opening / closing means 11190 is disposed at the left end position. However, since the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is temporarily released thereafter, the solenoid 1510 The opening / closing means 11190 moves toward the right end position by the biasing force of the return spring. As a result, the sphere that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 receives a rightward load from the first projecting portion 11194 and flows down along the second projecting portion 11195, and thus toward the second additional prize winning port 11183. Can flow down.

  In this way, by providing variations in the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 11300, the cutting surface SP12 is cut at the same timing (for example, the timing at which the inclined surface 11340 contacts the ball at the start of the round game R, see FIG. 82 (b)). It is possible to change the probability that the ball that has flowed to the left enters the second additional prize opening 11183.

  Note that the timing for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 in the operation pattern with a high probability of entering is not particularly limited. In the present embodiment, the timing at which a sphere that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 with a load from the opening / closing plate 11300 passes through the protruding rib 11111 and reaches between the first protruding portion 11194 and the second protruding portion 11195. Thus, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is controlled to be released.

  In addition, the 2nd additional prize winning opening 11183 may be comprised as a ball entrance which starts the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol 2 by the entrance of a ball. In this case, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be increased by the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 11300 during the interval period between rounds, the normal symbol is in a high probability state (short time state) after the big hit game ends. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a phenomenon that causes a disadvantage to the player by starting the fluctuation accompanying the suspension of the special symbol 1.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The second additional prize opening 11183 indicates whether the sphere is directed to (detects) the detection sensor 1240 depending on the position of the sphere on the front side of the opening / closing plate 11300 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 11300 changes to the open state. In addition to being able to switch whether to go (enter the ball) or not, it is easier to make the ball flow down to the second additional prize opening 11183 when the ball is continuously fired during the interval period between rounds. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to increase the number of paid-out prize balls when the ball is continuously fired during the interval period between rounds, so that the game mode of continuing the ball firing during the interval period between rounds is promoted. Can be made easier.

  While the state of the opening / closing plate 11300 is maintained, the second additional winning opening 11183 is configured to make it difficult to enter the ball even if the ball reaches. Accordingly, the second additional winning opening 11183 can be made to function as a winning opening that makes it easy for a ball to enter in a state where the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven (small hit game or big hit game).

  While the state of the opening / closing means 11190 is maintained, it is difficult to enter the second additional prize opening 11183, while it is easy for the ball to enter the second additional prize opening 11183 during the state change of the opening / closing means 11190. In addition to the above configuration, the second additional prize opening 11183 has a ball that receives a load from the opening / closing plate 11300 when the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state. It was configured to flow down to 11183. Thus, the probability that a ball enters the second additional prize opening 11183 by providing a variation in the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 11300 after the opening / closing plate 11300 is driven toward the open state (the round game R has started). Can be changed.

  Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 140. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000 in the first control example. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away to make the opening / closing plate 1300 visible, and a part of the side wall part 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are imaginary lines. Is illustrated. FIG. 86 (a) shows a schematic diagram showing the shielding state of the first variable prize winning device 6000, and FIG. 86 (b) shows the inside from the shielding state in which the inside is difficult to see (it is difficult to see but visible). The schematic diagram which shows the permeation | transmission state of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 6000 when the permeation | transmission effect which changes to the permeation | transmission state which can visually recognize is performed is illustrated. Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the element same as embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the first variable prize winning device 6000 described in this control example has a thin plate member 1210 disposed on the front side of the storage channel 1231, and the inside of the storage channel 1231 is difficult to visually recognize. (The permeability | transmittance of the thin-plate member 1210 is comprised low).

  In addition, even if an attempt is made to look inside the storage channel 1231 through the opening of the detection sensor 1240, the storage channel 1231 is formed as a bent channel and the downstream side cannot be visually recognized. It is configured so that the number of balls stored in can not be grasped. In addition, since the disposition position of the interference device 6900 is downstream of the bent portion, the movable state of the interference device 6900 cannot be visually recognized.

  Further, by extending a thin plate member 1210 upstream of the detection sensor 1240 in the opening direction (left side of FIG. 86 (a)) (see FIG. 14), the direction of the line of sight when looking through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is limited. In addition, the interior of the storage channel 1231 is configured to be difficult to visually recognize.

  With this configuration, it may be difficult to determine the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900 in the shielded state of the first variable prize winning device 6000. it can.

  In the variable winning device 6000 configured in this way, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on based on the fact that a predetermined condition (for example, a successful timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88B)) is established. However, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the covering front plate 1200 is formed of a half mirror so as to switch to a transmissive state in which the inside is visible. Accordingly, when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900 can be recognized by the player.

  An optical sensor that detects light incident from the outside may be provided behind the covering front plate 1200. In this case, using the characteristics of a half mirror that allows the inside to be visually recognized when irradiated with strong light from the outside, an illegal act of irradiating the covering front plate 1200 with strong light to visually recognize the inside is performed. It can be determined by the output of the optical sensor. Therefore, an illegal command can be suppressed by setting an error command in response to a change in the output of the optical sensor and controlling the game so that continuation of the game is difficult.

  In addition, in this control example, although the structure which switches to a transmissive state is used by irradiating light (transmission lamp) with respect to the covering front board 1200, you may use the structure of other than that, For example, a part of the covering front plate 1200 (for example, the thin plate member 1210) or the light emitting means is moved so that the incident angle of the light irradiated to the covering front plate 1200 from the light emitting means (LED) that is always lit is switched. It may be configured so that the inside can be seen only when the movable part is located at a predetermined position.

  Further, the covering front plate 1200 may be configured by a transparent color whose inside is visually recognizable, and the surface thereof may be subjected to processing (for example, embossing) that irregularly reflects the irradiated light. As a result, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the first variable prize winning device 6000 is difficult to see due to light emitted from various lamps, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, various In the state where the lamp is not lit), the inside of the variable winning device 6000 may be visible. Thereby, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the store clerk can easily check the inside of the variable winning device 6000.

  When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall is provided to shield the light radiated from various lamps from being radiated to the first variable prize winning device 6000, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielding state and a non-shielding state. A configuration may be provided. Thereby, even while the game is being performed, the player can visually recognize the inside of the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000.

  In addition, a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the first variable prize winning device 6000 with light is provided, and light emission control is performed on the light emitting means, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 You may make it switch a state (state which is irradiating light), and the state (state which is not irradiating light) visible.

  Furthermore, a decorative movable member is provided on the covering front plate 1200 whose inside can be visually confirmed, and the operation of the movable member is controlled so that the inside of the storage channel 1231 can be visually recognized (the decorative movable member is A state in which the storage channel 1231 is movable at a position that does not overlap) and a state in which the inside of the storage channel 1231 is difficult to visually recognize (a state in which the decorative movable member is movable in a position that overlaps the storage channel 1231). You may make it switch.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the covering front plate 1200 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire range of the storage flow path 1231 and ensures that the movable state of the interference device 6900 is visually recognized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as it has an effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 in a posture in which a normal game is performed.

  For example, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize only the lower half (downstream side of the bent portion) of the storage channel 1231 and to ensure the visibility of the upper half (even if the formation of the upper half mirror is omitted). It is also possible to make it difficult to visually recognize only the portion overlapping the interference member 6930 of the interference device 6900 in front view. Thereby, the structure which makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 can be constructed at low cost.

  Further, for example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 may be ensured (the formation of the lower half half mirror is omitted), while the upper half may be made difficult to visually recognize. In this case, by visually recognizing the sphere remaining in the lower half of the storage channel 1231, the lower limit of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped, while being stored in the storage channel 1231. It can be difficult to know the exact number.

  Therefore, when the player temporarily stops firing the ball in order to reduce the useless ball (the ball that does not enter the winning opening), it is difficult to make the timing for stopping the firing. In the first variable winning device 6000 (see FIG. 53) described in this control example, when the storage flow path 1231 is full (ten balls are stored), no more balls can be expected. Since it is comprised in this way, a useless ball can be reduced by stopping the launch of a ball at the timing.

  On the other hand, in this control example, the number of balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 6000 in the predetermined number of round games R and the number of balls that are stored in the storage channel 1231 do not necessarily match. Even if the number of balls entering the 1 variable winning device 6000 is counted, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 cannot be accurately known. Therefore, in order to directly grasp the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231.

  That is, because of the configuration of this control example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 is ensured (the formation of the lower half mirror is omitted), while the configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the upper half becomes effective. It becomes difficult for the player to easily set the timing to stop the ball firing. Thereby, the player's attention and concentration with respect to the ball launch in the jackpot game can be improved, and the player can be prevented from playing casually.

  As a feature of the present control example shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), in addition to the change in the visual recognition state described above, the operation timing of the interference member 6930 is operated by the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). The timing that can be set is prepared, but details will be described later.

  Next, the screen configuration of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81, a second symbol display device 83, and a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize), a change display of a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. In addition, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to move. Here, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 87B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 93) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second.

  In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. Further, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present control example, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time. In addition, when both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 exist, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to have a ball entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and the player has left the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. to cause.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not yet been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to have different types of special symbols (one of the special symbols 1 and 2) that are likely to be selected according to the gaming state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery is easily executed in the current gaming state. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display when a lottery of a special symbol that is difficult to be executed in the current gaming state is executed is displayed.

  Here, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol that is difficult to execute the lottery is executed is a big attention for the player. For example, when a special symbol 2 lottery that is difficult to be executed in the special symbol normal state is executed, and the lottery result is a big win, the player is compared with a special symbol 1 lottery. May increase the expectation of the profits that can be obtained. In addition, for example, when a special symbol 1 that is difficult to be drawn in a high probability state of a special symbol is executed, and the lottery result is a big win, compared to a case where a special symbol 2 is a big win. The expectation of the profit that the player can obtain may be low.

  For this reason, in the small area Ds3, the display is changed only when a lottery of a special symbol that is difficult to be executed in the current gaming state is executed (by separating it from the change display in the main display area Dm). It is easier to attract the attention of the player, and the player can be drawn into the variable display.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbols displayed in the main display region Dm are displayed in the right small region Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a bee in this control example) usually performs a predetermined action, sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, A notice effect is performed by, for example, appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), and If a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 is being performed, the number of times of entering the ball is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is 1st. It is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol (second symbol) displayed in the lower half The number of reserved balls) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 87 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank).

  It should be noted that, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the four divided areas may be different by the number of reserved balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, a timing effect (operation effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this control example in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 92.

  In this control example, an effect related to the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86) is executed based on an operation on the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). In addition, as an effect related to the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231, for example, an effect of changing the visibility inside the storage channel 1231, or the discharge mode of the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 Illustrative effects and the like are exemplified. These effects are configured such that the contents of the effects change depending on the degree of deviation between the operation timing that is a predetermined reference and the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

  Here, in this control example, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing of operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). Then, according to the timing effect (operation effect), the effect is configured so that the profit obtained by the player is maximized by performing the operation with good timing. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 89, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 88 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during the notice effect performed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and FIG. 88 (b) to FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in a timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation status of the operation means (operation button 300) are used to change the first based on the operation of the operation means. The display contents of the three-symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 88, on the third symbol display device 81, a round number display unit 714 for displaying the current round number is displayed on the upper left of the screen in a manner indicating that the game R is in the third round. In the area Ds2, an acquisition display that suggests the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "Aim for the right" is displayed on the guidance display section for guiding the game method. Then, an acquisition number display mode 718 for indicating the number of balls acquired based on the winning of a ball in the specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is displayed as “15” indicating the number of winning balls of the specific winning opening 1000a. Is done. The number-of-acquisition display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 1000a, and then moved and displayed toward the small area Ds2, and finally the small area Ds2 is displayed. It is added as an acquisition display.

  In the round number display section 714, a display related to the currently executed game section (round number or interval) is displayed largely on the left side, and a display related to the game section started after the end of the currently executed game section is displayed on the right side. It is displayed small.

  Further, below the round number display, four circles are displayed side by side. This circle is switched to a circle that is filled in depending on the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than four, the leftmost circle is filled (see FIG. 88A, corresponding to the shortage display) and stored in the storage channel 1231. When the number of spheres is 4 or more and less than 7, the second circle from the left is filled (corresponding to the intermediate number display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 7 When the number is less than nine, the second circle from the right is filled (see FIG. 92A, corresponding to the shortage display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is ten. In this case, the rightmost circle is filled in (see FIG. 92 (b), corresponding to full display).

  In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) starts from the next round and a guidance display for informing the game performance of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. . An effect area used for timing effects (operation effects) is displayed on the lower side of the screen.

  In this effect area, a button display mode 715 corresponding to the operation button 300 is displayed, and a sub-display area Ds4 in which a display pointer 719 (see FIG. 88B) is displayed corresponding to the button display mode 715. Under the sub display area Ds4, there is provided a sub display area Ds5 that is arranged in the same shape as the sub display area Ds4 and displays information related to the player's operation.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 (b), the sub display area Ds4 is an area in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled from right to left, and the display pointer 719 is a display mode indicating the operation timing. By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) at the timing coincident with the bar display unit 717, a successful effect (see FIG. 88B described later) is executed. Further, when the operation means is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display unit 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 89 described later) is executed.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on in connection with the successful performance being executed in the round game R in the fourth round (see FIG. 86 (b)). In the description of this control example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a) and FIG. 86 (b), the covering front plate 1200 is difficult to visually recognize the inside when the transmissive lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off. When 227ba to 227be are turned on, a half mirror is used to switch to a transmission state in which the inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, by turning on the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the flow situation of the sphere flowing down in the vicinity of the interference device 6900 (see FIG. 86A and FIG. 86B) (the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231) The storage mode) can be grasped by the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 89, in association with the execution of the failure effect in the round game R in the fourth round, some of the transmission lamps 227ba among the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on. Accordingly, the storage mode of the spheres arranged near the interference device 6900 (lower half of the storage channel 1231) cannot be visually recognized, but is arranged near the detection sensor 1240 (upper half of the storage channel 1231). The storage mode of the sphere is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), while the notice effect is being executed, the characters “standby” are scroll-displayed from right to left in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5.

  Next, the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4. When the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719a matches the bar display unit 717, the screen center is displayed. In addition, the characters “good” are displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), the result display mode 720 is displayed, and at the same time, the characters “Look at the attacker!” Are displayed near the result display mode 720, and the result display mode 720 is displayed in the sub display area Ds5. In the same manner as above, the characters “good” are displayed.

  In this case, the characters “good” are distributed and arranged on the third symbol display device 81 so that the player can easily notice the display, and the player who has noticed the display can attack the player (the first variable winning device 6000). ). Then, the player can be aware that the stored balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable prize winning device 6000 can be visually recognized, and the player who has noticed the number of stored balls Accordingly, it is possible to perform appropriate launch ball adjustment.

  The state shown in FIG. 89 is a state in which the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719c does not match the bar display unit 717 in the timing effect (operation effect). “bad” is displayed, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the result display mode 720 is displayed, and at the same time, the characters “bad” are displayed in the sub display area Ds5 in the same manner as the result display mode 720. In this case, the characters “Watch the attacker!” Are not displayed.

  In this case, by disposing the characters “bad” on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily notice the display. In addition, by not displaying the characters “Attention to the attacker!”, The player can make the attacker (first variable) until the stored ball stored in the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 is difficult to see. Since it is possible to suppress attention to the winning device 6000), the player's attention to the performance of the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's confidence regarding the display of the characters “Attention to the attacker!” (Confidence that profits can be obtained by following the display).

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 89, when the result display mode 720 is displayed, some of the transmission lamps 227ba are lit. On the other hand, in this control example, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the round game R of the fourth round, the operation button 300 can be operated even after 3 seconds have passed after the display pointer 719 passes the bar display unit 717. If not, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled so as to be kept turned off, so that in the subsequent round game R (from the fourth round to the sixth round), the storage channel 1231 It is configured so that it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  FIG. 90A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display contents of a timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round, and FIG. 90B to FIG. ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during a timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation status of the operation means (operation button 300) are used to change the first based on the operation of the operation means. The display contents of the three-symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 90, on the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned number-of-rounds display unit 714 is displayed on the upper left of the screen in a manner indicating that it is during the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round, In the small area Ds2, an acquisition display that suggests the number of balls acquired during the big hit is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "Aim for the right" is displayed on the guidance display unit that guides the game method.

  In the center of the screen, an operation instruction display composed of characters “push!” Prompting the operation of the operation button 300 is executed. An effect area used for timing effects (operation effects) is displayed on the lower side of the screen.

  In the sub display area Ds5 corresponding to the lower part of the effect area, a band display portion 716 that is a display mode indicating the operation timing is displayed in the same manner as the bar display portion 717. The band display unit 716 is provided adjacent to the left side of the first band unit 716a and the bar display unit 716a on the right side of the bar display unit 717. A second band portion 716b on which characters “highest” overlap with 717 are displayed, and a third band portion 716c on which characters “failure” are displayed on the left side of the second band portion 716b. .

  As described above, the display pointer 719d is scroll-displayed from the right to the left in the sub display area Ds4. In this control example, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player varies depending on the position of the display pointer 719d on the band display unit 716 when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated.

  For example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the first belt portion 716a, a relief effect (see FIG. 91A described later) is executed. In this case, there is an advantageous event that a privilege to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, while the payout of the prize ball in the round game R of the fifth round is slightly reduced (the prescribed number (In this control example, 10 balls cannot be entered), and the number of prize balls decreases.) An adverse event occurs in which the duration of round game R in the fifth round is the maximum time (30 seconds). .

  For example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the second band portion 716b, the highest effect (see FIG. 90B described later) is executed. In this case, after the jackpot game is over, an advantageous event that a privilege to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol occurs, and the specified number (10) of balls in the round game R of the fifth round is the first. An advantageous event that the specific winning opening 1000a can be entered and the duration of the round game R of the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds) occurs, but no disadvantageous event occurs.

  Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the third belt portion 716c, or when the operation button 200 (operation means) is not operated, the failure effect is produced. (See FIG. 91B described later) is executed. In this case, an adverse event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol cannot be obtained after the jackpot game ends, while the prescribed number (10) of balls in the round game R of the fifth round is the first. An advantageous event occurs in which the player can enter the specific winning hole 1000a and the duration of the round game R in the fifth round can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Since the maximum profit can be obtained by operating the operation button 300 (operation means) when the display pointer 719 is on the second band portion 716b that overlaps the bar display portion 717 vertically, FIG. 88 (b) Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) displayed in FIG. 89, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), an example of display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719d coincides with the second belt portion 716b up and down. In the center of the screen, the result display mode 720 displays the letters “highest! V acquisition!” (Highest performance) and that the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715. The Thereby, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the maximum profit can be obtained, and to improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, when the display pointer 719 is in the second band portion 716b that overlaps with the bar display portion 717 in the vertical direction, the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated so that the maximum profit can be obtained. Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) (effect in the round game R in the fourth round) displayed in FIGS. 88 (b) and 89, the effect in the interval between rounds is immediately started. Also, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the guidance display displays “Don't mind after the end of the round”, so the interval between rounds after the end of the round game R in the fourth round (see FIG. 88). 90 (a)), the player's attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Thereby, the player is not aware of the display of the timing effect (operation effect) shown in FIG. 90 (b), and the possibility that a disadvantage is caused by not operating the operation button 300 (operation means) can be reduced. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (a), an example of display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719e coincides with the first belt portion 716a up and down. In the center of the screen, as a result display mode 720, the text “Reliable! Get V with Wake!” (Reliable effect) is displayed, and operating the operation button 300 changes the display mode of the button display mode 715. Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that it is possible to obtain a profit that can be relieved although there are some disadvantages, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Note that the slight disadvantage is that, as described above, the payout of prize balls in the round game R in the fifth round is slightly reduced (the specified number (10 in this control example) cannot be entered). This means that the duration of the round game R in the fifth round is the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (b), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719f is vertically aligned with the third band portion 716c. In the center of the screen, the result display mode 720 displays the characters “failure! V not! Next expectation!” (Failure effect) and the operation mode of the operation button 300 changes the display mode of the button display mode 715. Is displayed. Thereby, it can alert | report that a disadvantage generate | occur | produces greatly to a player.

  As described above, the great disadvantage is a disadvantage that it is not possible to acquire a privilege to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, as described above, a prescribed number (10) of balls can be entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round, and the round game R of the fifth round is continued. Since the time can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), the end timing of the jackpot game can be advanced compared to the case shown in FIG. 91 (a), and a special symbol lottery can be executed early. Therefore, it is possible to easily advance the timing of transition to the next jackpot game.

  Thus, in this control example, the player can obtain a profit based on the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) in the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between the rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round. Since it changes, the player's willingness to operate the operation buttons 300 (operation means) can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b), the display in the sixth round game R will be described. 92 (a) and 92 (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents that are notified by the third symbol display device 81 that the round game R of the sixth round is being executed. FIG. 92 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display when the jackpot type is “big hit L” or “big hit N”. In FIG. 92 (b), the big hit type is “big hit K”, It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display in the case of "big hit M" or "big hit k".

  In the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92 (a), it is determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot of “Big Jack L” or “Big Jack N”, that is, the sixth round jackpot is won. A "big hit" character is displayed.

  In addition, in the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92 (b), the jackpot type wins a jackpot of “bonanza K”, “jackpot M” or “jackpot k”, that is, the sixth round jackpot "Big jackpot" indicating that the player has been won is displayed, and the interference device 6900 is executed in an advantageous operation pattern (20th operation pattern) for the player in round game R of the sixth round. “+ Chance” is displayed as the over-winning possibility increase notification mode 721 for notifying the player, and accordingly, “just right-handed!” Is displayed on the guidance display section in the small area Ds3.

  When the jackpot type is a jackpot of "Katsutsu K", "Katsutsu M" or "Katsukatsu k", in the round game R of the sixth round, the number of entered balls is larger than the specified number by continuing without firing the ball. Interference device 6900 is driven so as to increase the possibility of occurrence (see FIG. 99A). Accordingly, the player can increase the possibility of receiving award balls exceeding the specified number by continuing to fire the balls according to the display of FIG. 92 (b).

  In this way, in addition to the mode for notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, by notifying the mode for notifying the operation status of the interference device 6900 during the jackpot on the display screen in the round game R, The display mode suitable for the round game R having various patterns can be displayed. In this control example, the player can easily receive the maximum profit scheduled for each jackpot type as the profit given to the player by continuing or stopping the ball firing according to this display. Controlled. Therefore, the player can easily obtain the maximum profit by firing the ball according to the display.

  In this control example, the timing effect (operation effect) is changed depending on the operation content for the player executed in the timing effect (operation effect). Operation history (operations) in which an operation button 300 (operation means) is operated by a player in an operation effect other than (operation effect) (for example, a mini-game effect during a jackpot game or a reach effect during a special symbol change) Based on the number of times, the operation content, and the operation result, the timing effect (operation effect) may be configured differently. Thereby, a game can be actively performed with respect to various operation effects performed with the pachinko machine 10, and it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  Further, the timing effect is not limited to the operation result of the player with respect to the operation button 300 (operation means), for example, based on the timing period measured by the timing means (RTC) or the game period in which the player played the game. You may comprise so that the effect aspect of (operation effect) may be switched.

<Electric Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described again. FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. Note that changes to FIG. 4 will be described, and description of the same parts will be omitted.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 100) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 100, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 100 is a model diagram for explaining a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery (and the jackpot) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. Used to set initial values for the first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type counter C3 used for selecting the stop-type, the variation-type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern, and the first per-random-number counter C1. A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used.

  Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selection of the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 117). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the counter values for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning for the first entrance 64 and the winning for the second entrance 640. The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage 203b is provided.

  In the present control example, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are each provided with a maximum of 4 reserved balls, and a total of up to 8 reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if a ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game, each counter value is displayed as a special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first holding ball storage area 203a and a game ball wins in the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the special symbol 1 is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Various settings and control processes are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, and various kinds for displaying the special symbol 2 in a variable manner. Settings and control processing are executed.

  On the other hand, during the period when the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is being displayed or the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a big hit game, it is impossible to draw the special symbol. When winning the ball entrance 640, if the number of reserves for the winning entrance (starting entrance) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the prize is won. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entered entrance. Further, when the number of reserved tickets for the winning entrance is equal to or more than the upper limit (4 in this control example), each counter value or the like is not acquired and five winning balls (in this control example) Only the prize ball is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 319 in the present control example), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (319 in the present control example). Yes. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 319, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 94 (a)) of the main controller 110, and the random number counter C1 of the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big jackpot defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot.

  Here, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 94A) will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 lottery are set. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state, it is determined whether or not the value of the obtained first random number counter C1 is “0” in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 lottery, If it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. When the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined whether the value of the obtained first random number counter C1 is within the range of “1 to 4” in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 lottery. If it is within the range of “1 to 4”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “0” is the first random number table as described above. 202a (see FIG. 94A). In this way, since there are 320 random number values, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1, so the probability of a special symbol jackpot is “1/320”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first per-random number counter C1, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random numbers “1-4” are the first per-random number table as described above. 202a. In this way, since the total number of random number values is 320 and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 4, the probability that the special symbol jackpot will be “1/80”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94 (b)). The Rukoto. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, it is different from the symbol that has been reached as the final stop symbol. Two stop (rendering) patterns are selected: “reach out” (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops and “complete out” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the special RAM 203. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of random values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in the probabilistic state of special symbols, it is easy to generate jackpots, so that the random effect range corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide as 0 to 89 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. The table is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected, and “reach out” is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that “reach out” is difficult to select. Also, if the special symbol is in a low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. The table for the low probability is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out”, and the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “out of reach” is widened to 80-99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done.

  In the present control example, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. In this variation pattern, a variation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 117) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns. In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables used in common for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the determination results. Has been.

  In the present control example, the second per-random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol execution area of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 94 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. If the value matches the value of the random number that is the winning specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). In this control example, in the second random number table 202c, when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are five random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5-9. " Since the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, the total number of random numbers that can be won is 5, so the probability that the normal symbol is hit when the normal symbol has a low probability is “1. / 48 ".

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the short time state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be won is 200, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”. . In this way, in this control example, the random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol are greatly different between the low-probability state of the normal symbol and the high-probability state of the normal symbol. Also, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol is hit are different between the low probability and the high probability of the normal symbol. . For this reason, since the ease of entering the second entrance 640 differs greatly between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, It is possible to cause the player to play a game aiming at the first entrance 64.

  When the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2). 2), the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 9”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × twice”.

  On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal symbol high probability state, the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2) displays the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for 1 second. If the value of the second random number counter C4 that is executed and acquired is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the symbol), and the second entrance 640 is opened for “one second × twice”. In this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair game play.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (that is, “0 to 239”), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 93, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 117), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 116). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 115) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first per-random number table 202a and the second per-random number table 202c described above, a first per-type selection table 202b, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, an opening / closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area 202e and at least an opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f are provided.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94 (b)) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and is determined by the first hit type counter C2. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the special symbol 1 is defined in such a way that the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 24” in association with “big hit K”. This “big hit K” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that are “big hit K”, so “big hit K” is determined when the special symbol 1 is a big win. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  This “big hit K” is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, shifts to a high probability state (80 times ST) of 80 times. Therefore, this is a jackpot type that is advantageous in terms of the number of balls that the player can acquire (expected ball) from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

  In addition, for special symbol 1, the range of “25 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit L”. This “big hit L” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that are “big hit L”, so “big hit L” is determined when the special symbol 1 is a big win. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  This “big hit L” is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds, and it is the same as “big hit K” that the transition to the high probability state (ST80 times) is 80 times shorter after the jackpot ends. In terms of game efficiency (the number of paid-out prize balls / the time required for the jackpot game), it is a disadvantageous jackpot type compared to “jackpot K”.

  Further, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit M” in the range of “50 to 74”. This “big hit M” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that are “big hit M”, so “big hit M” is determined when the special symbol 1 is a big win. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  This “big hit M” is set to six rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit, the normal symbol time-short state is given 100 times.

  Further, for the special symbol 1, “big hit N” is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “75 to 99”. This “big hit N” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that are “big hit N”, so “big hit N” is determined when the special symbol 1 is a big win. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

  This “jackpot N” is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds. After the jackpot, the normal symbol time-saving state is given 100 times in the same way as “jackpot M”. It is disadvantageous in that the maximum number of payouts is small with respect to “big hit M” (the possibility of excess winning (over winning) is low).

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, the range (all ranges) in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 99” is defined in association with “big hit k”. This “big hit k” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 100 counter values that are “big hit k”, so “hits k” is determined when the special symbol 2 is a lottery. The percentage is 100%.

  This “big hit k” is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds. After the big hit, whether the transition to the high probability state (ST80 times) of 80 hours or less or whether the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times It changes depending on the game mode of the player during the jackpot game. Note that the game mode of the player is not limited in any way, and the player may pass a ball through a predetermined entrance or may operate a predetermined operation means. It will be described later.

  In other words, special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of jackpot game, but special symbol 2 is advantageous in terms of benefits (ordinary short time state or high probability state) given after the jackpot ends. (It becomes easier to shift to a high probability state).

  As described above, in this control example, when the special symbol 1 lottery is a big win, the special symbol 2 lottery is shifted to a higher probability state that is advantageous to the player. The configuration is easy. Therefore, once the consecutive home mode (high probability state of special symbol and short time state of normal symbol) is set, the special symbol 2 lottery is made by entering the second entrance 640 by right-handed. Is likely to be executed, and the jackpot game is likely to be repeated. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the consecutive resort mode. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, detailed contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 52) are stored for each scenario type. And the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game using the information stored in the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e.

  Specifically, the operation scenario 1 to the operation scenario 6 are defined as scenario types in the opening / closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario of up to 30 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set for the opening / closing plate 1300 and “retracted state” is set for the interference member 6930 as scenario contents. In the operation scenario 1, even before 30 seconds elapses, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 in this control example), and the initial scenario Control is performed so as to return to the state (the state in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the interference member is in the retracted state).

  The operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario of up to 10 seconds in which “open (open state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 and “retracted state” is set in the interference member 6930 as scenario contents. In the operation scenario 2, even before 10 seconds elapses, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed when the detection sensor 1240 detects a predetermined number of balls (10 in this control example), and the initial scenario. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In the operation scenario 3, “open (open state) 0.2 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds → open (open state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 as the scenario contents, and the “retracted state” is set in the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “1.0 second → overhang state 0.1 second → retracted state” is set. In the operation scenario 3, even before 30 seconds elapses, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed when the detection sensor 1240 detects a predetermined number of balls (10 in this control example), and the initial scenario It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 3, unlike the operation scenario 1 and operation scenario 2 described above, the storage channel 1231 is opened by first opening (opening) the opening / closing plate 1300 and then closing (closing) it. The remaining sphere can be discharged, details will be described later. Since the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged (as described above, 0.2 seconds are required for discharging one sphere).

  Of the spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231, the spheres discharged while being closed (closed state) for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability variation determination unit 4800. In this control example, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the round game R in the fifth round, regardless of the type of jackpot, and after 18.0 seconds (the fifth round) The distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position 20.0 seconds after the start of the game R).

  This “after 2.0 seconds” is later than the timing at which the third sphere counted from the downstream among the spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 passes the sorting operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51). This is a numerical value set as a time point before the timing at which the fourth ball passes the sorting operation member 4851. That is, the fourth ball passes through the discharge port 1150 immediately before the end of 0.8 seconds when the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept closed (closed state) (from the start of the round game R in the fifth round). This is a numerical value derived from the setting (2.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round game R of the fifth round) that it takes 1.0 seconds to pass through the communication passage 4810 from the discharge port 1150. .

  In the operation scenario 4, “open (open state) 0.2 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds → open (open state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 as the scenario contents, and the “retracted state” is set in the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “1.0 second → overhang state 24.0 seconds → retracted state” is set. In the operation scenario 4, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) on the detection sensor 1240, and the initial scenario. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 4, as in the above-described operation scenario 3, the open / close plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), whereby the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 is left. The details will be described later. Since the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged (as described above, 0.2 seconds are required for discharging one sphere). Of the spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231, the spheres discharged while the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability variation determination unit 4800 as described above. is there.

  The “extension state 24.0 seconds” of the operation scenario 4 is set as a numerical value capable of maintaining the extension state until at least the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position. That is, in the operation scenario 4, as described later, a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of spheres cannot pass through the detection sensor 1240 until the interference member 6930 is retracted. Since the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position before the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 after the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. It becomes impossible to flow down to the specific area 4830.

  In the operation scenario 5, “open (open state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → open (open state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 as the scenario contents, and the “retracted state” is set in the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds in which “0.2 second → extended state 0.2 second → retracted state 2.6 seconds → extended state 20 seconds → retracted state” is set. In the operation scenario 5, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) by the detection sensor 1240, and the initial scenario. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 5, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), one sphere remaining in the storage channel 1231 is discharged as described later. This is an operation scenario in which the flow of the sphere is restricted by the interference member 6930 and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is limited to 8 (see FIG. 53B, the interference member 6930). This corresponds to a state where there is one sphere downstream of).

  In this case, since it is possible to restrict the passage of the sphere through the detection sensor 1240 in a state where the number of the spheres that have passed through the detection sensor 1240 is less than the specified number (9 in this control example), the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. Since it is possible to allow the passage of the sphere to the detection sensor 1240 based on the displacement, the passage of the sphere to the detection sensor 1240 can be generated with a plurality of spheres arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240. it can. Thereby, it is possible to easily generate an excessive prize (so-called “over prize”).

  In the operation scenario 6, “open (open state) 3.0 seconds → closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds → open (open state)” is set in the opening / closing plate 1300 as the scenario content, In an operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds, “interference state 0.2 seconds → extension state 2.6 seconds → retraction state 0.2 seconds → extension state 0.2 seconds → retraction state” is set in the interference member 6930. is there. In the operation scenario 6, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation scenario of the opening / closing plate 1300 is completed by detecting a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) by the detection sensor 1240, and the initial scenario. It is controlled to return to the state.

  In this operation scenario 6, the opening / closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed). However, the flow of the ball is restricted by the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario in which the ball is not discharged from the discharge port 1150 while maintaining the closed state (closed state). Further, after 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state, so the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is 10 (FIG. 53 ( a), the round game R is ended based on the detection of the tenth ball by the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, unlike the operation scenario 5, the operation scenario 6 cannot make it easy to generate an excess prize.

  In this way, by storing the operation scenario based on the difference in profits obtained by the player and storing it, the profits that the operations of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 that are currently executed give to the player can be obtained. It can be easily distinguished.

  In each operation scenario, the opening and closing plate 1300 is forced to be in a closed state (see FIGS. 8 and 9) by entering a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls into the first specific winning opening 1000a. However, the interference member 6930 can control the round game R even if a specified number of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a during the operation scenario. The operation based on the operation scenario is continued until the interval between rounds after the end of the period ends, and control is performed so as to change to the evacuation state at the end of the interval between rounds (the operation scenario ends).

  FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open / close plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f. This open / close plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is provided with information as to which round game R corresponds to which jackpot type each scenario type determined in advance.

  In the MPU of the main controller 110, when the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is executed, information corresponding to the contents defined in the opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is displayed. Reading from the operation scenario storage area 202e, the open / close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are moved.

  The opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is configured so that a corresponding operation scenario can be set based on the combination of the jackpot type and the round game R of which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

  In the present control example, the case where the interference member 6930 is controlled to move in response to the start timing of the round game R of the jackpot game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the setting order is stored in advance in the open / close plate and the interference member operation scenario table 202f, and the interference member 6930 is movable in an operation scenario that changes in sequence every time the operation scenario ends from when the power is turned on (or a predetermined operation start timing). It may be controlled. Thereby, since the correspondence between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 can be broken, it is difficult for the player to predict the operation of the interference member 6930.

  96 (a), 96 (b), 97 (a), 97 (b), 98, 99 (a) and 99 (b) with reference to the jackpot type An operation mode of 1300 (first specific winning opening 1000a), the interference member 6930, and the sorting device 4850 (specific region 4830, see FIG. 51) will be described.

  96 (a), FIG. 96 (b), FIG. 97 (a), FIG. 97 (b), FIG. 98, FIG. 99 (a), and FIG. 99 (b) show the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a. Also indicated as “open”, the closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also indicated as “closed”, the extended state of the interference member 6930 is also indicated as “tension”, and the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is also indicated as “retracted”. A state in which the sphere can flow into the region 4830 (that is, a state in which the sorting operation member 4851 is disposed in the open position) is also indicated as “open”, and a state in which the sphere cannot flow into the specific region 4830 (ie, the sorting operation member). The state where 4851 is arranged at the closed position) is also indicated as “closed”.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the operation mode of the open / close plate 1300 (first specific prize opening 1000a) and the interference member 6930 from the first round game R to the fourth round game R is as follows. Since it is common regardless of the jackpot type, the period from the end of the round game R in the fourth round to the end of the jackpot game will be described in detail.

  Further, as described above, the driving mode of the sorting operation member 4851 is common regardless of the jackpot type (see FIG. 96A). That is, 2.0 seconds after the start of round game R of the fifth round, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position (the ball is opened so as to pass through the specific area 4830), and 18.0 seconds after that (5 The distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position (after 20.0 seconds from the start of the round game R of the round) (the ball is blocked so that it cannot pass through the specific region 4830).

  FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing changes in the time of the first specific prize opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the fifteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time variation shown in FIG. 96A is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot K (see FIG. 94B).

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the fifteenth operation pattern, after the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the fifth round is sandwiched by the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-described operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to this operation pattern, all the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round are discharged (0.2 seconds × 10 pieces). = 2.0 seconds) The ball stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in the fourth round does not remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the round game in the fifth round. In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the newly entered ball to enter the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, it takes 1 second after the start of the round game R of the fifth round. The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the regulating member 1600 is in the discharged state) Therefore, the event that the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position and the sphere is opened so as to pass through the specific area 4830 does not occur.

  On the other hand, the storage flow path 1231 is configured to have a shape capable of storing a restricted number of balls (10 in this control example), so that the round game R in the fifth round is given 10 balls to the first specific winning opening 1000a. It can be ended by entering individual balls. Therefore, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in the fifth round can be discharged during the state in which the ball can pass through the specific region 4830 (20.0 seconds). By continuing to fire the ball toward the winning opening 1000a, an event occurs in which the ball passes the specific area 4830 after the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  That is, in this operation pattern, since the ball is configured to be able to pass through the specific region 4830, an advantageous privilege (continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol in this control example) can be given to the player. In addition to being able to finish the round game R of the fifth round in a short time (finished by winning a prescribed number (10 in this control example)), the time efficiency for the number of payout balls in the big hit game is improved. Can be raised.

  In addition, since the timing when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 comes after the end of the round game R of the fifth round, it is not known whether the ball passes through the specific area 4830 over the round game R of the fifth round. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific prize winning opening 1000 a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the sixteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 96 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot L (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), in the 16th operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the fifth round is sandwiched by the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-described operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  First, according to this operation pattern, five spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged in the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R in the fifth round (0.2 seconds × 5 The number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in the fourth round may remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the round game R in the fifth round. For example, in the round game R of the fourth round, when five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the number of balls obtained by subtracting 5 from the stored number remains in the storage channel.

  Here, since the progress of the round game R in the fifth round varies depending on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in the fourth round, the cases will be described separately below.

  First, in the round game R in the fourth round, when ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the fifth round game R starts with five balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Is done.

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at a timing of passing through 4830 (a timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

  Therefore, when the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where five balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, a privilege advantageous to the player (continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol in this control example) can be given early.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is 4 (0.2 seconds × 4 pieces = 0.8 seconds), the storage flow path after discharge One sphere remains in 1231. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is nine (the number less than the specified number (10 in this control example)), so the fifth round The round game R of the eye will not end until 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operating time T1, elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout winning balls in the jackpot game is lowered.

  In FIG. 96 (b), as a representative example, a time change when ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round is illustrated.

  Secondly, in the round game R of the fourth round, when nine balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the round game R of the fifth round starts with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Is done.

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at a timing of passing through 4830 (a timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

  Therefore, when the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific region 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, a privilege advantageous to the player (continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol in this control example) can be given early.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), it remains in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that have been discharged are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R in the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the round game R in the fifth round is changed to the specified number. The ball can be terminated by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be increased.

  Third, in the round game R in the fourth round, when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is 0 to 8, 5 is stored in the storage channel 1231 from the number of stored balls. The round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where the number of balls (0 to 3 balls) that have been drawn is stored.

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at a timing of passing through 4830 (a timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

  In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the newly entered ball to enter the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, it takes 1 second after the start of the round game R of the fifth round. The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, while the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through all the balls (from 0 to 3), the sorting operation is performed in a state where the balls cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, the event that the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the round game R of the fifth round is started does not occur.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), it remains in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that have been discharged are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R in the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the round game R in the fifth round is changed to the specified number. The ball can be terminated by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. In addition, if the ball is allowed to pass through the specific area 4830 for at least 1 second after the end of the round game R in the fifth round (19 seconds have passed since the start of the round game R in the fifth round). If a predetermined number of balls (10 balls in this control example) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a before), an event occurs in which the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through the specific region 4830. As the ball passes through the specific area 4830, a privilege (in this control example, continuation of a high probability state of a special symbol) is given to the player. be able to.

  To summarize the first case to the third case described above, if there are 10 balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in the fourth round, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 early. On the other hand, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout winning balls in the round game of the fifth round is reduced (in the first case), and 9 balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round are 9 In this case, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 can be caused early, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout balls in the fifth round game is increased (in the second case), the fourth round When the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R is 0 to 8, the event that the balls pass the specific area 4830 is after the end of the fifth round game R. In, go up is time-efficient for the payout prize ball number of 5 round round game (third case).

  Therefore, in the case of controlling with the same operation pattern, the timing at which the player can obtain profit and the magnitude of the obtained profit can be changed for each game mode of the jackpot game.

  In the present control example, as described above, in the round game R in the fourth round, the profit obtained by the player can be maximized by setting the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to nine. . Therefore, at least when the jackpot type is jackpot L, information on the number of guides stored in the storage channel 1231 is displayed (see FIG. 88B). Thereby, attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved, and the player's line of sight can be guided.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the seventeenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time variation shown in FIG. 97A is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot M (see FIG. 94B).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the seventeenth operation pattern, after the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the fifth round of rounds is sandwiched by the fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) between rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95B).

  First, according to this operation pattern, the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R in the fifth round are discharged at the upper limit of 9 (0.2 seconds). (× 9 = 1.8 seconds) The ball stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in the fourth round can remain in the storage channel 1231 at the upper limit until the start of the round game in the fifth round. There is sex. In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for a ball that newly enters the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, it is newly added to the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fifth round. The ball that has entered the ball is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 for 1 second after the start of the round game R of the fifth round.

  Therefore, immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the regulating member 1600 is in the discharged state). The event that passes through the specific region 4830 immediately after the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position and the ball is opened to allow the specific region 4830 to pass is configured not to occur.

  In addition, the interference member 6930 is in an overhanging state until the passage of 25.0 seconds from the start of the round game R of the fifth round, and the flow of the ball is restricted (FIG. 86). (See (a)), the storage flow path 1231 is in a state in which a restricted number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot be stored (a state in which a maximum of 9 balls can be stored, substantially downstream of the interference member 6930). Since the sphere is not stored, it is maintained in a state in which a maximum of seven can be stored. Therefore, the round game of the 5th round cannot be completed until 25.0 seconds have elapsed after the start of the round game R of the 5th round, and then 10 balls are entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a. Alternatively, when the predetermined time (30.0 seconds in the present control example) elapses, the round game R of the fifth round ends.

  Therefore, during the state in which the ball can pass through the specific region 4830 (until 20.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fifth round game R), the fifth round game R stores in the storage channel 1231. Can't eject the used ball. Therefore, even if the ball is continuously fired toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, an event in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 does not occur after the round game R of the fifth round ends.

  That is, in this operation pattern, since the ball is configured so as not to pass through the specific region 4830, an advantageous privilege (continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol in this control example) can be given to the player. In addition to this, since the round game R of the fifth round becomes longer, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the big hit game cannot be increased (can be decreased).

  FIG. 97 (b) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific prize opening 1000 a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the eighteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 97 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot N (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the 18th operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the fifth round is sandwiched by the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds. The game R is started, and the fifth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95B).

  97 (a) and 97 (b), the 18th operation pattern is the 17th operation except that the length of the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the 5th round is different. Since it is the same as the pattern, the description of the parts common to the above description is omitted.

  The difference between the eighteenth operation pattern and the seventeenth operation pattern is whether or not a remaining ball remains without being discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R in the fifth round.

  That is, in the seventeenth operation pattern, as described above, the interval between rounds is set to the fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) between rounds. When 10 are stored, one remaining ball is generated.

  On the other hand, in the 18th operation pattern, since the interval between rounds is set to the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds, the maximum number of discharged is 10 and the number of stored balls is 1231 (maximum). Number) Even if it is stored, the whole ball can be discharged and no remaining ball is generated.

  In this case, in the 17th operation pattern, since there is a ball (remaining ball) discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, it is specified immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round. While it is possible to make the player think that a ball may pass through the region 4830 (expected normal jackpot), in the 18th operation pattern, from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R in the fifth round, Since there is no ball to be discharged (remaining ball), the player can grasp that there is no possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round (expected unusual big hit).

  Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be changed by the presence or absence of a ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231 while substantially sharing the profits obtained by the player.

  In addition, as described above, the profit obtained by the player is greater than the jackpot of the jackpot type M and the sixteenth operation pattern in which a remaining ball is generated in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round (FIG. 96 (b)) can be ascertained from the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231, so that the player's attention to the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the nineteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 98 is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot k (see FIG. 94B).

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the nineteenth operation pattern, after the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the round game R of the fifth round is sandwiched by the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds. The fifth round game R is started and executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95B).

  First, according to this operation pattern, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round is changed by the player's operation.

  That is, immediately after it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) according to the timing effect (operation effect, see FIGS. 90 and 91), the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state, Since the subsequent discharge of the spheres is restricted, the spheres arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 remain in the storage channel 1231. Note that the operation of the operation button 300 is controlled so that only the first pressing timing in the interval between rounds is valid and is invalidated for subsequent pressing, but details will be described later.

  Here, since the progress of the round game R in the fifth round changes depending on the number of spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231, attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved. Hereinafter, the cases will be described separately.

  First, a case where there are many spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 (a case where there are five or more) will be described. That is, the fifth round game R is started in a state where five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is early (see FIG. 91A).

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at a timing of passing through 4830 (a timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

  Therefore, when the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where five or more balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific area 4830. Since it passes, a privilege (continuation of the high probability state of a special symbol in this control example) advantageous to the player can be given early.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is 4 (0.2 seconds × 4 pieces = 0.8 seconds), the storage flow path after discharge One or more spheres remain in 1231. Accordingly, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 9 or less (the number less than the specified number (10 in this control example)). The round game R of the round does not end until 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operating time T1, elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout winning balls in the jackpot game is lowered.

  That is, in the first case, there is an advantageous phenomenon in which a privilege of shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol occurs after the end of the jackpot game, while the payout of the winning ball in the round game R in the fifth round is slightly less (The number of prize balls is reduced because the specified number (10 in this control example) cannot be entered), and the disadvantage is that the duration of round game R of the fifth round is the maximum time (30 seconds) An event occurs.

  Second, the case where there are four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 will be described. That is, the fifth round game R is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is good (see FIG. 90B).

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at a timing of passing through 4830 (a timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

  Therefore, when the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific region 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, a privilege advantageous to the player (continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol in this control example) can be given early.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), it remains in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that have been discharged are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R in the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the round game R in the fifth round is changed to the specified number. The ball can be terminated by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be increased. The predetermined number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is limited to 25.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, from the control mode of the interference member 6930. .

  In other words, in the second case, an advantageous event that a privilege to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol occurs after the jackpot game ends, and a prescribed number (10) of round games R in the fifth round is obtained. While the ball can enter the first specific prize opening 1000a and the advantageous event that the duration of the round game R of the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), the disadvantageous event is Does not occur.

  Third, a case where there are few spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 (a case where there are three or less) will be described. That is, the fifth round game R is started in a state where three or less balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to a case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is late (see FIG. 91B).

  Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at a timing of passing through 4830 (a timing at which the third sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

  In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the newly entered ball to enter the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, it takes 1 second after the start of the round game R of the fifth round. The sphere is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, while the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through all the balls (from 0 to 3), the sorting operation is performed in a state where the balls cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, the event that the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the round game R of the fifth round is started does not occur.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), it remains in the storage channel 1231. Although all the balls that have been discharged are discharged, the interference member 6930 maintains the overhanging state until 25.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round game R of the fifth round until 25.0 seconds have elapsed. A number (10 in this control example) of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In addition, when 20.0 seconds have elapsed after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the sorting operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51) is driven so that the ball cannot pass the specific area 4830.

  Therefore, it is configured such that an event in which a ball discharged from the storage flow path 1231 passes through the specific region 4830 after the end of the round game R of the fifth round does not occur.

  On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds × 4 = 0.8 seconds), it remains in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that have been discharged are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R in the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the round game R in the fifth round is changed to the specified number. The ball can be terminated by entering the first specific winning opening 1000a (it can be terminated without waiting for the elapse of 30.0 seconds which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1).

  Therefore, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be increased. The predetermined number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is limited to 25.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, from the control mode of the interference member 6930. .

  In other words, in the third case, an adverse event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol cannot be obtained after the jackpot game ends, while the specified number (10) of the round game R in the fifth round An advantageous event occurs in which the ball can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R in the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

  Summarizing the above-described first to third cases, if there are five or more spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231, an event in which the spheres pass through the specific region 4830 can occur early, while 5 If the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls of the round game of the round is reduced (in the first case) and there are four balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, an event that the balls pass through the specific region 4830 is caused early. If the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 is three or less, the time passes through the specific area 4830. While no event occurs, the time efficiency for the number of paid-out prize balls in the fifth round game is increased (in the third case). Which case is applied varies depending on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

  That is, the profit obtained by the player can be changed depending on the timing of operating the operation button 300, so that attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved and participation in the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved. Can increase motivation.

  FIG. 99 (a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the twentieth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 99A is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot K, M, or k (see FIG. 94B).

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a), in the twentieth operation pattern, the sixth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 5 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  According to this operation pattern, in the sixth round game R, the maximum number of balls that have entered the first specific prize opening 1000a (the number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example)) is the upper limit. One can be easily generated. Details will be described below.

  The interval between rounds immediately before the sixth round game R is set as the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds. That is, the sixth round game R starts with zero balls stored in the storage channel 1231.

  Immediately after the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, but immediately returns to the retracted state (see FIG. 95 (a)). Therefore, the ball that first entered the first specific winning opening 1000a from the start of the round game R of the sixth round before the passage of 1.0 second is not restricted by the interference member 6930 to flow down. It takes 0.0 second to reach the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600, the position in contact with the regulating member 1600).

  The first ball entered is discharged when the first specific winning port 1000a is closed (the outlet 1150 (see FIG. 14) is opened) 3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the sixth round. . Here, since the period during which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed is 0.2 seconds, the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is limited to one upper limit.

  3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round game R, the discharge port 1150 starts to open, and at the same time, the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state. Therefore, thereafter, the sphere arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

  The internal shape of the storage channel 1231 is formed so that a maximum of two spheres can be stored on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 and a maximum of seven spheres can be stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 when the interference member 6930 is extended (see FIG. 86 (b)).

  After 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the ball that enters the storage channel 1231 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930 and therefore stays upstream of the interference member 6930. It will be.

  On the other hand, as described above, when one sphere arranged at the lowermost end is discharged from the storage channel 1231, as a result, the sphere arranged downstream of the interference member 6930 is inside the storage channel 1231. 1 or less. Therefore, the maximum number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is eight. Since the total number of the spheres discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is nine and is less than the prescribed number (10 in this control example), the prescribed number of spheres is maintained while the interference member 6930 maintains the protruding state. Cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a and the round game R of the sixth round cannot be terminated.

  During this time, the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 86 (b)), so that the player can continue right-handing according to the display on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 92 (b)). A plurality of spheres can be aligned on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 (so-called “grape” can be generated).

  When the interference member 6930 changes from the overhanging state to the retracted state, it flows down along the inclination of the opening / closing plate 1300 so as to follow later that the ball whose flow is restricted inside the storage channel 1231 flows down. (Runs down like an avalanche). As the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) enter the first specific prize opening 1000a due to the flow of the balls, the opening / closing plate 1300 starts to move toward the closed state, but corresponds to the number of discharged balls. Thus, since the gap for one sphere is generated in the storage channel 1231, the momentum of the sphere inflow into the storage channel 1231 is maintained even after the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that an event occurs in which the ball on the momentum enters the first specific winning opening 1000a before the opening / closing plate 1300 closes the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the upper limit of one is exceeded. Wins can be generated.

  If the ball is not arranged at the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 at the timing when 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the downstream of the interference member 6930 even after the passage of 3.0 seconds. The number of spheres placed on the does not change. Therefore, in this case, the number of spheres remaining on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 is 0 to 2. In addition, since the discharge of the sphere from the storage flow path 1231 does not occur, the above-described gap is not generated in the storage flow path 1231, and the effect of causing an excessive prize cannot be achieved. The

  FIG. 99 (b) is a diagram showing changes in the time of the first specific prize opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area 4830 in the twenty-first operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 99 (b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot L or N (see FIG. 94 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 99 (b), in the twenty-first operation pattern, the sixth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 6 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

  According to this operation pattern, in the sixth round game R, an excessive number of balls (the number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example) entering the first specific prize opening 1000a) is generated. Can be difficult. Details will be described below.

  The interval between rounds immediately before the sixth round game R is set as the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds. That is, the sixth round game R starts with zero balls stored in the storage channel 1231.

  Immediately after the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the interference member 6930 is kept in the overhanging state for 2.6 seconds (see FIG. 95 (a)). Therefore, the ball that first entered the first specific winning opening 1000a before the passage of 1.0 second from the start of the round game R of the sixth round is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

  When the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, the sphere whose flow has been restricted resumes flowing, but for 0.2 seconds (2.0 seconds that is the time required for the flow of the storage flow path 1231/10 pieces that can be stored) ), The sphere will only flow down the length of one sphere. For this reason, the sphere that has resumed flowing down is the bottom end of the storage channel 1231 (on the front side of the regulating member 1600, before the opening / closing plate 1300 starts to move to the closed state (the discharge port 1150 (see FIG. 14) starts to open)). It is not possible to reach the position where the regulating member 1600 abuts. Therefore, in this operation pattern, the discharge of the ball from the storage flow path 1231 does not occur at the timing when 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the sixth round game R.

  3.0 seconds after the start of round game R of the sixth round, at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts to open, the interference member 6930 changes to the extended state again, but immediately returns to the retracted state. Therefore, thereafter, the spheres arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 are not restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, and the spheres are stored in order in the storage flow path 1231.

  As the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a (at a timing earlier than the 20th operation pattern), the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. To change. At this time, the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is 10, and the storage flow path 1231 is full, so that further spheres are prevented from entering. Therefore, according to this operation pattern, as in the first operation pattern (see FIG. 23A), the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is the specified number (in this control example, 10). ) And no extra prizes can be generated.

  Therefore, even if a ball is arranged on the upstream side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at the end of the sixth round of jackpot game R, the ball does not lead to the player's profit. Therefore, in the round game R of the sixth round in the jackpot game where the jackpot type is the jackpot L or N, the third symbol display device 81 has a display that does not strongly encourage the continuation of the ball launch (see FIG. 92 (a)). Executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a changes from the closed state to the open state on the basis of the start of the round game R of the sixth round, and the interference member It is difficult to occur when excessive winning is likely to occur in the round game R of the sixth round (see FIG. 99 (a)) while performing control that makes the timing at which the 6930 changes from the retracted state to the overhanging state common. A case (see FIG. 99 (b)).

  This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the round game R in the sixth round of the current jackpot game is controlled by the 20th operation pattern or the 21st operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game mode in which a ball suitable for the operation pattern is fired while predicting the operation pattern. This can prevent the player from digesting the jackpot game casually.

  As described above, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are driven and controlled in the twentieth operation pattern, after the first specific winning opening 1000a is short-opened (open for 0.2 seconds), Two spheres do not remain downstream of the interference member 6930. On the other hand, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are driven and controlled in the twenty-first pattern, the interference member 6930 is opened after the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened short (opened for 0.2 seconds). Two spheres may remain in the downstream.

  Therefore, by checking how many balls remain downstream of the interference member 6930, whether the round game R of the sixth round is controlled by the 20th operation pattern or the 21st operation pattern is controlled. Therefore, the interference member 6930 is placed in a retracted state after a predetermined period (for example, 23.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the sixth round). (Up to 0.0 seconds before) may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 101, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, hour and minute counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, output flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p A closing flag 203q, a count start flag 203qa, a closing counter 203r, a V flag 203s, a V winning valid counter 203t, a notification counter 203u, a winning number counter 203w, a discharged number counter 203x, and other memory areas 203z. It is.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter. Each value of C1, first hit type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holds). Among the vacant areas of the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning at the second entrance 640 is stored. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 2), and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  If the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (the third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. One is added (see S404 in FIG. 111). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 108).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (S211 in FIG. 108, S405 in FIG. 111). reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see FIG. 102 (b)) of the voice lamp control device 113 is reduced. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of balls held in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command. .

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and notifies the display control device 114 (see FIG. 93) of the number of held balls each time the number of held balls changes. A display hold ball number command is transmitted. The display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the retained ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times.

  This special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero. Each time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is reached. One is added (see S410 in FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 108). Similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 114).

  On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114).

  On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 of FIG. 114: No). ).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state of the special symbol. In other words, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is a natural number, the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the probability variation state of the special symbol is set. In the present control example, the probability variation state of the special symbol is accompanied by the short time state of the normal symbol, so the numerical value of the probability variation counter 203g corresponds to the remaining short time period (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates).

  The probability variation counter 203g is set to 80 at the end of the jackpot game when the ball passes the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) in the jackpot game (see S1235 in FIG. 121). In other words, in this control example, the number of changes in the special symbol in the probability variation state after the big hit game is limited to 80 times.

  In addition, the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 when the special symbol lottery is selected and the start of the jackpot is set (see S219 in FIG. 108). In the initialized state (i.e., when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed), the probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0, and a normal power interruption occurs. In such a case, the state immediately before the power interruption occurs is backed up.

  The short / medium time counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining short time period (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the short time state (short time state) of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203h is set to 100 at the end of the big hit game when the ball does not pass the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) during the big hit game (see S1237 in FIG. 121). In other words, in this control example, when the probability variation state is not set after the big hit game, the time reduction state of 100 times is given.

  In this control example, the case where the short time state is given regardless of the jackpot type has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, all or one of the jackpot types (“jackpot K”, “jackpot L”, and “jackpot k”) that allows the ball to flow to the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) by executing the game in an appropriate game mode. In the part, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 during the big hit game, it may be controlled not to give the time reduction state.

  In this case, the game was not executed in an appropriate game mode (for example, the ball was not fired or the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) was not operated without following the notification on the display device). ) Is excessively large (does not shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol that was supposed to be transferred, and is not given a short-time state), so that the willingness to execute the game in an appropriate game mode can be improved. it can.

  The operation scenario storage area 203i is provided when the operation control (see S1004 in FIG. 117) of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 53) is started (see FIG. 95 (b)). This is the area where the operation scenario is read and stored. Based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is performed.

  The operation counter 203j is a counter for determining the timing at which the interference member 6930 is movably controlled in the storage valve operation processing (see S1412 in FIG. 128). Various upper limit values are set in the operation counter 203j in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125).

  The protruding flag 203k is a flag for determining that the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. If the interference flag 6930 is on, it indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the extended state (see FIG. 53B). If it is OFF, it indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 53A).

  In the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125), the output flag 203k is determined to be the operation start timing when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is detected during the effective period (S1403: Yes in FIG. 19). When it is performed (S1408: Yes in FIG. 125), the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128) is executed by being set to ON, and the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128). ) Is set to OFF (see S1445 in FIG. 128).

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag that is set to ON in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (see S1282 in FIG. 123), and is used to start the counting of the remaining ball timer 203n described later.

  The remaining ball timer 203n is a timer that is counted to identify a normal range in the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 118). Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (value corresponding to 1 second), the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 (specific area detection sensor) If the number of spheres detected by 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the total number of spheres detected by the non-specific region detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) do not match, the difference between these numbers is It is added to the remaining ball counter 203p.

  The remaining ball counter 203p is a counter for detecting the difference between the number of balls entered detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 across each round. If it is determined that the notification of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0 in the ending process (S1110 in FIG. 121) (S1231: No in FIG. 121), an error command is set.

  The closing flag 203q is a flag for determining the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, and is a flag that is set to ON in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (see FIG. 123). S1278), and is used to start counting of a closing counter 203r described later. Then, the closing flag 203q is set to OFF in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129) when the closing counter 203r becomes equal to or larger than a predetermined value.

  The count start flag 203qa is set to ON in the fifth round game R based on the fact that the close flag 203q is set to ON, and is used to start counting of the close counter 203r. The count start flag 203qa is based on the closing counter 203r having reached the upper limit (in this control example, a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds) in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). It is set to off (see S1510 in FIG. 129).

  The closing counter 203r starts counting when the closing flag 203q is turned on, and mainly determines that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 at a normal timing in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). It is a counter for doing. The closing counter 203r is incremented by one each time the V winning process is executed.

  In the present control example, the predetermined value of the closing counter 203r is set as an interval period after the round game R according to various timings. The closing counter 203r is used for determining abnormality in the V winning timing in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

  The V flag 203s indicates that the ball is in a specific area 4830 (FIG. 51) at a predetermined timing (a predetermined period after the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is closed in the set value in this control example). This flag is set to ON when it is detected that the reference has passed. The V flag 203s is set to OFF after the value of the probability variation counter is set to 80 in the ending process (see S1110 in FIG. 121) (see S1236 in FIG. 121).

  The V winning valid counter 203t is a counter that is subtracted by the same number as the closing counter 203r in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). The V winning valid counter 203t is used to determine that the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 has normally passed through the specific region 4830 in a state where the distribution operation member 4851 is disposed at the open position. In the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 123), a numerical value (a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in this control example) is set as the closing flag 203q is turned on.

  The notification counter 203u is a counter that counts the time until the notification command (see S1257 in FIG. 122) is set based on a predetermined timing (see S1253 in FIG. 122) in the notification process (see S1111 in FIG. 122). .

  The winning number counter 203w is a counter that counts the number of balls won in the first specific winning port 1000a (see FIG. 7) in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123).

  The discharge number counter 203x is a counter that counts the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150. The relationship between the numbers of the winning number counter 203w and the discharging number counter 203x is determined every time the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit value in the abnormality process (see S1113 in FIG. 124).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning port 1000a ( A solenoid 209 including a solenoid 1510) and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and a solenoid 6910 for driving the interference member 6930 are connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasure switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and a game during operation presentation. The MPU 201 is connected to various switches 208, signals output from the operation buttons 300, and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253. Various processes.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 115) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 102A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. ) Is used to determine more detailed variation content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  The opening / closing plate / interference member operation scenario 222b is provided for the purpose of grasping the operation state of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 controlled by the main control device 110 also on the sound lamp control device 113 side. The opening / closing plate / interference member operation scenario storage area 202e and the information stored in the opening / closing plate / interference member operation scenario table 202f are stored in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a variation start flag 223e, and a stop type selection. A flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a round number accumulation counter 223h, a probability variation state flag 223i, a time-short state counter 223j, a storage state flag 223k, a storage upper limit flag 223m, a storage counter 223n, an operation flag 223p, An effect temporary storage area 223r, a first operation effect flag 223wa, a second operation effect flag 223wb, a first input flag 223wc, a second input flag 223wd, an effect executing flag 223x, and a pressing period information storage area 223y And other memory area 223z There has been provided with at least.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 132) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are fluctuating effects (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times for each special symbol type, the number of suspended balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the variable number of reserved balls based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c corresponds to the second special symbol (223). This corresponds to the number of reserved balls in the variable effect based on the lottery of special symbol 2).

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. The number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls for variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110, a special symbol The number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e when the variable display in FIG. The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S2210 in FIG. 132). Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are updated in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display controller 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display controller 114. Send.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, the second special symbol. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of retained balls corresponding to the value of the retained ball number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. However, the value is changed. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110. Can be changed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d increases or decreases the value according to the content of the received command when a command set when the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110 increases or decreases is received. This counter is used to synchronize the number of reserved balls of ordinary symbols managed on the main controller 110 side with the number of retained balls of ordinary symbols managed on the sound lamp controller 113 side. is there. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when displaying the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, about the detailed content in the case of displaying the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the case where the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the reserved ball number of the special symbol mentioned above Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

  The variation start flag 223e is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 136). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S2707 in FIG. 136). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process (see FIG. 131) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. . The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown). When determining the effect pattern with reference to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, different counter values are used. Used. Thereby, when setting one production | presentation pattern, since the same counter value is no longer used in multiple places, the bias of the production | presentation pattern set can be suppressed. In addition, you may comprise so that an effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing a different process with respect to the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the production patterns, one selection refers to the first digit of the acquired value, another selection refers to the tenth digit of the acquired value, and another selection refers to one of the acquired values. You may make it refer to the 1st place of the obtained value by multiplying the value which made the place of 3 times and the value which made the place of the tens place 5 times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the bias of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

  The round number accumulation counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds in the jackpot game, and when a round number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, it is updated to a value corresponding to the command ( 133 (S2504 in FIG. 133), the counter value is reset to 0 by receiving the jackpot ending command (S2510 in FIG. 133). In the sound lamp control device 113, display commands relating to the display during the jackpot game are set based on the round number cumulative counter 223h (see S2537, S2546, and S2547 in FIG. 134).

  The probability variation state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a certain symbol certain variation state. If the probability variation state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if it is off, it indicates that the probability state of the special symbol is low. The probability variation state flag 223i is updated in accordance with the notification contents of the state command output from the main controller 110.

  In this control example, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more in this control example, the status command is set to indicate that the probability variation game is in progress, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the time-shortage counter 203h is If it is equal to or greater than 1, it is assumed that the time-short game is in progress, and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 and the value of the time-shortage counter 203h is 0 (see S234 or S238 in FIG. 109). Is an aspect that indicates that the game is normally played.

  In accordance with the state of the probability variation state flag 223i, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether to display a right-handed navigation image displayed in the probability variation state of the special symbol, or whether to display a right-handed warning image when a right-handed game is executed in the normal state. To determine.

  The time-short state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time-short state of a normal symbol. At this time, if the short state counter 223j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time short state, and if it is off, it indicates that the normal symbol is in a normal state (low probability state). At this time, the short state counter 223j is updated according to the notification contents of the state command output from the main controller 110. At this time, according to the state of the short state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current state is the short state of the normal symbol, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image displayed in the short time state of the normal symbol, or whether or not to display a right-handed warning image in the normal state.

  The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 86A), and the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the sphere discharged from the discharge port 1150. The setting is made based on the detection result. If the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that a predetermined number or more of spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231. If the storage state flag 223k is off, less than the number of stored spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231. It shows that.

  The storage state flag 223k is turned on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (four in this control example). (See S2807 in FIG. 137), and when it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the predetermined number, it is set off (S2810 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, the intermediate number display is executed for the display during the round game, and when the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF, the shortage display (FIG. 88). (See (a)) is executed.

  The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 has reached the upper limit number (10 in the present control example), and the detection result of the detection sensor 1240. The setting based on the detection result of the sphere discharged from the discharge port 1150 is made. If the storage upper limit flag 223m is ON, it indicates that the upper limit number of spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231. If the storage upper limit flag 223m is OFF, it indicates that the upper limit number of spheres are not stored in the storage flow path 1231. Show.

  This storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is the upper limit number (see S2814 in FIG. 137). When it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than the upper limit number, it is set to off (S2817 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON, a full tank display (see FIG. 92B) is executed, and when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to OFF, a dissatisfaction display (FIG. 92 (a)) is executed.

  The storage counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231. In other words, when the passage of the sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the value of the storage counter 223n is incremented by 1, and the discharge of the sphere from the discharge port 1150 is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (or the dedicated area). 1 is subtracted from the value of the storage counter 223n.

  The operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the operation button 300 has been operated. If the operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the operation button 300 has been operated, and if it is off, it indicates that the operation button 300 has not been operated. This operation flag 223p is set to ON when an operation command is received in the command determination process (S2218: Yes in FIG. 132), and is set to OFF in the button input monitoring / effect process (see S3007 in FIG. 139). .

  The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the set effect contents until the effect is executed. For example, the effect aspect of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot is provided. During the period from the set timing (third round) to the timing (fourth round) at which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the big hit, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) are temporarily stored. This effect temporary storage area 223r stores the set effect mode, and in the case of the big hit effect processing (see S2505 in FIG. 134), a round (four rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is executed. Are read out (S2537 in FIG. 134).

  The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are flags for determining whether to execute a timing effect (operation effect) for executing an effect that causes the player to operate the operation means (operation button 300). If it is ON, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and if OFF, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied.

  In this control example, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the fact that the round game R of the fourth round is started with respect to the first operation effect flag 223wa is indicated in the second operation effect flag 223wb. On the other hand, it is set that the round game R of the four rounds of the jackpot game of the jackpot type k has been started. The effect information read from the effect temporary storage area changes depending on the setting status of the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb.

  The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to off after the effect execution flag 223x is set to on (see S2539 in FIG. 134).

  Each of the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd is a flag for limiting the number of operations of the operation button 300 during the corresponding performance (in this control example, it is limited to one). The first operation is executed during the period, or it is set to ON when the operation period is exceeded, and the input of the operation button 300 thereafter is invalidated. Also, the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are set to OFF after the fifth round game R is started and the effect execution flag 223x is set to OFF (see S2543 in FIG. 134). ).

  The effect execution flag 223x is a flag for determining whether the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. If it is ON, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. Indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. This effect execution flag 223x is referred to when determining whether the operation on the operation means (operation button 300) is an operation based on the timing effect (operation effect).

  This effect execution flag 223x starts a round in which a timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the jackpot effect processing (see S2505 in FIG. 134) (S2532: Yes in FIG. 134), and displays a display effect round command. After setting, it is set to ON (S2538 in FIG. 134). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) ends, it is set to off (S2542 in FIG. 134).

  The pressing period information storage area 223y is an area for storing the operation timing of the operation means (operation button 300) set so as to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). .

  In this pressing period information storage area 223y, a successful pressing period is set in correspondence with the set display pointer (effect pointer). The successful pressing period set here is referred to in the button input monitoring / production process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) to determine whether the timing when the operation button 300 is pressed is the successful pressing period.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the head address of the program corresponding to the initial setting process that is stored in the program storage area 233a and executed after the boot process by the boot program is set.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 106) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image for displaying a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is “special symbol jackpot”, “○” symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, “×” symbol is displayed after stopping the changing effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the entry to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the power-on variation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 so as to be displayed at 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If a ball is detected at the first ball slot 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can do.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. Further, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 88A) and the like are also stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols, which are numbered from “0” to “9” as the third symbol, are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a.

  As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the discontinuation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot (jackpot K etc. ), The stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on and the first specific winning opening 1000a that is normally closed is opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the player is informed of the end of the special game state (big win state).

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this control example, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 104) "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 105 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 105).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as with the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 105, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 105, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON. Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, Set to off.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected, and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. The simple command determination process and the simple display setting process are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing and display setting processing are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process. When the simple image display flag 233c is on, the simple image display flag 233c is stored in the resident video RAM 235. Since there is no resident target image data, a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. Normal image transfer setting processing for transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. In the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of one frame of image, the pointer Update processing is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 106), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 106, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this control example, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is performed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. Each time it is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235. If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set and the image controller 237 is set. The image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a.

  On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list.

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the process drawing process is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 107 to 129. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 319, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, respectively. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210). The reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S214 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is called. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot K, the jackpot L, the jackpot M, the jackpot N, or the jackpot k is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit K is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit L, the red LED is turned on. When the jackpot is M, N or k, the yellow LED is turned on, and when it is off, the green LED is turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, the operation scenario of the first specific winning opening is set (S217), and then the jackpot start is set (S218). . The operation scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a. In other words, 1 to 4 rounds, a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened, and in the 5th and 6th rounds, the jackpot type It shows that it sets so that the 1st specific winning opening 1000a may be open | released with the pattern (refer FIG.95 (b)) according to. When the process of S218 ends, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 (S219). Next, the value of the hour / middle counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out (S216: No), a state command setting process for determining whether or not the short-time state has ended is executed (S222), and the process proceeds to S221. Transition.

  In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, this process ends.

  Next, the state command setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S222). This state command setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107). This is a process for determining the gaming state based on the value of the counter and setting the state command (S234, S238).

  In this state command setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203g, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203h (S232). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S233: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233: Yes), a state command indicating the normal gaming state is set (S234), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S231: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (S235). When it is determined that the value of 203h is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S235: No), the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (S235: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S236). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S237). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S237: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S237: Yes), a state command indicating the normal gaming state is set (S238), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S302), and if it is 1 or more (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301, Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is obtained from the first hit random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random values defined in the first random number table 202a. As described above, four random numbers “1 to 4” are set as the special symbol jackpots, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In this embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share a common determination value. However, depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is selected. A different random value may be used. By comprising in this way, it is comprised so that the random number value determined to be off in the 1st special symbol may be determined to be a win in the 2nd special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same determination value is set for the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery, but the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery The number of judgment values that are big hits may be varied. By configuring in this way, the probability of jackpots can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can give you the expectation of jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, the value is 0) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol. Therefore, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired. (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of “0” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits this match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes). The display mode for jackpot time indicating the jackpot is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hits (big wins) of the five types of special symbols are compared. K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k) are determined as to the jackpot type.

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k). . Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jacket K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in the variation pattern selection table 20d.

  As the variation pattern defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “missing chance”, “disappear” Various types of “normal reach”, “outgoing super reach”, and “outside chance reach” are defined. In addition, as a variation pattern of various jackpot common use, “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared chance reach”, “shared special reach” are defined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is out of reach or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 117). Sent. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 107), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. When there is a start winning, various random number counters are acquired and a process for holding the value is executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. Each process of S407 to S412 is different in that the process of holding the holding ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are different from the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted. Moreover, when each process of S407-S412 is complete | finished, a prefetch process is performed (S413) and this process is complete | finished.

  Next, referring to FIG. 112, the prefetch process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this prefetch process (S413). This prefetch process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 111).

  In this look-ahead process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), and any of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is determined. If there is no new prize (S501: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the variation is a special symbol probability changing state. If it is determined (S502) and the probability of the special symbol is changed (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first per-random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the process of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state is not a special symbol probability changing state (S502: No), a lottery result is obtained based on the first per-random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Migrate to

  In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the jackpot determination results, are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and is accompanied by the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S608). If it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short-time state (S608: Yes), the second acquired in the processing of S607 Based on the value of the hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 94C).

  In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S608: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 Based on the second random number table for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-9”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 10-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 94 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol win (S611), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S611: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S613: Yes), the electric combination associated with the second entrance 640 is obtained. The release period of the object 640a is set to 1 second, and the number of releases is set to 2 (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S613, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state of the normal symbol (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of releases is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

  In the process of S611, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S617.

  In the process of S617, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S617). Is set to 1 second (S618), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S617: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this process is terminated. Thus, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 1 second” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S622). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S618 or the processing of S619 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623).

  In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S616, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S612 or S616.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win when the second symbol display device starts the variation display being executed. Determination is made (S624).

  If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S614 or the process of S615 are completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, it is first determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol is displayed. The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704).

  Then, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The first area is stored (S705), and the process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the same manner by the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 93), and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S910 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S910.

  As will be described later in the processing of S1017 in FIG. 117, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. Main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S911, S912) of RAM 203 after sending out the payout initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). When the process of S912 is completed, the process proceeds to S913.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S913, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state when the power is restored is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S913). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a probable change state, whether or not the normal symbol is in a short-time state, and whether or not the normal symbol is in a short-time state.

  A status command is generated according to the value of the hour / middle counter 203h and the value of the probability variation counter 203g and is output to the sound lamp control device 113. By outputting this status command, the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can match the recognition of the gaming state. Therefore, although the normal symbol is in the low probability state, right-handed navigation (for example, see the small area Ds3 in FIG. 88 (a)) is displayed, or conversely, the normal symbol is in the high probability state. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a right-handed warning image (not shown) from being displayed when the player makes a right-handed. That is, the gaming state can be matched with the effect to be executed.

  When the process of S913 ends, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S914). Next, an interrupt is permitted (S915), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001).

  Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 107) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the number of balls acquired is dealt to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command.

  Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) or the start winning process (see FIG. 111) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning port 1000a of the one variable winning device 6000 is executed (S1004).

  In the jackpot control process, the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 1000a is set for each round of the jackpot state according to the operation scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108). In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 110), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) is completed, The variation display being executed is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 110). Display (lights up).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113) or the process of S619, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed.

  Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 113), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S612 or S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113) ( (Lights up).

  After executing the process of S1007, the storage control process is executed (S1008). Although this storage control process (S1008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, a process for setting the retraction and extension of the interference member 6930 is executed. Next, when the processing of S1008 is completed, a V winning process is executed (S1009). The V winning process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, when the processing of S1009 ends, other processing is executed (S1010).

  When the processing of S1010 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1012). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1012: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the main process this time (S1012: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1013, S1014).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (319 and 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1014).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1011, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power supply is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 115 has been executed, the power-off process after S1015 is executed.

  First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1015), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1016). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1017), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1011 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1010 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The process can be started from S1001.

  That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, various effects according to the jackpot are executed or the first specified This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening opening) 1000a or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 118, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) S218 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1103). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1103 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (S1105). FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 119, S1105), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is read from the set operation scenario (S1201).

  The operation of the distribution device 4850 (the distribution operation member 4851, the solenoid 4852) is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 of the first variable winning device 6000 is set by the data read in the process of S1201 (S1203). Thereafter, this process is terminated and the process returns to the jackpot control process. In the processing of S1202 and S1203, the operation of the sorting device 4850 (the sorting operation member 4851 and the solenoid 4852) and the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 are set for each round.

  In this way, each operation of the first variable prize winning device 6000 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle Such problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the processing of S1105 is completed, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After the round number command is set, this process ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the sorting device 4850 (S1107). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1107: Yes), an opening / closing process is executed (S1108).

  Here, the opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (S1108). FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening / closing process (S1108). In the opening / closing process (FIG. 120, S1108), first, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 or the sorting device 4850 that matches the operation timing based on the operation scenario is executed (S1211), and then the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004). This process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1107 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is the end of the 6th round, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, and the waiting time which is the ball throwing time (3.0 seconds or more from the design of the storage flow path 1231 and the probability variation determination unit 4800). It is required, and in this control example, when 3 seconds) elapses, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending process is executed (S1110). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 121, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 121, S1110), first, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1231). When it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0, a defect such as a ball clogging has occurred, or the player illegally stops the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 with a strong magnet or the like. Therefore, an error command is set (S1232), and then an ending command is set (S1233).

  The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects an error notification display mode based on the information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, an error command corresponding to the selected error notification display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the error command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts error notification.

  In this control example, characters such as “Discharge error. Please call the hall clerk” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and control is performed so as to notify the player that an abnormality has occurred.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93) such as the illumination units 29 to 33 (see FIG. 1) emits light strongly in red or the voice output device 226. (Refer to FIG. 4), the sound is controlled so that the hall clerk notices the occurrence of an abnormality by outputting a loud sound (in this control example, the sound of a black telephone bell).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0, an ending command is set (S1233). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S1233 is completed, it is then determined whether the V flag 203s is set to ON (that is, whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830) (S1234), and is set to ON (that is, the specific area 4830). (S1234: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 80, the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is set to 80, and then the V flag 203s is set to OFF. (S1236), the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1234, when it is determined that the V flag 203s is not set to ON (that is, the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830) (S1234: No), the value of the hour / short counter 203h is set. 100 is set (S1237), the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and this process ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the V flag 203s is on, and if it is on, a numerical value is set in the probability variation counter 203g. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable gaming state until the big hit game ends.

  Furthermore, if the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, the probability variation gaming state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 even during the jackpot game. Play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), a notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot game currently being executed is the jackpot k (S1251), and if it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot k (S1251: No). This process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot k (S1251: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u is greater than 0 (S1252). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1252: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253). The determination of the end timing of the fourth round is performed when it is detected that 10 balls have been won in the fourth round or when it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the notification counter 203u. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1253, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: No), this process ends. Here, when the 0.5 second counter is set in S1254, the notification counter 203u becomes 0 during 2 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball throwing time after the end of the fourth round, and the voice “press” is heard. Is output.

  Therefore, the sorting device 4850 operates in the fifth round, but the player must operate the operation button 300 during the interval time after the end of the fourth round, and attention is drawn to the operation button 300 and the liquid crystal. The number of spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made difficult to be visually recognized. Thereby, it can be suppressed that whether or not the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 is identified from the number of remaining spheres. Therefore, for example, at the start of the fifth round, it is difficult to determine whether or not a sphere has passed through the specific region 4830 by performing the above-described control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231. The player can play a game until the end of the jackpot game (and even after the end of the jackpot game), expecting that the probability variation gaming state will be given (provided).

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203u, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed across the fifth round from 1.5 seconds before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously from the eyes.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1252 that the value of the notification counter 203u is greater than 0 (S1252: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203u is updated by -1 (S1255). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256: Yes), a notification command is set (S1257). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the sound output setting of “press”.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 122, S1111) is executed, a winning process is executed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 123, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112), first, it is determined whether or not it is a round effective period (S1271). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in an open state to when it is changed to a closed state and the interval period ends. If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S1271: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1271: Yes), it is determined whether or not it has passed the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning a prize port 1000a. When it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a has passed (S1272: Yes), the winning number counter 203w is incremented by 1 and updated (S1273). Thereafter, the process of S1274 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sensor has not passed through the detection sensor 1240 (S1272: No), the process of S1274 is executed.

  In the process of S1274, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274: Yes), it is determined whether the closing flag 203q is on (S1277), and it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on. (S1277: Yes), this process is terminated and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1277 that the closing flag 203q is OFF (S1277: No), the closing flag 203q is set to ON (S1278), and then the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t ( In this control example, a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) seconds or more is set (S1279), and then the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a 1300 is closed (state change in the closed state) (S1280), and then a numerical value (a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in this control example) is set in the V winning valid counter 203t (S1281), The remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1282). When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown away since the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. Then, this process is terminated and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

  As described above, the lower limit of the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t varies based on the number of stored balls. As a result, when only three spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 (control is performed so that the spheres do not pass through the specific region 4830), the spheres flow down due to dirt or the like inside the storage channel 1231. Even if the ball passes through the specific area 4830 with a delay, the passage of the specific area 4830 can be invalidated outside the set value range of the V winning counter 203t.

  As a result, when a display effect that varies depending on the number of storage channels 1231 stored is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the expectation level indicated by the display effect (the amount of prize balls paid out or the end of the jackpot game) It is possible to prevent a deviation from occurring between the actual game result and the degree of possibility of shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol later.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1274, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) has elapsed (S1275). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1275: Yes), the processing from S1277 to S1282 is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1275: No), it is determined whether or not the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed halfway based on the operation scenario (S1276). Here, when it is determined that the timing is to close halfway (S1276: Yes), the processing from S1277 to S1282 is executed, and when it is determined that it is not the timing to close halfway (S1276: No), this processing is performed. The process ends, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1113). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality process (S1113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormality process (S1113). In the abnormal process (S1113), a process for monitoring whether the specific area 4830 is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormal process (FIG. 124, S1113), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1301). If it is outside the round valid period (S1301: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the outlet 1150 (S1302). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the outlet 1150 is determined by whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51). Done.

  If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203x is incremented by 1 and updated (S1303). Thereafter, the process of S1304 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the outlet 1150 (S1302: No), the process of S1304 is executed.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1304: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated (S1305) because it is during the ball throwing time period. The remaining ball timer 203n determines whether or not the upper limit value (various interval times in this control example) has elapsed (S1306). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1306: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is the upper limit (S1306: Yes), the number of discharged (the number of spheres detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51)). It is determined whether or not the total number of balls detected in step 1) matches the number of winning (value of winning number counter 203w) (S1307).

  If it is determined that they match (S1307: Yes), the process of S1309 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1307: No), the value obtained by subtracting the value of the number-of-discharges counter 203x from the value of the winning-number counter 203w is added to the remaining ball counter 203p (S1308), and the process of S1309 is executed. To do.

  In the processing of S1309, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1309). When it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1309: No), the processing of S1312 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1309: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310). When the value of the remaining sphere counter 203p is 0 (S1310: Yes), the process of S1312 is executed. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining ball counter is not 0 (S1310: No), an error command is set because an abnormality has occurred in the discharge of the ball (S1311), and the process of S1312 is executed.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the storage flow path 1231 or the probability variation determination unit 4800, and the game ball passes through the specific region 4830 even if the jackpot type to be acquired later is the jackpot M or N Can be suppressed.

  In this way, by controlling to notify the ball discharge error at the start timing of the ending effect, even if a difference occurs between the number of balls entered and the number of discharged balls in the round game R of each round, error notification is performed. The game can be executed without. Thereby, in the interval between rounds, the discharge | release of the ball | bowl from the storage flow path 1231 is partially controlled, and the game property of starting the next round in the state by which the ball | bowl was stored by the storage flow path 1231 is realizable. .

  Even if there is a difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged in the round game R of each round, the game can be executed without performing error notification. It is possible to set the period shorter than the period required for discharging the sphere stored in the flow path 1231 to the whole ball.

  Note that the method for setting the ball discharge error command is not limited to this. For example, from the jackpot type, a value that can be normally generated is set as the difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged, and if the number difference is within the range of values, an error command is not set and the number difference However, if the value is out of the range, the error command may be set to be set. In this case, since it is possible to determine that a ball discharge error has occurred without waiting for the start timing of the ending effect, it is possible to detect the occurrence of an abnormality early. Thereby, when the error of ball discharge | emission has arisen by the fraudulent act, early detection of a fraudulent act can be aimed at.

  In the process of S1312, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1312), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1313). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203w and the discharging number counter 203x are respectively reset to initial values (S1314), and then this process ends.

  Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the storage control process (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117) and is a process for setting the state of the interference member 6930.

  As described above, the state of the interference member 6930 changes depending on the situation when the player operates the operation button 300 (S1403 to S1407), and when the state changes at a preset timing ( S1408 to S1411), but the storage control process (S1008) includes both of them.

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is on (S1401). If it is determined that the output flag 203k is not on (that is, is off) (S1401: No), the interference member 6930 is turned on. It means that it is in the evacuation state. Next, it is determined whether it is a valid period of operation of the operation button 300 (S1402).

  If it is determined that the period is valid (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the operation button 300 (S1403). That is, it is determined whether or not a press detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S1403, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S1403: No), the interference member 6930 is kept in the retracted state as it is. Therefore, this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is detected) (S1403: Yes), the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 is executed (S1404). The operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404). In the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404), a process of setting an upper limit value that varies depending on the operation timing of the operation button 300 as the upper limit value of the operation counter is executed.

  That is, in the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404), the pressing (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected from the interval period between rounds after the interval period between rounds is started (that is, the pressing detection signal is generated). The value indicating the remaining period is set as the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1421), this process ends, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

  Next, a button operation command is set (S1405). Then, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the extended state, the output flag 203k is set to ON (S1406), and the interference member 6930 is in the extended state (the extended state based on the operation of the operation button 300, the extended state). In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that it is in the extended state 1), a storage state command corresponding to the extended state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1407), the present process is terminated, and storage control is performed. It returns to processing (S1008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is not valid (S1402: No), it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 based on the operation scenario (S1408). When it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: Yes), the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 is executed (S1409). Here, the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409). In the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409), a process of setting an upper limit value set in advance according to the operation scenario as the upper limit value of the operation counter is executed.

  That is, in the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409), it is first determined whether or not it is the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the extended state based on the operation scenario (S1431). When it is determined that it is not the timing for changing the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state (S1431: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state (S1431: Yes), an appropriate value (based on the operation scenario, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the overhanging state). Is set to the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1432), this process ends, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

  Next, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the out flag 203k is set to ON (S1410), and the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state (the overhanging state based on the operation scenario, the overhanging state). 2) In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the fact that it has become, 2) a storage state command corresponding to the overhanging state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1411), and this processing is terminated.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, an audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the overhanging state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back surface type corresponding to the overhanging state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command.

  That is, for example, it is set to a mode in which the characters “passing ball storage” is displayed in the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 87A). Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the interference member 6930 is in the storage state.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is on (S1401: Yes), a storage valve operation process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930 is executed (S1412). Here, the storage valve operation processing (S1412) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the storage valve operation processing (S1412). The storage valve operation process (S1412) is a process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930.

  In the storage valve operation process (S1412), first, the solenoid 6910 is set to ON (S1441), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1442). Although not shown in particular, if the solenoid 6910 is already on, the process of S1441 is skipped and the process of S1442 is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203j is an upper limit value (S1443).

  In the process of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443: Yes), the solenoid 6910 is set to OFF (S1444). Then, the output flag 203k is set to OFF (S1445), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1446), and this process ends. Also, in the process of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not the upper limit value (S1443: No), this process is terminated.

  When the processing of S1412 is completed, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is off (S1413). If it is determined that the output flag 203k is not off (that is, is on) (S1413: No), this processing ends. To do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is off (S1413: Yes), it means that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, so the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. In order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of this fact, a storage state command corresponding to the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1414), and this process ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, an audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the retracted state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear surface type corresponding to the retracted state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command.

  By executing this storage control process, the state of the interference member 6930 can be set according to the operation status of the operation button 300. Thereby, it is possible to switch between a state where the flow of the ball is restricted by the interference member 6930 at any timing of the player and a state where the restriction is released and the flow of the ball is allowed.

  In addition, by this storage control process, the interference member 6930 can be driven other than the operation timing of the operation button 300. Therefore, the member that operates in accordance with the operation state of the operation button 300 and the member that operates regardless of the operation of the operation button 300 can be formed of the same member.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129, the V winning process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the V winning process (S1009). This V winning process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and is a process for performing control to monitor the flow of the ball after the first specific winning port 1000a is closed. .

  In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501). When it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the closing flag 203q is on (S1502). If it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the currently executed operation is the fifth round (S1503). If it is determined that it is the fifth round (S1503: Yes), then the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S1504), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1502 that the closing flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), and in the processing of S1503, it is determined that the current execution is not the fifth round. If this is the case (S1503: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1501 that the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501: Yes), this means that it is near the timing at which the sorting operation member 4851 that opens and closes the specific area 4830 operates. In order to determine whether or not the passage of the sphere to the specific area 4830 has occurred normally, the closing counter 203r is incremented by 1 (S1505), and then the V winning valid counter 203t is similarly decremented by 1. Update.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the closing counter 203r is a predetermined value (that is, whether the period during which the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state has elapsed) (S1507). : Yes), the closing flag 203q is turned off and set (S1508), and then the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if it is not the predetermined value (S1507: No), the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the processing of S1509, it is determined whether or not the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (4.0 seconds). If the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (S1509: Yes), it means that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t has become 0, so the count start flag 203qa is set to OFF (S1510), The closing counter is reset to 0 (S1511), and the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, when the value of the closing counter 203r is not the upper limit value (S1509: No), the process proceeds to S1512 as it is.

  Thus, after the closing counter 203r reaches the upper limit (that is, after 4.0 seconds have elapsed since the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed), the count start flag 203qa is turned off. The process of S1512 is not executed. That is, the process of S1512 is executed only after 4.0 seconds have elapsed since the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed.

  In the processing of S1512, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (that is, whether the passage of the sphere has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860). If it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the specific region 4830 (S1512: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is within the set value range (S1513).

  In the process of S1513, if it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is within the set value range (S1513: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 normally. The V flag 203s is set to ON (S1514), and this process is terminated.

  The V winning valid counter 203t is set to a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and is subtracted therefrom. As described above, the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t is set as the timing at which the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 passes through the specific region 4830. In this control example, the set value is 3.0 seconds. Hereinafter, the numerical value range corresponds to (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) seconds or more.

  Therefore, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V winning effective counter 203 is greater than 3.0 seconds), it falls outside the set value range. In this case, it is suspected that the ball has stopped near the lower end of the communication path 4810 (clogged or stopped due to fraud to hold the ball) and that the ball started to flow immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 was closed. Control is performed to notify an error.

  Further, for example, when a ball passes the specific area 4830 after a long time has passed since the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V winning effective counter 203 is less than (3-0.2 × the number of stored balls) seconds), It is out of the set value range. In this case, there is a problem in the flow-down mode at the time of discharging the sphere from the storage channel 1231 (ball biting or stopping due to fraud to hold the sphere, etc.), and the discharge timing of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 (the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed). Since it is suspected that the ball started to be ejected with a delay from the timing when the state is reached, control is performed so as to notify an error just in case.

  It should be noted that fraud to stop the ball is assumed to be a fraud in which the ball is held with a strong magnet, or a ball to which a ball is bonded is launched into the game area and the player operates the ball to manipulate the ball. . In the pachinko machine 10, a magnetic sensor (not shown) is arranged near the storage channel 1231, or the storage channel 1231 and the probability variation determination unit 4800 are not subjected to magnetic force against fraud by a magnet. Correspondingly, the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is disposed behind the glass unit 16 or the glass unit 16 is thickened.

  In addition, in order to prevent fraud due to a ball having a thread bonded thereto, when the thread is fed to the communication path 4810 through the storage flow path 1231, the opening prevention unit 1331 is closed when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. And the side wall of the container 1230 that holds the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 7), the thread is fixed, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state. The yarn is fixed between the outlets 1150. Therefore, even if the player operates the thread, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the ball in the communication path 4810. For example, the thread held by the player is released at an arbitrary timing. Even if the ball is illegally targeted to pass through the specific region 4830, the thread is fixed in some places as described above, and therefore, it is easy to prevent the ball from passing through the specific region 4830 illegally. Can do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is not within the set value range (S1513: No), an error command is set because some fraud or a problem with the pachinko machine 10 is suspected. (S1515), and this process is terminated. In this case, the V flag 203s is not turned on.

  In this control example, a case has been described in which occurrence of fraud or malfunction is determined by setting the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t based on the storage number of the storage flow path 1231. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Not. For example, the occurrence of fraud or trouble may be determined by detecting the discharge interval of the spheres from the storage channel 1231, or the occurrence of fraud or trouble may be detected by detecting a period during which a predetermined number of balls are discharged. The determination may be made, and when the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than the required number (less than 4), the occurrence of fraud or malfunction occurs based on the detection of the passage of the sphere in the specific region 4830. May be determined.

  In the V winning process (S1009) in this control example, the case where the V flag 203s is set to ON only when it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is within the set value has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, even if it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is not within the set value, the V flag 203s is set to ON so that the game is impossible until the error due to the error command is resolved. You may control. The cancellation of the error command is executed when the power is turned off, but the invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 203 may need to be cleared.

  In this case, if the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is shifted due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 instead of the player's fraud, after the player has detected it, the player is in a high probability state with a special symbol without any problem. A game can be executed.

  On the other hand, if it is caused by a player's fraud, after it has been detected, the player who has performed the fraud stops the game, and the hall clerk clears the RAM 203 to bring the special symbol into a low probability state. Forced control to be Thereby, it is possible to prevent an extra waiting time before another customer starts a game in the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraud is performed.

  In the present control example, while the error command is set in S1515, for example, control is performed so that the ball cannot be fired, or when the ball is fired, an error is notified and the store clerk is made aware. Control such that the awarded ball is not paid out even if the launched ball enters the winning opening (for example, the function of the payout control device 111 is stopped), the launch of the ball or the winning The game is controlled so as not to be playable by a control mode such as turning off the power based on the entrance to the mouth.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 140. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-off processing in S2120 is performed by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 131). ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 131, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 131), it executes a power-off process in S2117. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2117 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process at S2120 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2120, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S2120, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2117 is executed (see S2116 in FIG. 131). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2117 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S2008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S2004 to S2006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probability variation state flag 223i is updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main controller 110 (S2011), interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. By updating the probability variation state flag 223i based on the state command, the gaming state recognized by the main control device 110 and the gaming state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the gaming state.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S2009 is that when the process from S2004 to S2006 is reached via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes in S2102 to S2110. In S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S2102 to S2110 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111, the fluctuation display setting process of S2112, and the storage state monitoring process of S2113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay. Further, by executing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, the settings regarding the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m can be performed without delay based on the storage state.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2101 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104).

  In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 so that it may alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the first special symbol number-of-balls counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). This button input monitoring / production process monitors an input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and the production corresponding to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. It is processing to set to perform. In this process, when an operation by the player on the operation button 300 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the operation button 300 is set for the display control device 114.

  When the button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S2110 ends, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S2111). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2112. In the process of S2112, a variable display setting process is executed (S2112). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2113. In the process of S2113, a storage state monitoring process is executed (S2113). In the storage state monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the storage state monitoring process is finished, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2116), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2118), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination processing (S2111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Process.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 132, S2113), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is obtained. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2201). The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected from the main controller 110 is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is output corresponding to each of the symbols.

  If it is determined in step S2201 that a variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S2203), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here can be identified in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol) as a special symbol variation pattern type. When stored in the format and in the later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 136), the display control device 114 is notified of the start of the special symbol variable display effect and the display mode of the special symbol variable display effect. This is used in the case of setting a special symbol display variation pattern command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). If it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) has been received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the received command type is set to ON. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special type The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to ON.

  Next, from the received stop type command, the stop type (completely out of reach, out of reach, small hit, big hit K, L, M, N, or k) is extracted (S2206), and this process ends. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Then, it is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 136) is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of a variation effect stop type.

  If it is determined in step S2204 that a stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2207). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), a display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this process ends.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a reserve ball number command is received from the main controller 110 (S2209). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding value provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is matched with the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S2210), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), so the starting win is received. Each time there is a value, the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the special symbol 1 reservation of the main control device 110 by the process of S2210. It can be adjusted to the values of the ball counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e.

  Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 becomes the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Or, even if it deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is received. Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  In the processing of S2209, if it is determined that a pending ball number command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2212). If it is determined in the process of S2212 that a prize information command has been received (S2212: Yes), a prize information command reception process is executed (S2213).

  In this winning information command reception process (S2213), various flags to be referred to and various counters to be set for setting various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are set. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the special symbol on hold, the change of the special symbol on hold is started before the change of the special symbol on hold is started (that is, the special symbol being executed before the change of the target special symbol). During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol for which the winning information command has been transmitted. Suggestion notification can be made, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that a winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether a notification command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2214). If it is determined that a notification command has been received (S2214: Yes), a display notification command is set (S2215), and this processing is terminated.

  If it is determined that the notification command has not been received in the process of S2214 (S2214: No), it corresponds to a storage device-related command (a storage state command corresponding to the retracted state (S1414, see FIG. 125)) or an overhanging state. Whether or not a storage state command (S1407, see FIG. 125) has been received is determined (S2216) In S2216, if it is determined that a storage device related command has been received (S2216: Yes), the corresponding rear image for display is changed. A command is set (S2217), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2216, when it is determined that the storage device related command has not been received (S2216: No), it is then determined whether an operation command has been received (S2218). If it is determined in step S2218 that an operation command has been received (the operation button 300 has been operated (depressed)) (S2218: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to on (S2219), and the process ends. To do. This operation command is a command that is output when the operation button 300 is operated. On the other hand, if it is determined that no operation command has been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (S2220).

  In the process of S2220, when it is determined that a hit related command has been received (S2220: Yes), the hit related process is executed (S2221), and this process ends. The detailed contents of the hit-related processing (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2220 that a hit-related command has not been received (S2220: No), processing according to another command is executed (S2222), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S2222, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114. For example, a command for entering a ball is set based on whether a ball has entered each entrance provided in the game board 13. Is received, the process of accumulating the number of entered balls is executed for each type of entrance into which the ball entered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the hit related process (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S2221). This hit-related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2111 in FIG. 132) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This process is executed when a hit-related command is received from the device 110.

  When the hit-related process (S2221) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot opening command has been received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then a display opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2501 that an opening command has not been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2503). If it is determined in step S2503 that a round number command has been received (S2503: Yes), the round number cumulative counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the big hit / medium effect process is executed ( S2505), the process is terminated.

  The jackpot effect process (S2505) is a process for selecting the aspect of the round effect (the effect of the round game R and the effect of the interval between rounds), and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2503 that the hit-related command received this time is not a round number command (S2503: No), it is next determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from the main controller 110 when each round of jackpot is completed. If it is determined in step S2506 that an interval command has been received (S2506: Yes), the number of rounds completed is calculated based on the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the corresponding display interval command is set ( S2507), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2506 that no interval command has been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether a jackpot ending command has been received (S2508). If the jackpot ending command is received in the processing of S2508 (S2508: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2509), the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is cleared (S2510), and this processing is terminated. If it is determined in S2508 that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2508: No), this process is terminated.

  Here, the jackpot production process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the big hit effect processing (S2505). In the jackpot effect processing (S2505), in addition to the jackpot game effect for congratulating the jackpot as an effect executed during the jackpot, the inside of the storage channel 1231 is visually recognized by causing the player to operate the operation button 300. A first operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) to be enabled and a second operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) to change the state of the interference member 6930 by causing the player to operate the operation button 300 After the number of balls entered, the continuous launch effect that prompts the continuation of the ball launch and the effect mode and presence / absence of the effect are set, and each effect is executed.

  When the jackpot effect processing (S2505) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is on (S2531). If it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is on (S2531: Yes), the process proceeds to S2540. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is not on (is off) (S2531: No), then whether the currently received round number command is the round number command indicating the third round of jackpot Is discriminated (S2532).

  If it is determined in the process of S2532 that the command is the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: Yes), the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON (S2533), and the process proceeds to S2534.

  In the processing of S2534, it is determined whether the jackpot type currently being executed is a jackpot k (S2534). If it is determined that the jackpot k is (S2534: Yes), the second operation effect flag 223wb is turned on. (S2535), and the process proceeds to S2536. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not k (S2534: No), the process proceeds to S2536.

  That is, if the jackpot is k, both the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to ON, but if the jackpot is other than the jackpot k (jackpot K, L, M, N) Only the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 135, the display effect round command setting process will be described (S2536). FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display effect round command setting process (S2536). In the display effect round command setting process (S2536), first, it is determined whether the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551). If the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551: Yes), As information that can be read from the temporary production storage area 223r, the first display mode is set (S2552), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot production process (S2505).

  In the first display mode, it is displayed as a display effect round command that there is an operation effect in the next round in the game R of the third round, and that there is an operation effect in the interval period after the end of the next round (FIG. 88 (a)), and the operation effect is set to be displayed in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the fourth round (see FIGS. 90 and 91).

  The display in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the third round and the display in the round game R in the fourth round are common regardless of the display mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second operation effect flag 223wb is not on (that is, it is off) (S2551: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type currently being executed is jackpot L or M (S2553). ), When it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot L or M (S2553: Yes), the second display mode is set as information that can be read from the temporary effect storage area 223r (S2554), and this process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the jackpot production process (S2505).

  In the second display mode, as the display effect round command, there is an operation effect in the next round in the round game R in the third round (see FIG. 88 (a)), and the number of stored balls in the round game in the fourth round Information is set to be displayed (see FIG. 88 (b)), and in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the fourth round, a moving image (or still image) without operation effects is displayed. Is done.

  Here, the information about the number of stored balls is prepared so that it can be displayed, and based on the operation button 300 being operated at the successful timing of the operation effect (for example, the timing when the display pointer 719 overlaps the bar display unit 717). Display is controlled.

  The display in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the third round and the display in the round game R in the fourth round are common regardless of the display mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2553 that the jackpot type is not jackpot L or M (that is, jackpot K, N, k) (S2553: No), the information can be read from the temporary effect storage area 223r. Then, the third display mode is set (S2555), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot medium effect process (S2505).

  In the third display mode, as the display effect round command, in the round game R in the third round, there is an operation effect in the next round, and characters that prompt the player to launch a ball toward the first specific winning opening 1000a are displayed. (Refer to FIG. 88). In the interval period after the end of the round game R in the fourth round, a moving image (or still image) with no operation effect is displayed.

  The display in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the third round and the display in the round game R in the fourth round are common regardless of the display mode.

  As described above, the display of the round game R in the third round and the round game R in the fourth round are collectively set as a display effect round command.

  Returning to FIG. After the processing of S2536, the effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and display effect round commands for display effects of the third round game R and the fourth round R are set (S2537). The effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S2538), the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to OFF (S2539), and this process ends.

  Although not shown in detail, the processing of S2539 is configured such that if the first operation effect flag 223wa or the second operation effect flag 223wb is already set to OFF, that process is skipped. doing. Thereby, unnecessary processing can be prevented from being executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2532 that the command is not the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: No), it is next determined whether or not the currently received round number command is the fourth round of jackpot ( S2540).

  In the process of S2540, when it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the fourth round (S2540: Yes), a display command indicating that the fourth round is reached is set. Since the display mode of the fourth round has already been selected as described above, this process is terminated in order to avoid selecting another display mode redundantly, and the process returns to the hit related process (S2221).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2540, when it is determined that the currently received round number command is not the fourth jackpot (S2540: No), the currently received round number command is the fifth jackpot. Is discriminated (S2541).

  If it is determined in the process of S2541 that the command is the number-of-rounds command indicating the fifth round (S2541: Yes), the effect execution flag 223x is set to off (S2542), and the first input flag 223wc and the second input are described later. The input flag 223wd is set to OFF (S2543), and the process proceeds to S2547. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2541 that the command is not the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: No), the process proceeds to S2544.

  In the processing of S2544, it is determined whether or not the round number command received this time is the sixth big hit (S2544). In the process of S2544, when it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (S2545).

  If it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (S2545: Yes), a continuous firing round command for display is set (S2546), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related process (S2221). .

  The continuous firing round command for display is set so that a display including a display (see the small area Ds3 in FIG. 92 (b)) prompting to continue without stopping the firing of the sphere as the display round command for display is set. . This display is executed only in the jackpot type (jackpot K, M or k, see FIG. 94 (b)) for which an excess winning can be expected in the round game R of the sixth round. Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of over winning by continuing to fire the ball according to the display.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2544 that the command is not the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: No), or in the processing of S2545, the jackpot type is not jackpot K, M or k (that is, jackpot L, (S2545: No), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2547), and this process ends.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the round number command for the first, second and fifth rounds and the sixth round when the big hit type is the big hit L or N is received, the display round number command is set by the processing of S2547. The On the other hand, when other round number commands are received, a display effect round command or a display continuous firing round command is set. In this way, by changing the display of the round game R according to the jackpot type and the number of rounds, the jackpot game can be advanced without getting the player bored.

  The various display round number commands and the like set here (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command) are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and are stored in the MPU 221. Is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131). Upon receiving various display round number commands or the like (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command), the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81. To do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the current round number is determined based on the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. For example, by including information indicating the current round number in the round number command, the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h may be eliminated.

  In addition, the display mode of the fourth round is selected when the round number command of the third round is acquired. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the round number command of the third round is acquired. The control equivalent to the control performed when the fourth round is performed may be repeatedly performed when the round number command of the fourth round is acquired. Also, for example, when the round number command for the third round is acquired, only the display mode is set, and when the round number command for the fourth round is acquired, the display mode is selected. May be.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, at the time of the round (3 rounds) before the round (4 rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed, A notice effect for notifying that the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is executed in the round (see FIG. 88A). Then, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 88B).

  Thus, since the notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, it is possible to make it known in advance that the effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 300 is executed. it can. Also, since the notice effect is executed only in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the notice effect is executed. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is configured to be executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used. For example, the storage channel 1231 When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, three) of spheres are stored, a timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in which the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 more actively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S2112). This variable display setting process (S2112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 136) is based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, a process of generating a display variation pattern command for the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (completely missed, missed reach, jackpot), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S2112 in FIG. 136), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2706. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the current special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Each process of S2702 to S2705 is executed.

  More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S2702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S2703), the display fluctuation pattern command is set (S2704), and then the corresponding 1 is subtracted from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c), and the winning information included in the command storage area is based on the subtracted value. The data in the storage area is shifted (S2705), and the process proceeds to S2706.

  In the process of S2706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2706: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2706 that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2707), and then a command determination process (FIG. 132). In the process of S2206 of (see), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2708), and the acquired stop type is set (S2709). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S2710), and this process ends.

  Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the storage state monitoring process (S2113). This storage state monitoring process (S2113) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and a sphere is stored in the storage flow path 1231 (see FIG. 51). This is a process for determining that the

  Here, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 51, a storage channel 1231 is provided as a part of a storage device that can store a ball on the game board 13, and can store a maximum of 10 balls. It is configured.

  A detection sensor 1240 is disposed at the upstream end of the storage channel 1231, and the detection sensor 1240 detects a ball entering the storage channel 1231. Further, the sphere discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

  In the storage state monitoring process (S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first specific prize opening 1000a (that is, whether the passage of the ball has been detected by the detection sensor 1240) (S2801). If the ball has passed 1000a (S2801: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the storage counter 223n (S2802), and the process proceeds to S2803. On the other hand, when the ball has not passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (S2801: No), the process proceeds to S2803.

  In the process of S2803, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the discharge port 1150 (that is, whether the passage of the sphere has been detected by the specific region detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific region detection sensor 4870) (S2803), and the discharge port 1150 is moved to the sphere. Is determined to have passed (S2803: Yes), the value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S2803: No), the process proceeds to S2805.

  In the process of S2805, it is determined whether or not the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805), and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is turned on. Is determined (S2806). If it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2806: No), the storage state flag 223k is set on (S2807), and a display intermediate number command is set (S2808). ), The process proceeds to S2812. On the other hand, in the process of S2806, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2806: Yes), the process proceeds to S2812.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 4 or more (that is, 3 or less) (S2805: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on ( S2809). When it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2809: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is set to off (S2810), a display shortage command is set (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2812. . On the other hand, in the process of S2809, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2809: No), the process proceeds to S2812.

  In the process of S2812, it is determined whether or not the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812), and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is on. Is discriminated (S2813). If it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2813: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on (S2814), and a display full command is set (S2815). ), This process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2813, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2813: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2812, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 10 (that is, 9 or less) (S2812: No), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816). ). If it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off (S2817), a display dissatisfaction command is set (S2818), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2816, when it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2816: No), this process is ended as it is.

  As described above, the settings of the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m are updated as needed based on the detection results of the detection sensor 1240, the specific region detection sensor 4860, and the non-specific region detection sensor 4870.

  As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2113) in the present embodiment, the storage state of the sphere in the storage flow path 1231 is determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m) are set. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an effect based on the storage state of the storage channel 1231.

  In the above description, the number of balls entered based on the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the number of balls based on the detection result of the specific area detection sensor 4860 and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 are stored in the storage channel 1231. However, this is not a limitation.

  For example, a sensor for detecting the presence or absence of a sphere is disposed at an arbitrary location in the storage flow path 1231, and the sphere is stored downstream thereof based on the passage of a predetermined period in a state where the sphere is detected by the sensor. It may be determined that As an example, when the sensor is disposed at a position where the third sphere from the downstream stops, the three spheres including the two spheres disposed on the downstream side by the sensor are stored in the storage channel 1231. Can be determined.

  In addition, even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, if the detection of the sphere by the sensor continues, it is possible to suspect that the sphere has been illegally stopped. Can be discovered early. That is, a sensor for detecting a sphere can be used for both detection of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and fraud detection.

  Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this lamp output processing (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command transmitted to the lamp display device 227. Process.

  Here, in this control example, as the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93), in addition to the above-described configuration, a decorative lamp 227a (described above) used for effects provided throughout the pachinko machine 10 is provided. And the covering front plate 1200 (see FIG. 5) provided so as to cover the storage channel 1231, and the interior of the covering front plate 1200. A transmissive lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) for providing a transmissive state that can be visually recognized by the player, and another lamp 227z are provided.

  When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the present time is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, a predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) that is timed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. If it is determined in S2901 that it is within 30 seconds (S2901: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2905.

  When a transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set, control is performed so that all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on (intensity).

  Here, in this control example, in the normal gaming state, the covering front plate 1200 is provided so that a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the internal state of the storage channel 1231 and the operation state of the interference member 6930 can be configured. Yes. As described above, the covering front plate 1200 is configured to change from the shielding state to the transmission state by irradiating predetermined light (light of the transmission lamp) from the back surface.

  The transmission lamp is lit regardless of the gaming state during a predetermined period (a predetermined period after the start-up process is executed) after turning on the power to the gaming machine. Thereby, immediately after turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, that is, at the timing when the store clerk inspects the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the storage channel 1231 covered by the covering front plate 1200 can be easily visually recognized. it can.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2901 that the current time is not within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (after the predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) ( Next, it is determined whether or not the detection sensor 1240 has detected the passage of a sphere (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the ball (S2902: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set so that the player can visually recognize the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 ( S2903) and the process proceeds to S2906.

  In this case, the transmission lamp lighting command indicates that the transmission lamp 227b has a sufficient time (for example, 2.0 seconds) for the sphere to pass through the area covered by the covering front plate 1200 in the storage channel 1231. Is set to be lit, while the transmissive state is maintained during the period when the sphere flows down the storage flow path 1231, the transmissive state is released after the sphere is stopped, This is not a limitation. For example, the transmissive lamp 227b is turned off (shielded from the transmissive state) on the condition that the sphere has passed through the discharge port 1150 or that the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 has detected the passage of the sphere. It may be configured to change the state). Thereby, the covering front plate 1200 can be maintained in a transmissive state over a period in which a sphere remains in the storage channel 1231.

  In the process of S2902, if the detection sensor 1240 has not detected the passage of a sphere (S2902: No), it is then determined whether a transmission lamp related command is set (S2904), and the transmission lamp related command is set. If it is determined (S2904: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command designated in advance is set (S2905), and the process proceeds to S2906. On the other hand, if the transmission lamp related command is not set (S2904: No), the process proceeds to S2906.

  The setting of the transmission lamp related command is mainly executed by a ball number confirmation process (S3004) described later with reference to FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the process of S2906, a decoration lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state) (S2906), and this process ends. Various decorative lamp lighting commands are set according to the variation pattern to be executed, the current gaming state, and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the button input monitoring / production process (S2107) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107). In this button input monitoring / production process (2107), an input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform a corresponding effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, setting of an operation button effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the operation button 300 has been operated and various flags based on the operation content are set. Settings are made.

  Specifically, first, in the round game R of the fourth round, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is a successful pressing period, Set a transparent lamp lighting command to execute the lamp lighting based on the discrimination result, or set a display command to display the ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect) (See FIG. 140). Secondly, in the interval period after the end of the round game R in the fourth round, the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is the pressing success period or the pressing success period. Or a press failure period, and a display command for displaying an effect (a great success effect, a success effect, and a failure effect) based on the result is set.

  When the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). If it is determined in the processing of S3001 that the effect execution flag 223x is on (S3001: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the jackpot type currently being jackpot is jackpot k (S3002). . In the process of S3002, if it is determined that the jackpot is k (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether it is an interval period (S3003). If it is an interval period (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that the jackpot is not k (that is, jackpot K, L, M, N) (S3002: No), or in the process of S3003, it is not in the interval (that is, round game) If it is determined that it is in the middle of R) (S3003: No), the number-of-balls confirmation process is executed (S3004), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 140, the number-of-balls confirmation process (S3004) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the ball number confirmation process (S3004). This ball number confirmation process (S3004) is a process executed in the button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. is there.

  This ball number confirmation process (S3004) monitors the input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, as described above, various flags are set based on the operation content, a transmission lamp lighting command for executing lamp lighting is set, A display command for displaying a ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, impossibility effect) associated therewith is set.

  When the ball number confirmation process (S3004) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101), and when it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101: Yes). Since the transmission lamp lighting command and the display ball number grasping-related command have already been set, this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the first input flag 223wc is not on (that is, is off) (S3101: No), it is then determined whether an operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is detected. (S3102). When the operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is detected (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether it is within the ball number grasping period (S3103).

  Here, the number-of-balls grasping period means a period in which the display pointer 719 at least partially matches the bar display unit 717 in the timing effect (operation effect) described above (see FIG. 88B). The length of the ball number grasping period can be adjusted according to the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the horizontal width of the bar display portion 717.

  In this control example, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 [cm], the operation speed is 20 [cm / s], and the width of the bar display unit 717 is 1 [cm]. In this case, the ball number grasping period is 0.2 [s] because it is the same as the time for the display pointer 719 to move 4 [cm].

  In the process of S3103, when it is determined that it is within the ball number period (S3103: Yes), a display ball number grasping success command is set (S3104), and a transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set (S3105). ), The process proceeds to S3111.

  Here, when the display ball number grasping success command is set, a display for prompting grasping of the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 (for example, a character display “watch the attacker!”) Is displayed in the third symbol display. This is executed in the device 81, and “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the button display mode 715 schematically showing the operation buttons 300 is changed to the pressed state (see FIG. 88B).

  The transmission lamp lighting command (strong / long) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on at least from the round game R of the fourth round to the round game R of the fifth round.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that it is not within the ball number period (that is, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed at a timing when the display pointer 719 and the bar display unit 717 are displaced (see FIG. 89)). (S3103: No), a display ball number grasp failure command is set (S3106), a transmission lamp lighting command (medium / long) is set (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3111.

  Here, when the display ball number grasp failure command is set, the display for prompting the grasp of the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is not displayed, “bad” is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation A button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 is changed to a pressed state (see FIG. 89).

  Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (medium / long) is set so that only the transmission lamp 227ba is turned on at least from the round game R of the fourth round to the round game R of the fifth round.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3102 that the operation of the operation button 300 has not been detected (S3102: No), the process proceeds to S3108. In the process of S3108, it is determined whether or not the limit time (in this control example, 3 seconds from the start of the round game R of the fourth round) has elapsed (S3108). If it is determined that the limit time has elapsed (S3108: Yes), a command for determining the number of balls for display is set (S3109), a transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S3108, when it is determined that the time limit has not elapsed (it is less than 3 seconds from the start of the round game R in the fourth round), this process ends, and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) Return to).

  Here, when the command for determining the number of balls for display is set, the display for prompting the user to know the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and the result display mode 720 (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 does not change (see FIG. 88 (a)).

  The transmission lamp lighting command (weak / short) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off in the subsequent round games R.

  As described above, in this control example, the player is obtained from the display on the third symbol display device 81 and the lighting state of the transmission lamp 227b when the operation button 300 is operated rather than when the operation button 300 is not operated. Controlled to increase profits. Further, when the operation button 300 is operated, the third symbol display device 81 is operated in the ball number grasping period (in this control example, 0.2 seconds) than in the other timing. Control is performed so that the profits that the player can obtain from the display and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b are increased.

  Therefore, the player's willingness to operate the operation button 300 during the round game R in the fourth round can be improved, and the player can concentrate on the operation. The operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is going to operate the operation button 300 can be collected on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S3111, the first input flag 223wc is set to ON (S3111). The first input flag 223wc is set to ON by operating the operation button 300 (or the limit time has elapsed), and while the first input flag 223wc is set to ON, the ball number confirmation process (S3004) is skipped. Therefore (S3101), in the ball number confirmation process (S3004), only the first operation (depressing) of the operation button 300 is validated.

  Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to carefully avoid the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is repeatedly hit and to carefully operate the operation button 300. In addition, by executing a display for prompting this (a warning display) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly operating the operation button 300. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the number of service life at an early stage, and to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

  When the process of S3111 ends, this process ends, and the process returns to the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107).

  Returning to FIG. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005). When it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005: Yes), since the display operation button related effect command has already been set, this process is ended as it is, and the button input monitoring / effect process (S2107). Return to.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3005, when it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is not on (that is, is off) (S3005: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S3006). The fact that the operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S1405 in FIG. 125, S2218 and S2219 in FIG. 132), an effect for changing the state of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state (see FIGS. 90 and 91). This means that the operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 has been executed (see S1403 in FIG. 125). In other words, the state change of the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state is executed.

  If it is determined that the operation flag 223p is on (S3006: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to off (S3007). From the value of the storage counter 223n at the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the round After subtracting the value obtained by dividing the interval interval elapsed time by 0.2, it is determined whether the number of remaining balls indicated by the value obtained by further subtracting 2 is 4 (S3008). The value calculated in S3008 corresponds to the number of spheres left in the storage channel 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930.

  Here, the value calculated in S3008 becomes 4 in the timing effect (operation effect) when the display pointer 719d is at a position where at least a part of the second pointer 716b coincides vertically. Control is performed so that the operation is performed (see FIG. 90B). Here, the period in which the display pointer 719d is at a position where at least a part of the second pointer 716b coincides with the second band 716b depends on the relationship between the size and operating speed of the display pointer 719 and the horizontal width of the second band 716b. The length can be adjusted.

  In this control example, as described above, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 [cm], and the width of the second band portion 716b is newly set to 4.2 [cm]. Since the time required for one sphere to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 0.2 seconds, the time required for the display pointer 719 to pass through the second belt portion 716b is 0.1 seconds. The operation speed of the display pointer 719 is 72 [cm / s]. With this setting, the display pointer 719 is controlled so that its left end reaches the right end of the second band portion 716b at a timing of 0.7 seconds from the start of the interval period (0.8 seconds). At the timing, the right end passes through the left end of the second band portion 716b). In this control example, by controlling in this way, the period during which the display pointer 719 matches the second belt portion 716b at least partially in the vertical direction can be limited to 0.1 second.

  In the process of S3008, if it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 4 (S3008: Yes), a display operation button great success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, when the display operation button great success effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the highest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 90 (b)).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3008 that the number of remaining spheres is not 4 (S3008: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining spheres is 5 or more (S3010). Here, the number of remaining balls becomes 5 or more in S3010 because, in the timing effect (operation effect), the operation of the operation button 300 is performed when all of the display pointers 719d are at positions that coincide vertically with the first belt portion 716a. Is controlled (see FIG. 91 (a)). That is, this corresponds to a case where the operation button 300 is operated before 0.7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period (when the operation is too early).

  In the process of S3010, if it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010: Yes), a display operation button success effect command is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, when the display operation button success effect command is set, the player can obtain a medium profit (that is, a profit that is neither the highest nor the lowest) as a result of the timing effect (operation effect). The display shown is executed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 91A).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3010 that the number of remaining spheres is not 5 or more (that is, the number of remaining spheres is 3 or less) (S3010: No), or the operation flag 223p is not set to ON. When the time limit (1.5 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S3012: Yes), a display operation button failure effect command is set (S3013), and the process proceeds to S3014.

  Here, the number of remaining balls is 3 or less in S3010 because, in the timing effect (operation effect), the operation of the operation button 300 is performed when all of the display pointers 719d are at positions that coincide vertically with the third belt portion 716c. Is controlled (see FIG. 91 (b)). That is, this corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated after 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period (when the operation is too late) or the operation button 300 is not operated.

  Here, when the display operation button failure effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the lowest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 91 (b)).

  As described above, in this control example, the player can obtain more profits by operating the operation button 300 than by not operating the operation button 300, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 also changes accordingly. To be controlled. Further, when operating the operation button 300, the operation is performed at a timing when the number of remaining spheres becomes 4 (from 0.7 seconds have elapsed since the start of the interval period until 0.8 seconds have elapsed). It is controlled so that the highest profit can be obtained, and if it is before that timing, it is moderate, and after that timing, the lowest profit can be obtained.

  Accordingly, the player can improve the willingness to operate the operation button 300 in the interval period immediately after the round game R of the fourth round, and can select the operation mode of the operation button 300.

  That is, when the player wants to obtain at least a moderate profit, the player can obtain a moderate profit without any danger by pressing the operation button 300 immediately after the start of the interval period (stablely In profit). On the other hand, if you want to get the highest profit, you can get the lowest profit without any moderate profit if the operation is delayed even a little. (Profit is unstable and fluctuates greatly).

  In this way, by changing the operation mode of the operation button 300, the player selects whether the player can stably obtain a medium profit or is unstable but can obtain the highest profit. be able to.

  Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation button 300. The operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is going to operate the operation button 300 can be collected on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S3014, the second input flag 223wd is set to ON (S3014). The second input flag 223wd is set to ON by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the limit time), and the button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) is performed while the second input flag 223wd is set to ON. Since it is skipped (S3005), only the first operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is validated in the button input monitoring / production process (S2107).

  Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to carefully avoid the operation mode in which the operation button 300 is repeatedly hit and to carefully operate the operation button 300. In addition, by executing a display for prompting this (a warning display) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly operating the operation button 300. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the number of service life at an early stage, and to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

  According to this control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The visibility inside the storage channel 1231 is changed according to the lighting mode of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be. Thereby, the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and the ease of grasping the operation mode of the interference device 6900 can be changed.

  In order to maintain high visibility inside the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to take a gaze off the storage channel 1231, pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), and participate in the timing effect (operation effect). It was configured to Thereby, it can suppress that the situation where a jackpot game is complete | finished, with a player's eyes | visual_axis concentrated on the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 6000 can be suppressed.

  Further, as a result of the player operating the operation button 300 in the timing effect (operation effect), when the storage channel 1231 is in the transmissive state, attention is paid to the first variable winning device 6000 in which the storage channel 1231 is disposed. It was configured to display a prompt to do so. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (the third symbol display device 81) to be transferred to the storage channel 1231 when necessary.

  A circle is displayed on the liquid crystal display device (the third symbol display device 81) so that the number range of the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped. This makes it easier for the player to predict the internal state of the storage flow path 1231 by visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device, and to easily determine how many balls should be fired before the prescribed number of winnings is won. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to easily select the firing mode of the sphere.

  As timing effects (operation effects) performed on the liquid crystal display device (3rd symbol display device 81), different qualities for players (in this control example, those related to the visibility of the storage channel 1231 and the payout of prize balls) If the timing effect (operation effect) that grants the profit of the player (which is directly connected to the player) is executed continuously, the operation timing that gives the highest profit for the player is grasped as the same timing (similar timing) for the player Configured to be. Thereby, even if it is a case where the transition from the previous timing effect (operation effect) to the later timing effect (operation effect) occurs immediately, the player can execute the operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  Depending on the jackpot type, in a predetermined round game R (round game R of the sixth round), a ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231 (20th operation pattern, operation scenario 5) and a case where it is not discharged (21st) The operation pattern and the operation scenario 6) are generated. Thereby, the presence or absence of the occurrence of excess winnings in a predetermined round game R can be defined by the jackpot type.

  By changing the predetermined inter-round interval period (for example, the interval period between the 4th and 5th rounds) depending on the jackpot type, the inside of the storage channel 1231 in the round game R immediately after the inter-round interval period The state (the number of stored balls) was changed. Thereby, even if the state of the state change of the 1st specific prize opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific area | region 4830 in the round game R is the same, the progress aspect of a round game can be changed.

  A predetermined number of round games R (the round game R in the fourth round in the present control example) of the number of balls (9 in the present control example) different from the prescribed number (10 in the present control example) are first By ending the game in a state where it has entered the specific winning hole 1000a, the profit that the player can obtain is maximized in the next round game R (the round game R in the fifth round in this control example). did. Thereby, it can suppress that a player digests jackpot game casually.

  In the configuration in which the ball flows down toward the specific area 4830 as the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, a predetermined number of pieces are provided in the first specific winning opening 1000a while the interference member 6930 maintains the protruding state. It was configured so that the ball could not enter. Thereby, the operation mode of the interference member 6930 can define the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R, and the arrival of the ball upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a. The timing and the end timing of the round game R can be dissociated. That is, based on the operation mode of the interference member 6930, the timing at which the first specific prize winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R can be defined.

  In the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls are configured to be easily retained in a state where the balls are aligned upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the retained balls are in a state where the first specific winning opening 1000a is in a closed state. It is comprised so that it may flow down toward the 1st specific prize opening 1000a at the timing changed. Thereby, it is possible to make it possible for the plurality of staying balls to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a and to make it possible to increase the possibility that an excessive winning will occur.

  In addition, the number of excess winnings can be defined. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of excess winnings from becoming excessive and impeding game play.

  Further, whether or not an excess winning has occurred can be defined by the operation mode of the interference member 6930 disposed downstream of the first specific winning port 1000a, and the operation mode of the interference member 6930 is defined in advance based on the jackpot type. The As a result, even if the ball is similarly retained upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to switch between the case where an excessive winning occurs and the case where no excessive winning occurs based on the jackpot type.

  Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, a benefit obtained by the player in the round game R (for example, visibility inside the storage flow path 1231, the number of discharged balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231, or based thereon) The configuration is such that the presence or absence of a ball entering the specific area 4830 and the maximum number of balls entered in the round game R) change. Thereby, the player's attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved.

  Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, it is configured so that two types of profits obtained by the player can be seen, and the display device (the third pattern is designed so that the player can grasp the mode of profits obtained by the player. The display device 81) is configured to display. Thereby, the player who has visually recognized the display on the display device can obtain a profit suitable for the operation timing by selecting the operation timing and operating the operation button 300 based on the profit to be obtained with priority. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the timing effect (operation effect) can be increased.

  Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 143. First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 141, for the special symbol 1, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 49” is defined in association with “big hit P”. This “big hit P” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit P”, so “big hit P” is determined when the special symbol 1 is a big win. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

  This “big hit P” is set to six rounds as the number of rounds. After the big hit, the special symbol and the normal symbol shift to a high probability state. In this control example, control is performed so that at least one jackpot is determined after the special symbol shifts to the high probability state and then shifts to the low probability state. Therefore, this is a jackpot type that is advantageous in terms of the number of balls that the player can acquire (expected ball) from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

  In addition, for special symbol 1, the value of first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit Q” in the range of “50 to 99”. This “big hit Q” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Among the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit Q”, so “big hit Q” is determined when the special symbol 1 is a big win. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

  This “big hit Q” is set to six rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit, the normal symbol time-short state is given 100 times.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, the range (all ranges) in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 99” is defined in association with “big hit m”. This “big hit m” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 100 counter values that are “big hit m”, so “big hit m” is determined when the big symbol wins in the special symbol 2 lottery. The percentage is 100%.

  This “big hit m” is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds. After the big hit, the special symbol and the normal symbol shift to a high probability state. In this control example, control is performed so that at least one jackpot is determined after the special symbol shifts to the high probability state and then shifts to the low probability state. Therefore, this is a jackpot type that is advantageous in terms of the number of balls that the player can acquire (expected ball) from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

  In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of jackpot game, but the privilege (a high probability state of a normal symbol or a high probability state of a special symbol) granted after the jackpot ends is the special symbol 2 Is more advantageous (it is easier to shift to a high probability state).

  As described above, in this control example, when the special symbol 1 lottery is a big win, the special symbol 2 lottery is shifted to a higher probability state that is advantageous to the player. The configuration is easy. Therefore, once the consecutive home mode (high probability state of special symbol and short time state of normal symbol) is set, the special symbol 2 lottery is made by entering the second entrance 640 by right-handed. Is likely to be executed, and the jackpot game is likely to be repeated. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the consecutive resort mode. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, in the sixth round game R, it will be described with reference to FIG. 142 that the operation pattern is controlled so as to correspond to the jackpot type. In this control example, the first variable winning device 9000 (see FIG. 66) described in the ninth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the twenty-second operation pattern, and FIG. 142 (b) is an illustration of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing in the twenty-third operation pattern. FIG. 142 (c) is a diagram showing a time change of the member 8340, and FIG. 142 (c) is a diagram showing a time change of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the 24th operation pattern.

  In this control example, in the sixth round game R of jackpot P, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven in the twenty-second operation pattern, and in the sixth round game R of jackpot Q, the 23rd round game R The opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven in the operation pattern, and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven in the 24th operation pattern in the round game R of the sixth round with the big hit m.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the twenty-second operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), and the round game R starts. After the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) has elapsed, the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the extended state.

  Note that the interference member 6930 returns to the retracted state when the round game R ends (it is skipped when the round game R ends before the waiting time TK). Here, in the round game R, the passage of a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) is detected at the first specific winning opening 1000a, or the maximum time of the round game R (in this control example, When 30 seconds elapses, the process ends.

  In the sixth round game R of jackpot P in which the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven and controlled in the 22nd operation pattern, the specified number (10 in this control example) before the standby time TK elapses. When the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, the round game R ends without waiting for the waiting time TK.

  On the other hand, if the specified number of balls does not enter the first specific prize winning opening 1000a before the standby time TK elapses, the interference member 6930 protrudes, and 10 balls can be stored in the storage flow path 1231. As a result, the specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the time required for the round game R becomes the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1.

  The waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) does not stop the ball from the end of the round game R in the fifth round, and does not stop the ball even in the interval between rounds. By continuing the launch, a predetermined number (10 in the present control example) of balls can be sufficiently reached at the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this control example, the ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  On the other hand, for example, when the launch of the ball is stopped during the interval between rounds from the end of the round game R in the fifth round and the ball is launched in accordance with the start of the sixth round, A predetermined number (10 in this control example) of balls from the balance with the time to reach the first specific winning hole 1000a (about 4.0 seconds) until the waiting time TK elapses. It cannot be passed through 1000a.

  Therefore, the round game R of the sixth round is less when the ball is stopped firing at the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the sixth round than when the ball is continuously launched at the interval between rounds. It can be configured so that the time required for the process becomes longer. Thereby, the game aspect which stops discharge | release of a ball | bowl in the interval between rounds can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the twenty-third operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), but before the waiting time TK has elapsed. Only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is controlled to open / close a plurality of times (as shown in FIG. 74, one side opens / closes). That is, the control for releasing the drive (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

  Note that the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the extended state after the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the round game R, as in the twenty-second operation pattern. .

  According to this operation pattern, not all balls on the opening / closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some balls flow down toward the auxiliary entrance 9111. It is possible to make it more difficult for the specified number (10 in this control example) of the balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses than the operation pattern. .

  Therefore, the round game R of the sixth round can be made long (30 seconds) with a high probability. On the other hand, unlike the twenty-second operation pattern, a prize ball can be paid out by entering the auxiliary entrance 9111, so that the number of prize balls to be paid out is larger than that in the twenty-third operation pattern. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (c), in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), and before and after the standby time TK elapses. Only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is controlled to open / close a plurality of times (as shown in FIG. 74, one side opens / closes). That is, the control for releasing the drive (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

  Note that after the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the extended state. The operation pattern is the same.

  In this operation pattern, not all balls riding on the opening / closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some of the balls flow down toward the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66). Similar to the twenty-third operation pattern, the probability that the round game R is ended when a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a can be lowered.

  Therefore, the round game R of the sixth round can be made long (30 seconds) with a high probability. On the other hand, unlike the 23rd operation pattern, since the ball can enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66) even after the standby time TK elapses, in a longer period than the 23rd operation pattern. It is possible to generate payout of winning balls due to entering the auxiliary entrance 9111. Therefore, more prize balls can be paid out compared to the twenty-third operation pattern.

  In this operation pattern, control is performed so that one-side opening and closing occurs even after the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state. That is, after the storage flow path 1231 is filled with a sphere (filled up) and the sphere stays on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 66), one-side opening and closing occurs. As compared with the case where the is not specified, it is possible to easily guide the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111 when opening and closing on one side.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b), the display in the round game R of the sixth round will be described. FIG. 143 (a) and FIG. 143 (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents informing the third symbol display device 81 that the sixth round game R is being executed.

  In FIG. 143 (a), an example of display of the round game R in the sixth round when the jackpot type is “big jackpot P” or “big jackpot Q”, or the sixth round game in the case of “big jackpot m”. FIG. 143 (b) shows a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display before the waiting time TK in R has elapsed. In FIG. 143 (b), the waiting time TK in the round game R in the sixth round when the jackpot type is “hit m”. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display after progress is shown.

  That is, when the jackpot type is “big jackpot P” or “big jackpot Q”, the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained over the round game R, and the jackpot type is “big jackpot”. In the case of “m”, after the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (a) is maintained, the display is switched to the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) after the standby time TK elapses. Display commands are set so that the display shown in FIG. 143 (b) is maintained until the end of the round game R.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the round number display section 714 for displaying the current round number is in the round game R of the sixth round. The sub-round display part 714b is displayed in the upper left of the screen in the form, and below the round number display part 714, which displays that it is a period in which an additional prize ball can be expected in the round game R.

  In FIG. 143 (a), the round number display portion 714 is lit (displayed brightly), while the sub-round display portion 714b is turned off (darkly displayed). Conversely, in FIG. 143 (b), the round number display is displayed. The part 714 is turned off (darkly displayed), while the sub-round display part 714b is lit (displayed brightly).

  In other words, in this control example, the round game R is executed by the display of the mode shown in FIG. 143 (a) during a period in which the payout of the winning ball accompanying the entering into the first specific winning opening 1000a is the main. In addition to notifying the player of this, after the waiting time TK elapses, it becomes impossible to pay out the prize ball accompanying the entry to the first specific prize opening 1000a, but by entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 It is possible to make the player recognize that the period during which the payout of the prize ball can be expected continues.

  Here, by changing the display on the sub-round display portion 714b, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize a substantial profit change obtained by the player by entering the ball. That is, the payout of the prize ball due to the entry of one ball into the auxiliary entrance 9111 is 3 as described above, and 1/5 of the case where the ball enters the first specific prize entrance 1000a. It is. This change in the number of winning balls with respect to the number of balls entered can be easily recognized by the player.

  In addition, the sphere flows to the auxiliary entrance 9111 only when the sphere is disposed between the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 within a short period of time when the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened. The ball does not necessarily flow to the auxiliary entrance 9111 every time the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened.

  Therefore, the frequency of the ball entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 during the period in which the sub-round display unit 714b is emitting display (brightly displayed) is the period during which the round number display unit 714 is emitting display (brightly displayed). It is low compared to the frequency of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  As described above, according to this control example, while notifying that the period of the round game R has not ended, the player can obtain the profit (the change of the prize ball paid out by one ball entry, It is possible to notify at the same time that a change has occurred in the frequency of entering the ball.

  In an example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 143 (b), the character “+ chance” is displayed as the above-described excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721. In this control example, the character “+ chance” may cause a ball to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 by firing a ball. Corresponding to being able to get paid out.

  In this way, in this control example, control is performed so that an additional prize ball is paid out due to the ball entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 in the round game R. Therefore, in the round game R, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player when the prescribed number (10 in this control example) has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a (150 in this control example). More than the number of prize balls (excess prize balls) can be paid out.

  In particular, in the 24th operation pattern, there is a high possibility of entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 even after the standby time TK has elapsed, and compared to the other 22nd operation pattern and the 23rd operation pattern, The number of prize balls to be paid out to the person can increase. On the other hand, in the operation pattern in this control example, the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

  That is, in the twenty-second to twenty-fourth operation patterns in this control example, the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same, but a difference can be provided in the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player.

  In addition, since the maximum number of times of entering the auxiliary entrance 9111 corresponds to the number of times that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened / closed in the round game R, the number of times that the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened / closed may be exceeded. The number of prize balls can be adjusted.

  According to this control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the interval interval between rounds, the time required for the next round game R is likely to be longer in the case where the ball emission is stopped compared to the case where the ball emission is continued in the interval interval between rounds. Thereby, the game aspect which stops discharge | release of a ball | bowl in the interval period between rounds can be suppressed.

  Depending on the driving mode of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 (that is, depending on whether the above-mentioned “one-side opening / closing” occurs), the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in the round game R can be positively changed. . In other words, whether the ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 passes through the first specific prize opening 1000a or the auxiliary opening 9111 downstream of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member. It can be switched by the drive mode of 8340.

  Thereby, the timing at which the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 and the timing at which it is difficult to guide the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111 can be divided and configured. Therefore, for example, the timing at which the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 during the round game R can be concentrated in a part of the period. In this case, the balls that have reached the movable object that circulates are sorted in the order of arrival, and a predetermined number of the reached balls is guided to the winning hole (the winning hole corresponding to the auxiliary winning hole 9111). Thus, it is possible to improve the attention in the vicinity of the auxiliary entrance 9111.

  That is, the number of shot balls relative to the number of payouts can be reduced by firing the ball at a timing when the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 and stopping the ball launch at other timings.

  On the other hand, the timing at which the ball should be launched aiming at winning the auxiliary entrance 9111 is configured to be different based on the jackpot type. Thereby, since it is possible to request the player to change the firing mode of the ball for each jackpot game, it is possible to easily prevent the player from playing the jackpot game. In addition, by making it difficult to grasp the type of jackpot, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a strategy, and excessive profits (for example, the number of balls to be paid out rather than the number of balls to be fired) to a specific player (experienced player) Can be prevented from occurring.

  The auxiliary entrance 9111 is disposed at a position where the ball is not guided (not easily guided) when the opening / closing plate 8300 is not driven (not excited). Thereby, compared with the case where a ball is guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 at the timing when the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are not driven, it is possible to improve the player's concentration on the game.

  In the round game R, the player can easily grasp the change in the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out with respect to the number of balls reached the first variable prize-winning device 9000 from the display on the display device (third symbol display device 81). It was configured as follows. Thereby, during the same round game R, it can be made easy for the player to arbitrarily select whether to continue the ball firing or stop the ball firing from the display on the display device.

  Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148. First, the ROM 202 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third control example. The ROM 202 includes a first per-random number table 202a, a second per-random number table 202c, a first per-type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening / closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, and an opening / closing plate. In addition to the interference member operation scenario table 202f, at least a small hit type selection table 202g is provided.

  This small hit type selection table 202g is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on a game ball entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is what

  The contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

  In the first random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), whether or not the value of the first random number counter C3 acquired when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 is a big hit. It is determined whether or not the value of the first symbol random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 is a big win. A special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random value determined to be a win in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entrance to the first entrance 64. It is a table in which (judgment value) is set. In the first special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C3 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined that it is a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 319”, it is determined that the value is out.

  On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), a random number value (determination value) determined to be a win in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C3 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the obtained first random number counter C3 is “1 to 318”, and if it is “1 to 318”, it is determined that it is a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that it is “319”, it is determined that it is out of place.

  Thus, the first per-random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In the first per-random number counter C3, when the first special symbol is drawn based on the entrance to the first entrance 64, the first special symbol is a random number, and the total number of random numbers is Among the 320, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1, so the probability of the jackpot of the first special symbol is “1/320”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers that will be a small hit is 3, the probability that the first special symbol will be a small hit is “3/320”.

  On the other hand, at the time of lottery of the second special symbol based on the entrance to the second winning opening 640, the random number value that is the big hit of the second special symbol is one, and the total number of random number values is 320, Since the total number of random numbers to be 1 is 1, the probability of winning the second special symbol is “1/320”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers that will be a small hit is 318, the probability that the second special symbol will be a small hit is “318/320”.

  As in the above-described embodiments or control examples, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is “○”. The symbol is lit up and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  The electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is short, but is opened only for 0.2 seconds when the time is not short. Therefore, even if the value of the second random number counter C5 is won when the time is not short, it is difficult to win the game ball to the second winning port 640. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game that attempts to enter the second winning opening 640 regardless of whether the time is short or not (the jackpot with the short time has not been revealed).

  FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 146) is a data table in which determination values for determining the big hit type are stored, as described above. It is stipulated in association with the jackpot type and the type of winning a prize that became a special symbol lottery opportunity. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 49”. Is defined in association with jackpot R (see 202b21 in FIG. 146).

  When the jackpot R is reached, 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is in a short time state (100 times) until the special symbol variation is consumed 100 times. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “50 to 99”, the big hit S is associated and defined (see 202b22 in FIG. 146).

  When the jackpot S is reached, 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is the normal state. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls, but cannot get a short-time profit after the jackpot game ends.

  In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game can be set to the short-time state with a probability of 50%. During the short time, we will aim to win even more jackpots through the small hit game described below.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second winning port 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is within the range of “0-9”. n is defined in association with it (see 202b23 in FIG. 146). This jackpot n gives the player the same profit as the jackpot R described above.

  That is, 16 rounds of jackpot game are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is in a short time state (100 times) until the special symbol variation is consumed 100 times. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “10 to 99”, the big hit p is associated and defined (see 202b24 in FIG. 146). The jackpot p is different in the number of short-time game fluctuations while giving the player a payout of the same prize ball as the jackpot n described above.

  That is, 16 rounds of jackpot game are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is in the short-time state (4 times) until the special symbol variation is digested 4 times. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls.

  As described above, the jackpot generated in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second winning opening 640) shifts to the short-time state with the establishment of 100%. Therefore, as compared with the case where the special symbol 1 is a lottery, the possibility of acquiring the next jackpot in a short time after the jackpot game ends is increased.

  As described above, during the time of special symbol, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when hitting the normal symbol is shortened. It is set to be long (5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn. And, if a special symbol 2 lottery wins, it becomes a short time state after the jackpot ends, and it becomes easier to obtain a big winner by special symbol 2 lottery.

  Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the short-time state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and if the big win, the special symbol time-short state, which tends to be a big hit G, is likely to be repeated. It becomes easy to acquire a lot of prize balls. Thereby, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the short time state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 and the number of reserved special symbols are related, and the sphere is identified as a specific region 4830 (in this control example, the next big hit is caused by the passage of the sphere). Whether or not to pass through the region to be determined (see FIG. 51) is determined, details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g.

  The small hit type selection table 202g is a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202g1 for selecting a small hit type based on the first entrance 64, and a small hit small based on the second winning slot 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202g2 for selecting a hit type (see FIG. 147 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 147 (b), at the small hit based on the first entrance 64, the value of the small hit type counter C6 is selected, and when the value is “0 to 1,” the small hit A is selected. ", The small hit B is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147 (c), at the time of a small hit based on the second winning opening 640, when the value of the first hit type counter C6 is “0-9”, the small hit A is selected. In the case of “˜99”, the small hit B is selected.

  In this control example, the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 is set according to the small hit type (see FIG. 148). As will be described in detail later, the small hit A is a small hit that is given with a high probability that the big hit is caused by the game ball passing through the specific area 4830, and the small hit B is a small hit that is not given a big hit with a high probability. .

  Further, in the present control example, the jackpot given after the jackpot A and the jackpot B is configured to be a jackpot G (short hit jackpot at 16R).

  In the present embodiment, the type of jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of jackpot, but as other specifications, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a case of jackpot However, the jackpot selection table is used to determine the type of jackpot (acquisition of only the jackpot right), and in the subsequent jackpot game, the game ball passes through the specific area 4830 to execute the jackpot that has acquired the right earlier. May be. By doing in this way, the player can select a small hit that passes through the specific area 4830, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the sorting device 4850 at the small hit A and the time change of the opening / closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the sorting device 4850 (see FIG. 51) at the small hit B. It is. The operation of the sorting device 4850 is the same for the small hit A and the small hit B.

  In FIG. 148, the illustration of the difference between the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the drive timing of the solenoid 1510 is omitted, and the operation starts at the same time.

  First, an outline of the operation in the small hit A will be described. In the small hit A, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in an open state for 1.0 second from the start of the small hit, and when 1.0 second passes, the solenoid 1510 is driven ( (Excitation) is released. 0.2 seconds after the excitation is released, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) again, and after the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 0.6 seconds, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released.

  Next, an outline of the operation in the small hit B will be described. In the small hit B, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in an open state from the start of the small hit to 1.8 seconds, and after 1.8 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). ) Is canceled.

  In this manner, the small hit A and the small hit B are different in whether or not the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed during the small hit game while the time of the small hit game itself is the same (1.8 seconds). .

  In this control example, when the small hit game is started immediately after the small hit game is finished, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol remains and the small hit game is continuously generated, The period during which the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept closed is set to 0.4 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in the above-described aspect, when the small hit game occurs continuously, even if two or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51), the small hit game is discharged from the discharge port 1150 between the small hit games. The number of spheres to be played is limited to two. Therefore, the ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 in the previous small hit game can remain in the storage channel 1231 during the next small hit game.

  The operation mode of the sorting device 4850 will be described. The distribution device 4850 maintains the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed position until 2.0 seconds have elapsed after the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) at the start of the small hit game, and when 2.0 seconds have elapsed, The sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the open position and maintained for 0.5 seconds. After 0.5 seconds, the sorting operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again. The distribution device 4850 moves the distribution operation member 4851 to the open position after 3.2 seconds from the start of driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 at the start of the small hit game, and maintains it for 0.5 seconds. After 0.5 seconds, the solenoid 4852 is driven (excited) in such a manner that the sorting operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again.

  That is, the sorting operation member 4851 moves to the open position twice for each small hit game. The first movement corresponds to 1 second after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed at the small hit A (corresponding to the time elapsed until the ball that has passed through the discharge port 1150 reaches the sorting operation member 4851). .

  Therefore, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is driven with the small hit A, if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 in advance, the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 when the sorting operation member 4851 is moved for the first time. Can be made. On the other hand, since the probability that the small hit A occurs is 10% in the case of the special symbol 2, it is difficult to frequently cause the ball to pass to the specific region 4830 at this timing.

  The second movement of the sorting operation member 4851 is 1.4 seconds after the end of the small hit game (equivalent to immediately after the second ball passing through the discharge port 1150 passes through the sorting operation member 4851). Equivalent to. That is, the second movement is an aspect in which the ball is not entered into the specific area 4830 if there are up to two balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the end of the small hit game.

  That is, according to this control example, in the case where only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the short-time game, if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 does not become 0, the ball will not pass the specific area 4830. It can be constituted as follows.

  Thereby, in the case where only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the short-time game, the timing when the ball passes the specific area 4830 can be limited when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes zero. In this case, it is possible to obtain a payout prize ball in a short-time game by using award balls that are paid out by a game in which balls are continuously inserted into the second entrance 640 so that the number of reserved balls does not become zero.

  On the other hand, since it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 while continuing to put the ball in the second entrance 640, in order to acquire the next jackpot (to pass the ball to the specific area 4830) The player needs to make a timing for setting the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol to 0 in the short-time game. As a result, in the short-time game, when the remaining short-time number decreases, it can be configured such that the player can obtain a greater profit by making the timing for setting the number of reserved balls to 0 more frequently.

  According to the setting of the second movement, if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is three, the balls pass through the specific region 4830, but the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, the number of discharged items may be set when the number of discharged items is larger than the number of discharged items (two) in the shortest game interval (0.4 seconds). The second movement may be set at the passing timing (1.8 seconds from the end of the small hit game). In addition, the minimum interval of the small hit game may be set to 0.2 seconds (the number of discharges is 1). In this case, the second movement is more than the number of discharges (1). For example, the second movement may be set at the timing when the second ball passes through the specific area 4830 (1.2 seconds from the end of the small hit game).

  In addition, since the average number of balls that can enter the storage flow path 1231 in one small hit game is about 1, 2, the storage flow path 1231 before the small hit game in which the number of reserved balls becomes zero. By storing the sphere, the possibility of the sphere passing through the specific region 4830 can be increased. Therefore, the timing at which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is set to 0 can be selected based on the number of balls in the storage channel 1231 that increases or decreases with each small hit game. Thereby, attention to the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  In this control example, the longer the time-short game period is, the greater the number of payout prize balls due to the balls entering the second entrance 640. Here, by setting the number of winning balls in the second entrance 640, the player can select whether to shorten or lengthen the time-short game period.

  For example, if the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640 is one, there is no profit (number of prize balls to be paid out) that can be obtained by the player by subtracting from the number of shots (0). Therefore, it is beneficial for the player to shorten the duration of the short-time game.

  On the other hand, if the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640 is 2 or more (for example, 5), there is a profit (the number of prize balls to be paid out) that the player can obtain by subtracting the number of fired balls (1 piece). that's all). Therefore, there is a possibility that it will be beneficial for the player to suppress the entry of the ball into the specific area 4830 and to lengthen the time-short game period.

  In this control example, the opening time of the opening / closing plate 1300 for one small hit game is set to 1.8 seconds from the start of the first opening to the closing, so that the first specific winning opening 1000a in the single small hit game is set. The number of balls entered is three or four, but is not limited to this. For example, by configuring the opening pattern of the small hit game with an open pattern in which the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times, more balls (for example, 10 balls) are required for one small hit game. ) May be configured to be able to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, for example, by providing the fall delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment, even when the opening time of the opening / closing plate 1300 is short, a sphere is formed at the lower end of the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. It is possible to prolong the time until it falls downward, and to guide the ball to the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

  In this control example, the ball is controlled so as to be able to fire at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so that the small hit game (small hit A, small hit B) with a period from opening to closing of 1.8 seconds is the shortest interval (0 .4 seconds interval), the number of small hit games with respect to the number of balls that can be fired is 11 balls / 3 times. That is, a maximum of 11 balls can be fired during 3 small hit games.

  Here, in order to generate a small hit game, it is necessary to make a ball enter the second entrance 640, so when the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 640 is 0, such as when starting a right hand Therefore, it is necessary to enter three balls into the second entrance 640 as the number of balls for generating three small hit games. Therefore, the remaining 8 balls deviate from the second entrance 640 and head to the first specific prize opening 1000a. For example, if all the small hits are the above-described small hit B in three small hit games, six balls are discharged through three small hit games. Therefore, two balls remain in the storage channel 1231 after three small hit games. Therefore, the expected number of additional balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 when continuously firing the balls is two for three small hit games.

  Note that the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hit game is not discharged if it has not reached the lower end of the storage channel 1231. It takes 2 seconds to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231 from the first specific winning opening 1000a, and even if it is considered that the opening in the small hit game ends in 1.8 seconds, It may occur that the opening of the next small hit game is started before the ball that has passed through the one specific winning opening 1000a reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

  Therefore, when the ball starts to accumulate in the storage channel 1231 (when it is not zero, it is the first time), the small hit game in which the ball is not zero (for example, two balls remain in the storage channel 1231). It is possible to make it easier for the balls to remain in the storage channel 1231 as compared with the case where the number of balls is additionally increased in the small hit game executed (continuous times).

  On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls at the second entrance 640 is not 0, even if three balls do not enter the second entrance 640, the number of retained balls and If the number of balls that have entered the second entrance 640 exceeds 3, three small hit games can be executed at the shortest interval (0.4 second interval). In this case, the number of balls going to the first specific prize winning opening 1000a during three small hit games is eight or more, and more balls can be directed to the storage channel 1231. Thus, more than two spheres can be additionally left in the storage channel 1231.

  As described above, in the present control example, the small hit game generated based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 is maintained so as to continue at the shortest interval, and as many balls as possible are added. It is controlled so that it is beneficial for the player to enter the specific winning opening 1000a and leave the ball in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the entrance to the second entrance 640 does not contribute to the occurrence of the small hit game (when the number of reserved balls is full (4 in this control example)), the ball enters the second entrance 640. It is disadvantageous for the player from the viewpoint of the number of winning balls and the viewpoint of increasing the number of additional balls left in the storage channel 1231 (to the second entrance 640 during the right-handed game). May be detrimental to the player).

  Therefore, it is possible to improve attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during a right-handed game.

  Here, in this control example, when aiming to pass a sphere through the specific region 4830, more than two spheres are stored when the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 640 becomes zero. It needs to be stored in the flow path 1231. That is, when there are more balls than twice the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 640 (see), if the number of reserved balls is not reduced, the balls flow into the specific area 4830 It is configured so that it is difficult to let them. Thereby, in addition to the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, the attention to the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

  In this control example, the game area adjustment (gauge configuration, nail adjustment, etc.) is an adjustment in which a ball easily enters the normal entrance 67 during the right-handed game and many balls enter the second entrance 640. However, it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entrance 640, and even if the adjustment is such that many balls are likely to face the first specific winning opening 1000a, the loss given to the player can be reduced.

  That is, for example, when the adjustment is made so that a large number of balls enter the second entrance 640 during the right-handed game, it is difficult for the storage channel 1231 to store the balls, and while the small hit game B continues to occur, Although it is difficult for a ball to enter the specific area 4830, the ball can enter the specific area 4830 because the ball can be passed to the specific area 4830 if the small hit game A selected by the establishment of 10% occurs. In the meantime, it is possible to aim for payout of many prize balls by causing many balls to enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, for example, during the right-handed game, when it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 and many balls are easily adjusted to the first specific prize opening 1000a, a ball is placed in the second entrance 640. Since it is difficult to enter, most of the right-handed game balls can enter the storage channel 1231. In addition, the number of reserved special symbols 2 based on the entrance to the second entrance 640 is 0. Since it is easily maintained, it becomes easy to discharge two or more balls in the first small hit game. Therefore, since it is easy to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 at an early stage, it is possible to end the time-saving game at an early stage, and a period during which a loss due to the difficulty of entering the ball at the second entrance 640 (that is, the time-saving game) Period) can be shortened.

  In the present control example, since the opening / closing plate 1300 and the first specific winning opening 1000a are configured to be used in the small hit game, it is desirable to separately prepare the winning opening used in the big hit game. For example, as described in the second embodiment, a second specific winning port 2255a different from the first specific winning port 1000a may be set as a winning port used in the jackpot game.

  In this case, it is not always necessary that the storage flow path 1231 is joined, and for example, an independent storage flow path may be configured by the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a, You may make it the 2nd specific winning opening 2255a not comprise a storage flow path (it discharges | emits to a ball | bowl discharge path).

  Note that this control example exemplifies one means of the technical idea related to the gaming machine, “the player can select the timing at which the ball is allowed to flow into the specific area 4830 (can be aimed at)”. May be used.

  For example, a small hit (a small hit A in the present control example) that drives (excites) the opening / closing plate 1300 in a driving mode in which the sphere easily flows (inflows) into the specific region 4830, and the sphere hardly flows into the specific region 4830 ( In the control mode in which the small hit (driving B in this control example) for driving (exciting) the opening / closing plate 1300 in the driving mode (which does not flow) is selected according to the small hit type, it is determined which small hit is executed. The timing at which the ball is allowed to flow into the specific area 4830 is controlled by controlling the information so that it is notified to the user and including the case where the ball launched after grasping the content of the notification can pass through the specific area 4830. The user may be able to select. According to this, it is possible to allow “a game mode in which a ball is prevented from entering the specific area 4830 by not firing the ball at a predetermined timing”.

  The notification means is not limited in any way. For example, you may alert | report by the display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, and you may alert | report by an audio | voice.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each said embodiment, although the storage flow path 1231 was comprised as a flow path extended on a plane, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the storage channel 1231 may be configured such that the right side of a plane orthogonal to the left-right direction is bent 90 degrees and extends in the front-rear direction. That is, a flow path that extends in the left-right direction from the detection sensor 1240 to the bending position, extends in the front-rear direction from the bending position, and again extends in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the discharge port 1150 may be configured.

  The flow path extending in the front-rear direction has a flow path shape in which the shape of the storage flow path 1231 is diverted and the extending direction is switched from the left and right to the front and rear (rotated 90 degrees about the vertical axis). It is formed by combining two substantially symmetric light-transmitting members having concave portions constituting one side surface of the flow channel on the opposite side from the left and right.

  The storage channel 1231 including the channel extending in the front-rear direction is different from the above-described embodiment in the direction of the channel, but the number of spheres that can be stored downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a is 10 (in this embodiment, 10). It is designed to be That is, also in the present embodiment, it is possible to configure a game property similar to the game property described in the above embodiments.

  Also for the storage flow path 1231 including the flow path extending in the front-rear direction, the solenoid 6910 enters the flow path in a driven (excited) state, and an overhanging state that restricts the flow of the sphere in the flow path, and the solenoid 6910 In the state where the drive (excitation) is released, an interference member that is retracted from the flow path and can be switched between a retracted state that allows the flow of the sphere in the flow path is provided.

  Here, the arrangement of the interference member with respect to the flow path is the same as in the sixth embodiment. That is, of the spheres stored on the downstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the flow path extending back and forth on the upstream side of the second sphere counting from the lowest sphere whose flow is restricted by the restriction member 1600. The third ball is arranged so as to be able to regulate the flow of the third ball, and in the overhanging state of the interference member, seven are located at a position upstream of the interference member and downstream of the first specific winning port 1000a. Can be stored.

  The flow path extending in the front-rear direction is formed so that the third and subsequent spheres are stored behind the second sphere, counting from the lowest sphere whose flow is restricted by the restriction member 1600. Therefore, when the second sphere is arranged, the sphere is arranged on the front side of the interference member, so that the interference member is hidden by the sphere. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the state of the interference member with the sphere.

  Compared to the case where the stored spheres are arranged side by side, the entire sphere cannot be visually recognized, and the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the object to be viewed is increased by the flow path itself extending to the back side. When the storage channel 1231 includes a channel extending forward and backward due to reasons such as being far away, a state in which ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 by retracting the interference member, and the interference member It is difficult to grasp the state in which nine spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231 from the arrangement of the spheres. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of stored spheres even if the first variable winning device 1000 is directly visually recognized.

  In the case of having such a feature, for example, the number of balls entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, rather than visually recognizing the storage channel 1231 having poor identification of the number of stored balls, the number of the balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 1000a is grasped by looking at the third symbol display device 81. Since it can comprise so that it may become easy, the attention to the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be improved relatively with respect to the attention to the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 1000. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to easily remove the player's line of sight from the first variable winning device 1000.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of spheres discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port regulating member that opens and closes the second discharge port so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. Anyway. In this case, the sphere stored between the second outlet and the first outlet can be prevented from being discharged without strictly controlling the operating length of the second outlet restricting member. Therefore, it is possible to change the number of balls discharged between when the balls are discharged from the first outlet and when the balls are discharged from the second outlet. In this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be opened at the same time, the time required to discharge the entire ball can be shortened, and the interval can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it is composed of an opening / closing plate 1300 that moves up and down, and can guide a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a when placed in the upper position, and can be guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a when placed in the lower position. You may make it divert. In this case, when raising the sphere, it is not necessary to arrange the sphere between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200, so that the raising operation of the sphere can be made smoother.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 is discharged from the single discharge port 1710 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an additional discharge port may be arranged at a midpoint of the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum dischargeable number can be changed depending on whether the discharge is made from the discharge port 1710 or the additional discharge port. In other words, it is difficult to discharge the sphere clogged to the discharge port 1710 from the additional discharge port. Moreover, by discharging both outlets at the same time, the discharge efficiency of the sphere can be increased, and the interval can be shortened.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the sorting device 4850 of the probability variation determination unit 4800 starts the operation based on the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the sphere depending on the number of spheres passing through the probability variation determination channel 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, whether or not the right to shift to the high probability state can be acquired can be switched depending on the number of balls to be discharged, regardless of the discharge speed (interval) of the balls.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the operation start timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulating member 1600 are slightly different from each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation may be started simultaneously. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the resistance of the sphere enters the storage channel 1231 depending on whether or not there is a gap into which the sphere enters (whether the storage channel 1231 is in a full tank state). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you may comprise in the aspect which decelerates the predetermined | prescribed sphere which enters into the storage flow path 1231 by whether the number of the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is near a full tank state. In this case, even when the specified number (count number) of round games R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231, it is possible to suppress the winning of more than the specified number. Further, in this case, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being extended while suppressing the winning of more than the prescribed number, as compared with the case where the balls are decelerated regardless of the number of stored balls. In addition, you may accelerate not only the deceleration. In this case, more than a prescribed number of winnings can be intentionally generated.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a ball is stored in the storage channel 1231, so that the ball entering the first specific prize winning opening 1000 a is regulated by the stored ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Absent. For example, a non-electrically actuated member may be provided that moves by a predetermined amount when a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a passes and makes it easy to restrict the ball from entering in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the interval between rounds can be shortened compared with the case where the stored balls are discharged all at once.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where a specified number of spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be possible to store a prescribed number + 1 sphere. In this case, it is possible to limit the number of balls that pass the first specific winning opening 1000a beyond the prescribed number to one for each round game R. In this case, for each round, a round in which the eleventh sphere is easy to pass and a round in which the passage of the eleventh sphere is restricted may be switched.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held at the position in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a (it will fall), so that two balls will not win simultaneously. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be held only for one ball, and may have a possibility of passing through the first specific prize opening 1000a until the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. Further, the presence / absence of this possibility may be switched for each round.

  In the second embodiment, the storage channel 1231 having a plurality of inlets and a single outlet has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be provided in the storage channel, and the channel may be branched toward the outlet. In this case, a predetermined number of spheres can remain in the storage channel 1231 when the spheres are discharged from either outlet.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the number of storable balls when entering from the first specific winning port 1000a is configured to be the same as the prescribed winning number (count number) in the round game R of the jackpot game has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of storable balls when entering from the first specific winning port 1000a is less than the prescribed number of winnings (count) in the round game R, and the number of storable balls when entering from the second specific winning port 2255a May be equal to or greater than the prescribed number of winnings (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to configure a game property in which the round time is inevitably extended when a ball is entered from the first specific winning opening 1000a while discharging the whole ball at intervals between rounds.

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described in which the sphere that has flowed downward from the opening / closing plate 1300 is lifted again above the opening / closing plate 1300 by the opening / closing plate 1300, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the ball may be lifted by a movable accessory that can pick up the ball. In this case, the player can be entertained by the movement of the ball.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the delay member (falling delay plate 3250) is disposed below the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 may be formed so as to slide along a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib protruding from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be disposed above the opening / closing plate 1300. The ball may not contact the rib when the opening / closing plate 1300 that slides is open, and the ball may contact the rib when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. Thereby, the flow speed of the sphere can be changed even above the opening / closing plate 1300 to delay the flow.

  As a method for preventing the sphere from coming into contact with the rib, it is possible to bring the sphere to either the front or rear by tilting in the front-rear direction and arrange the rib on the opposite side.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the flow of the sphere is delayed by the fall delay plate 3250 disposed on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be disposed on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, and a flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be configured by a flow path that curves through the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300. In this case, a ball that passes through the entrance from the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and flows down the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300 so that it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the opening / closing plate 1300 is discharged from the exit again. Since the area where the ball is delayed is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball is delayed until the next round starts even if the interval is long. A sufficient section can be secured.

  It is desirable that the entrance is below the opening / closing plate 1300 and the exit is above the opening / closing plate 1300. In addition, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that the opening of the entrance is narrowed by a part of the opening / closing plate 1300 to such an extent that the passage of the sphere can be prevented. In this case, the opening / closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening / closing plate 1300 is open.

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described in which the sphere is decelerated by moving the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side. It is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extension board part 3251 may become so gentle that it goes downstream. In this case, the component of gravity acceleration in the flow-down direction of the sphere becomes small, and the sphere can be decelerated.

  The acceleration / deceleration change may be reversed. When the sphere accelerates toward the downstream, it is possible to prevent a continuous ball from being formed on the fall delay plate 3250.

  In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the drop delay plate 3250 is disposed below the opening / closing plate 1300 so that only the sphere that has passed through the opening / closing plate 1300 contacts the opening / closing plate 1300. It is not limited to. For example, a front / rear slide type opening / closing plate is open in a state where a ball enters a pocket in which a prize opening is arranged, and in a closed state, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. Ribs that can come into contact with the plate when it reaches the downstream side of the plate may be arranged. A ball that enters the pocket as it is does not come into contact with the rib. In this case, since the sphere can be delayed on the upper surface of the open / close plate in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the sphere from moving up and down with the operation of the open / close plate.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted at the drop position Pf3 and the sphere falls vertically below the detection sensor 1240 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position passing through the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, and a through-hole through which a sphere passing rightward through the detection sensor 1240 can pass is formed, and the sphere is discharged from the through-hole. You may make it. In this case, even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the opened state in a state where the ball is disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240, the ball can be disposed above the opening / closing plate 1300.

  This is different from the second fall delay plate 7260 described above in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position that passes through the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the ball that has dropped and landed on the fall delay plate 3250 immediately before the detection sensor 1240 is directly to the right (the detection sensor The ball that has flowed down to the second fall delay plate 7260 due to the same drop once flows down to the left (side away from the detection sensor 1240) and then falls again to the fall delay plate 3250. To reach. That is, the period during which the flow of the sphere is delayed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and the path through which the sphere flows are different.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the flow path from which the balls that have entered from the second entrance 640 and each of the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a flow down joins the storage passage 1231 and the number of entrances is related. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sphere may be allowed to flow into the storage channel 1231 by automatic supply. In this case, it is possible to create a situation where a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case has been described where, in a high-probability state, the profit that the player can obtain decreases as the number of lotteries for winning the jackpot increases. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the profit that the player can obtain may be increased as the number of lottery times until winning the jackpot is increased. In this case, the profits obtained with the jackpot acquired in a short time are small, and the profits obtained with the jackpot acquired over a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be made uniform.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 and the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is changed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an operation member that operates in the storage channel 1231 corresponding to the number of storages and changes the number of storable balls of the storage channel 1231 may be provided. In this case, since the operation member moves depending on the number of storage regardless of the drive timing of the drive device 1500, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the operation timing of the operation member being different from normal.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is changed by the interference member 6930 forming an overhanging state is not limited to this. For example, the portion (particularly the U-shaped portion) forming the storage channel 1231 is moved in the channel extending direction (left-right direction) to change the channel length of the storage channel 1231. May be. In this case, even if the movement is performed in advance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice whether or not the movement has occurred because of the small movement amount. Therefore, it is possible to form a game where the player notices the movement of the member (change in the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) only after the ball is stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be increased. Can be improved.

  Note that the movement of the member may be performed by the driving force of the solenoid, or only the switching of the movement may be performed by the driving device, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 protrudes in a state where a predetermined number of spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the overhanging state may be formed before the ball starts to enter the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 can be seven. In addition, a pattern that forms an overhanging state after the sphere is stored and a pattern that forms an overhanging state before the sphere starts to enter the storage channel 1231 may be mixed for each round. In this case, it is possible to switch between a round in which the number of storage is 7 and a round in which the number of storage is 9 by a single member.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the interference member 6930 may be changed to an overhanging state in the middle of discharging the sphere from the storage channel 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing at which the sphere is discharged and the timing at which the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the mode of discharging the sphere can be formed in a plurality of patterns.

  In the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is viewed as an auxiliary, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be opened / closed, and the opening / closing plate 8300 may be configured as a fixed plate. In this case, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be provided with a flow path for dropping a ball from vertically above to prevent the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 from passing to the left. In this case, a limited number of excess winnings can be allowed based on the continuous ball mode.

  Further, for example, for each round game R, the opening / closing mode of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 may be switched between long-term opening and repeated short-opening. In this case, the detection sensor 1240 detects and closes at the end of the round game R, or closes as an operation pattern before being detected by the detection sensor 1240, and passes through the detection sensor 1240 while it is closed. Is detected, it is possible to switch whether the round game R ends and the next release does not occur. In this case, the possibility of over-winning is lower in the case of repeated short-opening than in the case of long-term opening, so the possibility of occurrence of over-winning will differ depending on the operating pattern. Can do.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are driven by the same driving device has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a dedicated drive device may be provided, and control may be performed independently.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the state of the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is changed to the open state, the opening / closing plate 8300 rotates in a manner that rises forward, and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is directed leftward. Although the case where it was comprised so that it might rotate in the aspect which approaches the opening-and-closing plate 8300 from the upper side was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the rotation axes of both the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 are made parallel (for example, the longitudinal axis), and the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 face each other (for example, one is downward and the other is upward). You may make it operate | move. In this case, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can produce an effect of sandwiching a sphere with a change in state.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate 8300 includes the ball entry preventing portion 1331 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 may be omitted. In this case, since the opening / closing plate 8300 does not close the detection sensor 1240 regardless of the state, the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be used as a member for restricting the guidance of the sphere to the detection sensor 1240. Moreover, for example, the front part of the ball entry preventing part 1331 may be provided so as to be recessed on the back side. In this case, it is possible to lengthen the period from when the state of the opening / closing plate 8300 starts toward the closed state to when the passage of the sphere of the detection sensor 1240 is disabled.

  In the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the opening / closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 have been described as members for allowing the passage of a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. No. For example, by omitting the entrance prevention unit 1331, the passage of the ball to the first specific prize opening 1000a is allowed to be switched only by the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340, and the opening / closing plate 8300 allows the ball to enter the auxiliary entrance port. It may be interpreted that the ball is sent toward 9111 or the first out port 66. That is, the opening / closing plate 8300 only has a role of guiding the ball to the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 in the open state, and whether or not the ball is guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a is switched depending on the state of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340. May be interpreted. In this case, the attention of the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 can be improved as compared with the attention of the opening / closing plate 8300.

  In the ninth embodiment, a case is described in which a plurality of members movable on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a are provided and a ball is caused to flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 by configuring a driving mode in which one side is operated. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable member is a single member (for example, the opening / closing plate 1300), and the interference member 6930 is controlled to be in an overhanging state corresponding to the timing at which the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, thereby closing the opening / closing plate 1300. The ball discharge from the storage channel 1231 in the state may be suppressed, or by setting a short period during which the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed (time required for one ball to be discharged from the discharge port 1150) ), The discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 may be suppressed.

  Although the case where the auxiliary entrance 9111 is configured as a general winning entrance has been described in the ninth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be configured as a winning opening related to a special symbol lottery. In this case, the special symbol 2 is configured to be able to win the lottery of the special symbol 2 by configuring the ball to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 based on the control that changes in preference to the special symbol 1. It is possible to suppress the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 immediately after the end.

  In the said 9th Embodiment, although the rolling plate 9112 was comprised as a fixed board, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the state changes between a state where the rolling plate 9112 is retracted from the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state where it does not collide with the game ball) and a state where the rolling plate 9112 protrudes toward the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state where it collides with the game ball). The movable plate may be configured so as to be driven and controlled. In this case, various modes are exemplified as the operation pattern. For example, a constant operation may be performed after the power is turned on, or a predetermined operation starting from the start of the jackpot game may be used.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the operation speed of the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released is substantially constant (depending on the return mode of the return spring of the solenoid 1510) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a damper that applies a load to the power transmission member 5400 may be disposed after the auxiliary transmission member 8340 is closed during the return operation of the power transmission member 5400. In this case, since the period during which the open / close plate 8300 is maintained in the open state after the auxiliary open / close member 8340 is in the closed state can be extended, the one-side open control can be facilitated.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the entrance to the auxiliary entrance 9111 is switched on the assumption that the opening / closing plate 8300 changes its state toward the open state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which balls can enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 at a predetermined rate during the period in which the opening / closing plate 8300 is kept closed. For example, another movable object having a constant operation may be provided, and a ball may collide with the movable object, thereby causing the auxiliary entrance 9111 to enter.

  In the tenth embodiment, the operation of the movable member 10181 causes the spheres to be discharged from the middle of the storage flow path 1231 so that more than the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 can pass through the first specific prize opening 1000a. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the volume of the storage channel 1231 may be configured to be variable. In this case, the number of spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made to correspond to the number of spheres that have passed through the first specific prize opening 1000a, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  In the first control example, the case where the periphery of the first variable prize winning device 6000 is brightly lit based on the operation of the operation button 300 and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the brightly lit place does not have to be in the vicinity of the first variable winning device 6000, and may be a wide range including the first variable winning device 6000 (such as the center frame 86).

  Various means are exemplified as means for changing the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b. For example, a predetermined clock pulse generation circuit is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, and lighting mode data is transmitted to the lamp control device 227 at the rising edge of the clock pulse, corresponding to the data already transmitted at the falling edge of the clock pulse. The lamp may be turned on. In this case, when the light is turned off, data corresponding to the turn-off may be transmitted to the lamp control device 227. A combination with a latch may also be used.

  Further, a plurality of types of lighting pattern tables may be facilitated in advance, and the lighting mode of the lamp control device 227 may be switched by switching the tables. Further, the lighting mode may be switched by combining this lighting pattern table and the above clock. Further, the display mode may be changed by setting a command, or control may be performed using a serial port driver.

  The intensity of light emission of the lamp control device 227 may be based on a so-called dynamic lighting system (a lighting system that produces a difference in brightness by changing the time interval between lighting and extinguishing), or may be based on the level of voltage.

  In the first control example, the case has been described where the transmission lamp 227b is kept on when the operation effect is successful. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the operation button 300 is pressed, the transmission lamp 227b may be turned on for a short period (for a moment). In this case, attention to the storage flow path 1231 can be improved. Further, based on the success of the operation effect, instead of lighting the lamp, for example, how many remaining balls should be entered into the storage channel 1231 may be notified.

  In the first control example, when five or more spheres are stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 and the interference member 6930 is retracted by operating the operation button 300, the sphere flows into the specific region 4830. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is four or less, and the interference member 6930 is in a retracted state, so that a general winning opening is provided at a position where the stored ball can pass. You may do it. In this case, the interference member 6930 can be configured as a so-called “holding device”.

  In the first control example, the case where the number of balls to be entered in the storage channel 1231 is notified by display in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the round in which the operation effect is executed may be advanced by one round, and the number of balls to be entered in the storage channel 1231 in the round game after the round in which the operation effect is executed may be notified. In this case, it is possible to prevent spheres from being excessively stored in the storage channel 1231 before notification.

  Further, in the case of informing the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed, it is insufficient time to reach the number (continuously firing the ball). In such a case, it is desirable to perform the notification in a time that is insufficient). As a result, even if the ball is continuously fired from the start of the round game R, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball is excessively contained in the storage channel 1231 at the notification execution timing.

  In the first control example, the case where the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is the same in the operation effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the number of displays may be controlled to be changeable based on a predetermined condition. As the predetermined condition, for example, the number of special symbol changes required until the jackpot, the score accumulated by the number of games, and the like are exemplified. In this case, for example, by controlling so that the difficulty level of the operation effect is low when the number of changes in the special symbol is large or when the privilege is high, the burden required by the player to the jackpot (the number of changes, The greater the number of games), the greater the profit that the player can obtain from the operation effect.

  Here, as the difficulty level, the difficulty level of the operation effect itself, the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation effect, and the like are exemplified. For example, when the difficulty level of gaining profit after the operation effect is high, for example, the operation effect and the accompanying notification execution timing are the second half of the round game R (a period of time in which a specified number of balls can enter the storage channel 1231) It is illustrated that it is arranged in the latter). In this case, at the notification timing, a situation may occur in which the number of balls that have entered the storage channel 1231 exceeds the number that is reported as the number that should be entered into the storage channel 1231.

  Further, the difficulty level of the operation effect itself may be associated with the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation effect. For example, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is slow, it is easy to perform the operation itself, but since the time elapsed until the operation timing is long, the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 by then is There is a possibility that more balls than the number notified will enter. On the other hand, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is fast, it is difficult to perform the operation itself, but since the time elapsed until the operation timing is short, the number of balls to be entered in the storage channel 1231 by that time. It is possible to prevent a ball exceeding the number notified as

  Since the duration of the remaining round game R varies depending on the notification execution timing, the display effect employed may be controlled to be switchable in accordance with the duration of the remaining round game R. For example, when the duration of the remaining round game R is short, the display effect is constituted by a video that can be finished in a short period of time, and when the remaining round game R is sufficiently long, the video is displayed with a video that continues for a long period of time. An effect may be configured. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent such a problem that the loading of the moving image does not end in the remaining time of the round game R and the round game R ends without being displayed.

  In the first control example, the number of balls that should enter the storage channel 1231 has been described as being nine, which is less than the specified number, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be controlled such that an extremely small number (for example, two) of balls enters the storage flow path 1231 so that the profit obtained by the player is increased. In this case, the player can be prompted to stop the launch of the ball at the start of the round in which the notification is made. At the same time, the third symbol display device 81 or the like may notify such as “Stop firing”.

  In the first control example, the case where the interference member 6930 operates immediately when the operation button 300 is pressed is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the operation effect and the operation timing of the interference member 6930 may be shifted by a predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to prevent the operation button 300 from being operated using the state in the vicinity of the interference member 6930 (the sphere flowing down state) as a guide, and the attention to the operation effect can be improved.

  In the first control example, the timing when the error command is set in S1515 is the timing when the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is executed, and the solenoid 1510 is turned off. If a sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 even after the setting, the discharge from the storage channel 1231 is continued, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, another movable object that restricts the passage of the sphere of the discharge port 1150 is provided, and is driven (excited) to allow the passage of the sphere of the discharge port 1150 when the power is turned on, and an error command is generated. May be controlled to change its state so as to restrict the passage of the sphere. In this case, it is possible to prevent the sphere remaining in the storage channel 1231 from being discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the timing when the error command is generated. When an error command is set in (deceleration due to dirt, etc.), the disadvantage that occurs to the player can be reduced. Thereafter, the error command is canceled by turning off the power, and the power is turned on again, so that the game can be resumed from a state where a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 (a state immediately before the error command is set). .

  Note that the control of the movable object is not limited to the control based on whether or not an error command is set. For example, control may be performed so that the state changes when the power is turned on and off. In this case, for example, when the game cannot be continued due to a sudden power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 from being discharged from the storage channel 1231.

  The control of the movable object may be changed depending on whether or not the RAM 203 is cleared before and after the power is turned off. For example, it is not necessary to be able to resume the game from the state immediately before the error command is set until it is detected that the error command setting is based on fraud and the RAM 203 is cleared. Before the game is resumed, the movable object may be controlled to discharge the ball from the storage channel 1231.

  In addition, the aspect of this movable object is not limited at all. For example, the drive device may be separately provided, and the means for preventing the discharge of the sphere may be diverted from the regulating member 1600, or the interference member 6930 can be maintained in an overhanging state as a process when the power is turned off. The interference member 6930 may be employed as the movable member.

  In the first control example, the control flow is configured based on how many rounds are started in the jackpot medium effect process S2505, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the control is based on the start of a specific effect such as the start of a round game R in which a ball can pass through the specific region 4830 or the start of a round game R in which an operation effect is started. You may make it comprise a flow. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for drastic changes in the control flow, even if the number of rounds in which the production is executed is changed due to specification changes, etc. it can.

  In addition, the control flow is configured so that the flag turned on in the control flow when determined to be the third round in the jackpot effect processing S2505 is turned off in the control flow when determined to be the fifth round. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the control may be performed such that the flag is turned off at the end of the control mode set in the third round, that is, at the end of the round game R in the fourth round. In this case, it is possible to reduce the burden of specification change when adopting a 4-round jackpot game.

  In the second control example, the case where the ball flows down toward the auxiliary entrance 9111 by the drive control in which only the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 is opened / closed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by adopting the opening / closing plate 1300 described in the first embodiment and controlling the solenoid 1510 in a driving (excitation) mode in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept closed for a predetermined period during the round game R, the auxiliary entrance hole The ball may flow down to 9111. In this case, the ball can be made to flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 without dividing the plate for guiding the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Further, in this case, by setting the period for maintaining the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state to be less than 0.2 seconds, the discharge port 1150 is again before the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (in a state of being discharged). The passage of the ball can be restricted. Therefore, the sphere can be caused to flow down to the auxiliary entrance 9111 without reducing the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

  In the second control example, the case where the display mode of the round number display unit 714 and the sub-round display unit 714b is controlled to be switched based on the passage of the standby time TK has been described. It is not limited. For example, it may be controlled to be switched based on the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, by controlling to switch the display based on nine balls stored in the first specific winning opening 1000a (the storage channel 1231 is full in the extended state of the interference member 6930), The player can grasp the change timing of the display mode as the timing when the storage channel 1231 becomes full.

  The determination of the number inside the storage flow path 1231 may be made based on the value of the remaining ball counter 203p, or a separate contact sensor may be provided in the storage flow path 1231 to directly detect the number of balls. Anyway.

  In the second control example, the case where the character “+ Chance” is displayed as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721 at a predetermined timing of a predetermined jackpot type has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. No. For example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the character “+ Chance” may be controlled so as to be able to be displayed as the over-winning possibility increase notification mode 721 during a period when a ball can enter the auxiliary entrance 9111. The character of “+ chance” of the over-winning possibility increase notification mode 721 may be controlled so as to be displayed as a display during a period when it is not possible to enter the ball opening 9111. For example, the characters “+ Chance” may be displayed when the round number display portion 714 is displayed brightly.

  In addition, the character “+ chance” may be continuously displayed over a certain period as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721, or may be displayed so that display and non-display can be switched in a short period. May be.

  In the second control example, it is configured to control whether or not the auxiliary opening / closing member 8340 opens on one side based on the jackpot type and the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the occurrence frequency and occurrence timing of one-side opening may be changed based on the jackpot type or the time elapsed from the start of the jackpot. In this case, it is possible to suppress the launch mode in which the ball is aimed and fired so that the ball reaches the auxiliary open / close member 8340 at the timing when the auxiliary open / close member 8340 is closed (the effect of the launch mode is reduced).

  In the third control example, the case where the sphere remaining in the storage channel 1231 is continuously discharged during the period in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by adopting the interference member 6930 and controlling it to be in the overhanging state at a predetermined timing, it constitutes a case where a sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 while the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state. be able to. Thereby, since the selection of the player's ball launch mode can be complicated, it is possible to prevent the player from playing casually.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Points that will not win more than the target number>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance And a game preventing means for preventing the ball from passing through the entrance in a state where the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance during a predetermined period. Machine A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big prize opening is in the horizontal direction, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection port detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine that operates when triggered by passing through the mouth, and prevents a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means by dropping the ball that was on the operating member during the operation. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of balls rolls on the operating member with unexpected force, extra balls are required between the start of operation of the operating member and the falling of the ball from the operating member. There is a possibility that a certain number of balls or more may pass through the detection port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to make it difficult for a predetermined number of balls or more to pass through the detecting means by the ball preventing means. Therefore, regardless of the magnitude of the momentum of the sphere in the state of being arranged upstream of the entrance, the ease of passage when the sphere passes through the entrance, It can be changed with subsequent spheres. Thereby, it can suppress that the ball | bowl more than a predetermined number passes a detection opening.

  As the entrance prevention means, means for changing the easiness of passage of the entrance of the sphere according to the detection result of the detection means, or means for making the easiness of passage of the entrance of the sphere constant. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1, the entrance prevention means includes: an accommodation means that accommodates a ball that has passed through the entrance; an exit port through which the ball passes when the ball exits from the accommodation means; A discharge switching means that can be switched between a first state in which a sphere can pass and a second state in which the sphere cannot pass through the discharge port, and the storage means is provided between the entrance and the discharge port. The gaming machine A2 is formed with a capacity for accommodating the predetermined number of balls at the maximum.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the storage means is formed with a capacity for storing a predetermined number of balls at maximum between the entrance and the exit, so that the discharge switching If the means is maintained in the second state and the balls are stored in the storage means, the balls stored in the storage means can prevent a predetermined number of balls from passing through the entrance. Accordingly, it is possible to physically prevent a predetermined number of balls from passing through the entrance.

  In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is formed so that the entrance switching means can be maintained in the second state while the discharge switching means is in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the housing unit from the entrance while the ball is being discharged from the housing unit. Note that the operation timings of the discharge switching means and the incoming ball switching means may be the same or different.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming machine A4 is provided with a driving unit that is also used as the discharge switching unit and the ball switching unit.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the combined driving means. Thereby, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the discharge switching means is moved from the first state to the first state after the entrance switching means starts a state change from the second state to the first state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that state changes are ordered in a manner of starting state changes toward two states, and the state changes are completed substantially simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the ball that has entered the housing means after the entrance switching means is in the first state is discharged from the outlet. While preventing (while preventing irregular winning), the ball switching means can be started from the second state before the ball discharge from the discharge port is completed, so the discharge from the discharge port Compared with the case where the operation of the entrance switching means is started after the completion of the game, it is possible to reduce the number of balls passing through the entrance switching means and flowing down the game area to the outlet.

  It should be noted that the order of state changes may be performed by transmitting driving force to each switching means in sequence, or a dedicated driving means is provided for each switching means so as to control the timing. May be.

  Any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5 is provided with a changing means for changing the maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means can be changed by the changing means, so that it is temporarily (for example, in a specific round) It is possible to form a state in which more balls than the number are accommodated in the accommodating means. Thereby, the interest of a player can be improved.

  In addition, it is possible to reconfigure the gaming machine with a predetermined number of numerical values changed using the same shape accommodation means (corresponding to the difference in specifications). Thereby, compared with the case where a shape is made for every specification, development cost can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A6, the entrance is connected to the first entrance and the accommodation means downstream of the first entrance, and the ball that has flowed down the game area is allowed to pass therethrough. A second entrance opening that is switched by the entrance switching means, and when the ball enters the accommodation means from the first entrance, and the accommodation from the second entrance When the ball enters the means, the maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means is changed, and the changing means selectively sets from which entrance the ball can pass. Game machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A6, both the ball that enters from the first entrance and the ball that enters from the second entrance can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, the space required compared with the case where a separate accommodating means is arrange | positioned for each can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A6, the changing means includes an interference means capable of extending to the inside of the accommodating means, and the interference means interferes with a sphere that is projected and stored inside the accommodating means; and the accommodating means The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that it is configured to change the maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means depending on when it is evacuated to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the number of balls accommodated can be changed by changing the volume inside the accommodation means without changing the ball entry path to the accommodation means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the accommodation number without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine A8, the interference means projects from the back side of the gaming area to the inside of the accommodation means, and is configured so that a ball can be arranged on the front side when retracted. Game machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of retraction can be hidden with a ball arranged in front. As a result, the operation of the interference means can be made inconspicuous while no additional shielding member is required.

<Point to hide the number of stored balls AK>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance And a ball entry preventing means for preventing the ball from passing through the entrance when the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance during a predetermined period. Is provided with a storage means for storing a ball that has passed through the entrance, and has a visual aiding means for making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the ball stored in the storage means. AK1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big prize opening is in the horizontal direction, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection port detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine that operates when triggered by passing through the mouth, and prevents a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means by dropping the ball that was on the operating member during the operation. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the visibility downstream of the detection port does not change, there is a problem that the effect effect of the effect by the sphere that has passed through the detection port becomes insufficient, and the attention may be reduced. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AK1, since at least a part of the sphere accommodated in the accommodation means is difficult to visually recognize by the visual recognition difficulty means, the production varies depending on the number of spheres accommodated in the accommodation means. In the case of adopting a mechanism that causes the occurrence of the problem, the possibility that the player's expectation of the effect to occur is consistent with the effect to occur can be reduced. Thereby, the attention power with respect to the said production can be improved.

In the gaming machine AK1, when the ball comes out of the housing means, a discharge port through which the ball passes, a first state in which the ball can pass through the discharge port, and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port A discharge switching means that can be switched at a time, wherein the storage means is formed with a capacity for storing the predetermined number of balls at a maximum from the entrance to the discharge opening. AK2
According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AK1, a ball can be stored in the storage means, so that the period during which the effect by the ball can be maintained can be extended.

  In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the gaming machine AK3 is configured to change the operation of the visual recognition difficulty unit based on establishment of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the player's attention to the establishment of the predetermined condition can be improved.

  In addition, as an aspect of a predetermined condition, it is not limited at all. For example, as a predetermined condition, it may be adopted that an operation means that can be operated by the player is detected as being operated by the player at a predetermined timing. In this case, the degree of deviation between the operation timing instructed by the display means and the actual operation timing is detected, and the degree of change in the operation of the visual hindrance means is changed according to the magnitude. Also good. For example, it may be changed so that the visibility of the sphere accommodated in the accommodating means is improved when the degree of deviation is smaller than when the degree of deviation is large. In this case, the player's willingness to operate the operation means can be improved. The reverse is also possible.

  Further, for example, as a predetermined condition, it may be adopted that a ball has passed through a predetermined entrance. In this case, for example, the degree of change in the operation of the visual hindrance means may be changed according to the number of spheres that have passed through a predetermined entrance within a predetermined period. For example, you may make it change so that the visibility of the ball | bowl accommodated in the accommodating means may become so good that the number of the spheres which passed the entrance hole increases. In this case, the player can be motivated to fire more balls. The reverse is also possible. In this case, since the adjustment of the launch intensity of the sphere can be made eagerly, it is possible to suppress a random game.

<Points to reduce the useless balls in the interval while suppressing overwinning>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance The delay means for delaying the flow of the sphere at the upstream position of the entrance when the entrance switching means is in the second state, compared to the case where the entrance switching means is in the first state. A gaming machine B1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big prize opening is in the horizontal direction, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection port detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine that operates when triggered by passing through the mouth, and prevents a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means by dropping the ball that was on the operating member during the operation. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the ball dropped from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the outlet, is it possible to launch the ball so that a ball falling from the operating member does not occur? Depending on whether or not (the level of the player's launching technique), there was a problem that some of the actual balls were generated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the ball switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream position of the ball entrance is not guided to the ball entrance, the delay means acts. By delaying the flow of the sphere, it is possible to easily place the sphere at the upstream position of the entrance, until the entrance switching means switches to the first state. If the entrance switching means is in the first state while there is a ball upstream of the entrance, the ball is guided to the entrance. Thereby, since the influence which the player's launching technology has on the actual number of balls can be reduced, a game machine friendly to beginners can be configured.

  The mode of the delay means is not limited. For example, it may be constituted by a horizontally long member that supports the sphere from below, and may be a drop restricting means that restricts the fall to the end, or may be a protruding means formed from a protrusion that decelerates the sphere by contact.

  In the gaming machine B1, the delay means increases the degree of delay in a state where the ball is arranged on the downstream side as compared with the case where the ball is arranged on the upstream side.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball rises in a state where the ball is arranged on the downstream side of the delay means, so that the attention of the sphere flowing down along the delay means Can be improved.

  In addition, the level of the degree of delay is not limited in any way. For example, the speed of the sphere may be high or low, or the level of the backflow of the sphere when the entrance switching unit is switched from the second state to the first state may be used.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is configured to have a shape in which the distance between the ball disposed on the downstream side and the opening direction of the entrance is larger than the ball disposed on the upstream side. A gaming machine B3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is arranged in a manner in which the distance between the opening direction of the entrance and the ball is increased when arranged on the downstream side of the delay means. Therefore, when the ball rushes down the delay means, it is possible to suppress direct entry into the entrance.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the incoming ball switching unit includes an ascending unit that ascends the game area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delay unit includes the first unit A gaming machine B4, which is arranged below the rising means in the state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the delay means is disposed below the rising means in the first state, so that the ball is removed from the entrance switching means. The ball can be delayed with the player visually recognizing it falling. Thereby, attention with respect to a sphere can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, the gaming machine B5 is provided on the upstream side of the ball flow path with respect to the ascending means, and includes a rising restricting means for restricting the ascending movement of the ball and guiding it in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the rising movement of the ball is restricted by the rising restriction means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction. It is possible to prevent the sphere from flying in an unexpected direction.

  In the gaming machine B5, the gaming machine B6 is provided with a relief entrance that allows the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the ascent restriction means to enter and gives a predetermined profit to the player.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B5, as a benefit different from the benefit that occurs when the ball passes through the entrance due to the ball that is loaded and flew when the ascent means is raised It is possible to give the player a profit generated when the ball passes through the relief entrance. Thereby, even if it is a case where a ball | bowl is removed from the flow-down path | route to a entrance, it can prevent that attention power falls and can improve a player's interest by movement of a ball | bowl.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the delay means includes a variable action section that has a different action on the ball depending on a difference in a manner of reaching the delay means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be varied depending on the mode of arrival at the delay means. Thereby, it can select for every ball | bowl and can give a different effect | action.

  In addition, the mode of the difference in the mode of arrival is not limited. For example, the difference in the arrival position of the sphere with reference to the entrance may be used, or the difference in the flow direction of the sphere until the delay means is reached.

  In the gaming machine B7, the variable action section delays the flow of the ball that has reached the delay means at a position that is separated from the entrance by a predetermined distance or less, and is separated from the entrance by a predetermined distance or more. A gaming machine B8 that does not act on a ball that has reached the delay means at a position.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B7, for a ball that is close to the entrance and is not in time to switch the state of the entrance switching means, the flow of the ball is delayed by the variable action unit. On the other hand, an appropriate game speed can be maintained by making the variable action portion not act on a ball far from the entrance and sufficiently in time for the change of the state of the entrance switching means.

<Points BK that make use of the spheres reached at intervals>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance Compared to a ball that has reached the entrance switching means while the entrance switching means is in the first state, the entrance switching means is in the second state or from the second state. A gaming machine BK1 comprising profit giving means for easily giving a profit to a player with a ball that has reached the entering switching means during the state change to the first state.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big prize opening is in the horizontal direction, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection port detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine that operates when triggered by passing through the mouth, and prevents a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means by dropping the ball that was on the operating member during the operation. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the ball dropped from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the outlet, is it possible to launch the ball so that a ball falling from the operating member does not occur? Depending on whether or not (the level of the player's launching technique), there is a problem that the player may be forced to play carefully because there is a substantial amount of the ball, and there is a possibility that the interest may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, since the profit giving means is adopted, it becomes easy to give the player a profit by the ball reached while the state of the incoming ball switching means changes. Since chances can be included in the magnitude of profits, it is possible to remove the cautiousness from the game and improve the interest.

  In addition, the aspect of the profit provided to the player by the profit providing means is not limited at all. For example, a prize ball may be paid out, a predetermined symbol lottery may be used, a right to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends may be obtained, or the next jackpot may be confirmed.

  For example, if the mode of profit given to the player by the profit granting means is a special symbol 2 lottery, the special symbol 2 of the special symbol 2 can be obtained by causing the ball switching means to arrive at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game. The number of reserved balls can be increased to a predetermined upper limit. As a result, when the game shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, so that the occurrence of the event that the variation of the reserved special symbol 1 is started is suppressed. Can do. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the special symbol 2 lottery is more advantageous for the player, the possibility of unintentionally winning the big symbol in the special symbol 1 lottery and causing a disadvantage to the player is reduced. can do.

  In the gaming machine BK1, the ball is sent to the profit giving means by a load given from the entrance switching means.

  According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which a ball is sent to the profit granting unit when the entrance switching unit is stopped.

  In the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the profit that can be given to the player by the profit giving means is equal to or more than a loss that can occur while the ball switching means maintains the second state. .

  According to the gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the player's attention to the profit giving means can be improved, and the game is performed so that the profit given by the profit giving means can be obtained. Can be directed.

  In any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, the profit giving means is controlled so that a plurality of types of periods maintained in the second state can be selected.

  According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, since the period during which the profit granting unit is maintained in the second state is selected from a plurality of types, the player can It is possible to make it difficult to launch a sphere in anticipation of the change timing to the second state. Therefore, in order to obtain the profit obtained by passing the ball through the profit granting means, it is possible to configure the gameability that the ball must be continuously fired.

<Points to adjust the hit of the jackpot game>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance In the case where the entrance switching means maintains the first state, a ball that can pass through the entrance in association with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance during a period in which the first state was formed previously. A gaming machine C1 comprising a number changing means capable of changing the number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball is open for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner of launching each ball, so it is very big for the winning ball throughout the jackpot game. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the number changing means determines the number of balls passing through the entrance when the entrance switching means forms the first state. Since it can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the entrance when one state is formed, in a series of operation patterns in which the entrance switching means repeatedly forms the first state, the benefits given to the player Adjustments can be made.

  The method for adjusting profits is not limited. For example, if the entrance switching means has formed the first state before, the entrance switching means has entered the first state next time due to having passed a number of balls through the entrance. It may be an aspect that suppresses the number of balls that can be entered into the mouth, or if the ball entry switching means forms the first state next due to a similar event, the player's profit (not limited to balls) For example, an aspect in which acquisition of the right to shift to a high probability state may be employed may be employed.

  In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means includes a storage means for storing a ball that has passed through the entrance, a discharge port through which the ball passes when the ball exits the storage means, and a discharge port for the ball. A discharge switching means that can be switched between a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, and the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes, and the discharge switching means A gaming machine C2 comprising: an operation mode switching unit capable of changing the number of balls discharged from the housing unit due to a difference in operation mode.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the number of balls stored in the storage means can be changed by the operation mode switching means so that the balls remain in the storage means. And the number of residual balls can be made variable. Thereby, it is possible to change the number of spheres required until the accommodating means is filled with spheres, and it is possible to physically change the maximum number of spheres passing through the entrance.

  In addition, the mode of the difference in operation mode is not limited at all. For example, different operation periods are used, and when a plurality of discharge ports are arranged, whether the discharge switching means disposed in which discharge port is operated (operation target) is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C2, the number changing means includes an interval maintaining means for maintaining a discharge interval of the balls from the discharge port.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C2, the discharge interval of the balls from the discharge port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, so that the discharge is performed regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage means. The number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be defined according to the length of the period during which the switching means is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls discharged from the outlet can be changed strictly according to the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot symbol.

  Note that the mode of the interval maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, the flow path shape formed so that the direction of the load received by the sphere immediately before the discharge port from the following sphere is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened may be used as the means, or from the inner wall of the storage means A rib that protrudes and decelerates the ball by applying a load to the ball may be used as the means.

  In the gaming machine C3, the interval maintaining means includes a projecting portion projecting from the inner surface of the housing means in the flow down path of the sphere in the vicinity of the discharge port.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, since the protruding portion protrudes into the flow-down path, the ball close to the discharge port is brought into contact with the protruding portion and decelerated, thereby reducing the distance from the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flow velocity from changing greatly between a sphere having a short distance from the discharge port and to make the sphere flow velocity uniform.

  In the gaming machine C4, the storage means includes a discharge path that causes the balls to flow down in a predetermined flow direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protrusions are staggered from the opposing surfaces constituting the discharge path. The gaming machine C5 is projected at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the protruding portions are alternately projected from the facing surface at predetermined intervals, so that the protruding portion collides with the ball flowing down the discharge path to While being displaced in the vertical direction of the predetermined flow-down direction, it is possible to cause the bumps to collide with the protrusions at predetermined intervals, and the action of decelerating the sphere can be maintained for a long time.

  In the gaming machine C5, the storage means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge path and rolls a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that a flow velocity of a ball is formed to be larger than a flow velocity of a ball flowing down the discharge path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the ball that rolls on the rolling discharge plate part flows down at a higher speed than the ball that flows down the discharge path, so that the ball stored in the storage means Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) at which the balls are discharged from the outlet can be kept constant.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the entrance is provided with a start opening for determining a big hit of a special symbol by passing the ball.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the number of special symbol jackpot determinations and the number of balls entering the entrance can be associated. As a result, the number of payouts in the big hit game can be changed according to the number of special symbol determinations required until the big hit.

  The gaming machine C7 includes a starting ball passage switching unit that switches whether or not a ball that has passed through the starting port can enter the housing unit, and the starting ball passage switching unit operates in conjunction with the incoming ball switching unit. A gaming machine C8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices disposed can be reduced.

  By the way, the discharge port includes a first discharge port and a second discharge port arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means changes the state of the first discharge port and the second discharge port independently. The first discharge port and the second discharge port are arranged in the housing means depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the ball is discharged from the second discharge port (under the same conditions). It may be arranged at a position where the number of remaining spheres can be changed.

  In this case, since the number of spheres remaining in the storage means can be changed depending on whether the sphere is discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port, the flow-down speed of the sphere flowing down the storage device has changed. Even in this case, the number of spheres discharged from the storage means can be maintained.

  In addition, arrangement | positioning of a 1st discharge port and a 2nd discharge port is not limited at all. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodating means and the other may be arranged at an intermediate position of the accommodating means, or both may be arranged at the lower end and a branch channel for distributing spheres may be arranged upstream thereof. Anyway.

  Moreover, the operation | movement aspect of a 1st discharge port and a 2nd discharge port is not limited. For example, one of them may be opened, or both may be opened. When both are opened, the time required to discharge the same number of balls from the storage means can be shortened as compared with the case of discharging the balls from a single discharge port. Thereby, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls discharged from the out mouth during the jackpot game can be reduced.

  By the way, the first discharge port may be disposed at a lower end portion of the housing means, and the second discharge port may be disposed upstream of the first discharge port.

  In this case, when the ball is discharged from the second discharge port, the ball disposed between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is used as the storage means regardless of the period during which the second discharge port is in the first state. Can be held. Therefore, even if there is a variation in the number of balls stored in the storage means, the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls can be easily maintained constant. In addition, even if the number of shots of the ball is reduced due to clogging of the ball or the like, it is possible to easily form a state in which the ball remains in the housing means.

  Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on the downstream side branched at the lower end portion of the housing means.

  In this case, from the state where the same number of balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to switch from which outlet the last discharged balls are discharged by the operation mode of the discharge switching means. It can be made difficult to grasp the discharge mode of the sphere from the behavior at the start. That is, for example, when the profit given to the player changes depending on which outlet the ball to be discharged last is discharged from, the attention to the flow-down mode of the ball can be improved.

<Directing as if the round has changed during the round>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance And an open state switching means configured to be able to switch between a period during which a ball is likely to pass through the entrance and a period during which the ball is difficult to pass when the entrance switching means maintains the first state. A gaming machine CK1 characterized by this.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball is open for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the ball entering mode into the big prize opening in each round is the same, so there is a problem that it may be difficult to sufficiently improve the attention to the big prize opening. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CK1, the attention of the ball entering the entrance to the entrance can be improved by the switching means during the open state while the entrance switching means maintains the first state. .

  In addition, the aspect of an open state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the period may be changed by changing the operation mode of the movable object arranged on the upstream side of the detection means, or the period may be changed based on the number of balls entering the detection means. May be.

  In the gaming machine CK1, the gaming machine CK2 is provided with notifying means for notifying a change in profit given to the player while the entrance switching means maintains the first state.

  According to the gaming machine CK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CK1, if the notification of the notification means is confirmed, it is determined that the profit obtained by the player has changed while the ball switching means maintains the first state. Can grasp. Therefore, the game mode can be adjusted by notification from the notification means.

  Note that the manner of notification by the notification means is not limited in any way. For example, while presenting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, it may be notified that a break is made in the middle of the round game R (the screen is switched or the sound is output), or the round number display is turned off. It may be notified as if a new round game R has been started so as to display a sub-round. In any case, assuming that the start timing of the round game R and the notification timing by the notification means are game breaks, the number of rounds of jackpot game that exceeds the maximum number of rounds of control (for example, 16 rounds) By being set (for example, 20 breaks), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine CK2, it is configured to easily give a predetermined profit to the player based on the fact that more balls than can be passed through the entrance are guided to the entrance switching means. A gaming machine CK3 comprising a conditional profit granting means.

  According to the gaming machine CK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CK2, it is possible to prevent all of the balls from becoming useless when the balls exceeding the number that can be passed through the entrance are launched. Thereby, the interest improvement to the player by the production and the substantial profit (payment of prize balls) can be linked.

  In addition, you may perform the alert | report which instruct | indicates to continue firing so that it may be visually recognized that the ball no longer passes through the entrance and the player will not stop firing. Various modes are exemplified as the notification mode in this case. For example, a direct notification such as “Continue launching” may be used, or a notification that suggests the number of launches in a folding manner such as “Large chance if 5 are mounted” may be used. (In this case, when there is no sphere, it is not visible, and when there is a sphere, a light beam that displays some figure or picture so that it can be seen is radiated to a predetermined position where the sphere accumulates near the entrance switching means. Is desirable).

<Points to adjust the hit of the jackpot game for each round>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance Switching driving means for switching and driving the incoming ball switching means to the second state when a predetermined number of balls have passed through the incoming port while the incoming ball switching means is in the first state; And an adjusting means configured to be capable of adjusting an excess number of balls entering the entrance based on a specified number of game machines DK1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball is open for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner of launching each ball, so it is very big for the winning ball throughout the jackpot game. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DK1, the adjustment means can adjust the excess entry into the entrance, so that the profit given to the player when the ball passes through the entrance changes in a short time. It can be leveled for a long time.

  In addition, as an aspect of adjustment of an excess ball, it is not limited at all. For example, the ball switching means may be adjusted so that an equivalent excess ball can be expected every time, based on a prescribed number that can pass through the ball inlet during the first state, or a predetermined number (single or plural). ) With respect to the first over-throwing ball that occurs when the first state is entered at the timing, the second over-throwing ball that occurs when the first state is entered at the other (plural or single) timing is reduced. The first excess entry and the second excess entry may be adjusted so as to balance, and the period when the entry switching means is in the first state is short and long (the big hit game and the small hit game) The game may be adjusted so that the number of over-throwing balls is differentiated and balanced.

  In addition, the entrance switching means may be configured by a single arrangement or a plurality of arrangements.

  The gaming machine DK1 includes a load application unit configured to be able to apply a load directed to the detection unit to a ball arranged at a predetermined position upstream of the detection unit in the process of switching drive by the switching drive unit. A gaming machine DK2 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine DK2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine DK1, a ball arranged on the upstream side of the detecting means can be easily detected by the detecting means by the action of the load applying means.

  The number of spheres to which a load is applied by the load applying means is not limited at all. For example, one or more may be used.

  In the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, as the state at the start of the switching drive, a post-drive entry ball that can be switched between an allowable state that allows passage of the ball to the entrance and a restricted state that restricts passage of the ball. A gaming machine DK3 comprising a state switching means.

  According to the gaming machine DK3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, whether or not the ball can pass to the entrance regardless of the flow mode of the ball to the entrance and the operation speed of the entrance switching means Can be defined by the entry state switching means after driving, so that it is possible to easily adjust the degree of excess entry of the balls into the entrance.

  In any one of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, a load applied from the ball to the entrance switching unit is applied in a direction along a direction in which the entrance switching unit is driven during the switching drive. Machine DK4.

  According to the gaming machine DK4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, it is possible to suppress a problem that the state of the entrance switching means is prevented from changing to the second state by a load from the ball. .

  In addition, as an application mode of the load from the sphere, for example, the incoming ball switching unit is configured to be driven in such a manner that the incoming ball switching unit falls (drops) downward by switching driving, and the own weight of the ball is applied to the incoming ball switching unit. Cases are illustrated.

<Points to adjust the hit of the jackpot game for each round>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance A switching drive means for switching and driving the incoming ball switching means to the second state when a predetermined number of balls have passed through the incoming opening while the incoming ball switching means is in the first state; After the start of the switching drive by the switching drive means, a post-drive entry ball state switching means capable of forming an allowable state that allows passage of the sphere to the entrance and a restriction state that restricts passage of the sphere, A gaming machine D1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball is open for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner of launching each ball, so it is very big for the winning ball throughout the jackpot game. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the post-driving entry state switching means switches whether or not a ball can enter after the entrance is closed by the switching drive means, so extra balls can enter. The timing can be reduced, and the number of winning balls throughout the jackpot game can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine D1, the entrance includes a first entrance and a second entrance, and the post-drive entry state switching means forms the restricted state at the first entrance. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the permissible state is formed at the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the prescribed number of cases when the ball passes through the first entrance and when the ball passes through the second entrance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the entrance switching means to open the entrance.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first entrance has a drop hole on the front side of the opening, and when the entrance switching means starts switching to the second state, the first entrance is from the front side of the opening of the first entrance. Is configured in such a manner that a ball disposed on the upstream side is dropped into the drop hole.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, even when the ball remains upstream of the first entrance, the ball is dropped while the entrance switching means maintains the second state. Can be dropped and moved away from the entrance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent spheres exceeding the specified number from passing through the first entrance.

<Points where balls join the storage channel from multiple winning openings>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance A storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of balls passing through the entrance, and a ball stored in the storage means based on the switching of the entrance switching means to the second state; The gaming machine EK1 is characterized in that the gaming machine EK1 is configured to be capable of switching to the first state before the end of the discharging action by the discharging means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball is open for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner of launching each ball, so it is very big for the winning ball throughout the jackpot game. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EK1, since the discharging action by the discharging means is configured to be able to end with the remaining ball remaining in the receiving means, the number of balls that can be entered at the entrance is related in each round. Can be made. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the difference in prize balls throughout the jackpot game.

  In addition, since the ball can be stored in the storage unit over a period in which the state of the ball switching unit is switched multiple times, the number of balls that can pass through the ball inlet while the ball switching unit is maintained in the first state. More balls can be accommodated in the accommodating means. Thereby, since the standard of the frequency of entering can be notified, the game efficiency of the gaming machine currently playing can be shown to the player.

  The means for indicating the game efficiency is not limited at all. For example, it may be the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the number of balls launched (the number of prize balls / number of balls launched). It may be an index indicating whether or not the ball is passed.

  Note that the number of the entrance, the entrance switching means, and the accommodation means is not limited to one, but may be more than one. In this case, the entrance switching means and the accommodation means may be provided corresponding to each entrance, and the state change of each entrance switching means may occur in order. You may comprise so that a state change may be carried out partially partially simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine EK1, the gaming machine EK2 is configured so that it can be adjusted according to a launch mode of the ball whether the discharging action ends with the ball stored in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine EK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine EK1, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the game of launching the gaming ball toward the entrance.

  In the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the entrance includes at least a first entrance and a second entrance, and the balls that have passed through the first entrance or the second entrance join together. The game machine EK3 is characterized in that the housing means is formed.

  According to the gaming machine EK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the balls that have passed through the first entrance or the second entrance join together inside the accommodation means that can accommodate up to a predetermined number of balls. Accordingly, the number of spheres that can pass through the second entrance can be changed in association with the number of spheres that have passed through the first entrance. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts associated therewith) can be made uniform throughout the game.

  A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance And a receiving means for storing a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the entrance, wherein the entrance includes at least a first entrance and a second entrance, and the first entrance Alternatively, the storage means is formed in such a manner that the balls that have passed through the second entrance are joined.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball is open for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner of launching each ball, so it is very big for the winning ball throughout the jackpot game. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first entrance or the second entrance join together within the housing means that can accommodate up to a predetermined number of balls. The number of spheres that can pass through the second entrance can be changed in association with the number of spheres that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts associated therewith) can be made uniform throughout the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodation means by passing through the first entrance when the accommodation means is empty, and the accommodation by passing through the second entrance. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first entrance is different from the number of balls that can enter the second entrance. It is possible to improve the player's attention to whether or not the entrance is opened.

  In the gaming machine E2, the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance is set to be smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second entrance, and a predetermined upper limit number of balls is discharged when each entrance is closed. The upper limit number is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance, and the first entrance is opened during the opening when the second entrance is opened a plurality of times. A gaming machine E3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E2, the ball that has passed through the second entrance before the opening of the first entrance and the second entrance after the opening of the first entrance. It is possible to vary the substantial profit given to the player by the passed ball.

  That is, when passing through the second entrance before opening the first entrance, even if more than the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance has passed through the second entrance, Since the minute is not discharged and the number of balls after subtracting the remaining amount is accommodated from the first entrance, the number is the same as the number that can be accommodated in the second entrance from the first entrance. The player can only get the same benefits as passing the number of players.

  On the other hand, when passing through the second entrance after opening the first entrance, if more than the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance pass through the second entrance, they are deducted. The player can gain additional benefits.

  The setting of the number of game balls that can be accommodated is performed in various ways. For example, it can be performed by setting the length and thickness of the flow path in which the game balls are accommodated. In addition, the change in the substantial profit given to the player is not limited to the number of prize balls. For example, the substantial profit given to the player can be changed depending on whether or not the ball can pass through a specific area. Can do.

<Points where interference members protrude>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance And an interference means that is arranged in a flow path of the sphere that has passed through the entrance, and that can be switched between an overhanging state capable of interfering with the sphere and a retracted state not interfering with the sphere. A gaming machine F1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball is open for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner of launching each ball, so it is very big for the winning ball throughout the jackpot game. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the interference means is disposed in the flow path of the ball that has passed through the entrance, so that the interference means is maintained in an overhanging state, so that the entrance to the interference means can be maintained. It is possible to prevent the balls from passing through the entrance by blocking the balls in the path. Thereby, the prize ball can be adjusted throughout the jackpot game by the operation mode of the interference means.

  In the gaming machine F1, a gaming machine F2 comprising stopping means for stopping the ball before the interference means in the retracted state of the interference means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the overhanging state with the ball stopped before the interference means, so that the state of the interference means is changed in advance. Compared to, the movement can be hidden by a sphere. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the operation.

  In the gaming machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the sphere that has passed through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the sphere that has passed through the detecting means is passed through. A gaming machine F3 that is configured to be capable of changing the state of the interference means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, since the state of the interference means in the passing state of the stopping means can be configured in a plurality of types, while maintaining the stopping means in the passing state, The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be changed in a plurality of types.

<It is difficult to predict the type of privilege from the number of stored items>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance , Provided with operating means arranged in the flow path of the ball that has passed through the entrance, and capable of operating in a plurality of operation patterns, and the profit that the player can acquire is changed based on the operation patterns of the operating means A gaming machine FK1 that is configured to be possible.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball is open for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in each round is determined based on the situation on the upstream side of the big prize opening, which may reduce the attention to the downstream of the big prize opening. There was a problem that there was.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FK1, the operating means is arranged on the downstream side of the entrance, and the profit that can be obtained by the player can be changed by the operating pattern of the operating means. The attention to the downstream side can be improved.

  The gaming machine FK1 includes operating means that can be operated by a player, and the operation pattern of the operating means is configured to be changeable by the player operating the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine FK2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine FK1, the operation pattern of the operating means can be changed by the player operating the operating means, so that the player's willingness to operate the operating means is improved. Can be made.

  In the gaming machine FK2, a first privilege and a second privilege are set as a benefit given to the player based on the passing of the game ball through the entrance, and the first privilege is set according to the operation mode of the operation means. The gaming machine FK3 is characterized in that the manner of acquiring the privilege and the second privilege changes.

  According to the gaming machine FK3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine FK2, the profit obtained by the player is directly changed by the operation mode of the operation means, so that the player's willingness to operate the operation means can be improved. it can.

  In addition, the aspect of a 1st privilege and a 2nd privilege is not limited at all. For example, the first privilege may be set as payout of a prize ball, the second privilege may be set as a probability change state after a jackpot game (as a gaming machine with a V probability change), or the second privilege may be determined as a jackpot decision. It may be set (as a small hit game in a type 1 type 2 mixing machine).

  In addition, the relationship between a 1st privilege and a 2nd privilege is not limited at all. For example, it may have a large or small relationship, may have a different property, or may have a conflicting relationship.

  Here, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege is a payout of the winning ball, and the first bonus is compared with the number of balls to be paid out in the first privilege. 2 If the number of payout balls in the award is greater, or the profits given to the player in the first award and the second award are both transitions to the jackpot gaming state, compared to the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the first award And the case where there are many rounds in a 2nd privilege etc. is illustrated.

  Further, as another characteristic, for example, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is awarded to the profit given to the player in the first privilege, while the profit given to the player in the second privilege is awarded. In the case of a payout of a ball or when the profit given to the player in the first privilege is an indication of the gaming state, the player is awarded the maximum payout ball in the second privilege. The case where it is is illustrated.

  In addition, as a conflicting relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first benefit relates to the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (and the player's profit such as the number of changes until the next jackpot) Information), the profit given to the player in the second benefit is the state of the game after the end of the jackpot game (and information related to the player's profit such as the number of changes until the next jackpot) The case of being extinct is exemplified.

<Point 1 makes it difficult to predict the possibility of winning a V prize from the attacker's actions>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance A ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance, and the entrance Profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state capable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, and a second state incapable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, In a game machine comprising a profit switching means that can be switched in the operating mode with the same condition for maintaining the ball switching means in the first state, when the ball can pass through the profit granting means, and the profit The grant means can be switched between when the ball cannot pass. Game machine G1, wherein.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ball that has passed through the big prize opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution There is a gaming machine (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538, for example). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the big prize opening during the period in which the distribution unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is the operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided. In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, in the first place, the ball does not enter the big prize opening. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball going to the grand prize opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of focusing on the behavior of the ball that entered the big prize opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the operation mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball switching means in the first state are the same, the ball can pass through the profit granting means and the ball passes through the profit granting means. Since it is possible to switch between when it is impossible, it does not block the ball entering the entrance. Thereby, the attention with respect to the sphere which goes to the entrance can be maintained.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a stopping unit that is arranged upstream of the profit switching unit and is switched between a stopping state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting unit is stopped and a passing state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting unit is allowed to pass. As the ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the stationary means is switched from the stationary state to the passing state, and a ball that has flowed downstream of the stationary means is the profit switching. A gaming machine G2 characterized by reaching the means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the ball that has passed through the entrance is stopped once by the stopping means arranged upstream of the profit switching means, so that the ball can be profited at an arbitrary timing. Reaching the switching means can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the profit switching unit at an unexpected timing, no matter how the ball passes through the entrance while the ball switching unit is in the first state. it can.

  The gaming machine G2 further includes a period changing unit that changes a period during which the ball flowing down through the stopping unit can reach the profit switching unit after the stopping unit is switched to the passing state. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, the period in which the ball can reach the profit switching means changes after the ball passes the stopping means by the period changing means, so that after the ball passes the stopping means It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game performance of the player, and to improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

  The period changing means may be a means for changing the flow velocity of the sphere passing through the stopping means, a means for delaying a period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state until the sphere starts flowing down, Means for changing the number of balls to be stopped by the stopping means may be used.

  In the gaming machine G3, the period changing means is formed so that the number of balls stopped by the stopping means can be switched in accordance with the benefit given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G3, the profit given to the player can be predicted by the number of balls stopped by the stopping means, so attention to the balls stopped by the stopping means The power can be improved.

  In addition, the means for switching the number of balls stopped by the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be stopped by the stopping means can be changed by a combination of a period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and a period in which the incoming ball switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter.

  That is, for example, when the period during which the stopping means is passed is extremely shortened and immediately after that the period during which the ball switching means is in the first state is extremely shortened, Since the number of spheres flowing down downstream of the stopping means is extremely small, even if a new sphere does not enter from the entrance, a large number of spheres are stopped at the stopping means.

  On the other hand, after taking a sufficiently long period of time to pass the stopping means, immediately after that, when extremely shortening the period of turning the incoming ball switching means to the first state, In addition to the fact that the majority of the spheres flow downstream of the stopping means and no new spheres enter the entrance, there are almost no spheres stopping at the stopping means.

  In this way, by changing the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state and shortening the period during which the incoming ball switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter, the stopping means is stopped regardless of the launch mode of the ball. The number of spheres can be changed.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the entrance switching unit includes setting means for selecting and setting a plurality of types of closing maintenance periods for maintaining the second state, and a predetermined period from the end point of the closing maintenance period The gaming machine G5, wherein the profit switching means is switched to the first state after elapse.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the setting means forms a plurality of periods during which the ball switching means maintains the second state, so that the ball is the stopping means. Since the period until the profit switching means is switched to the first state after passing through is formed in a plurality of types, even if the number of balls stopped by the stopping means is the same, the balls pass the profit giving means It is possible to control whether to pass or not pass. Accordingly, it is possible to continuously improve attention to the flow of the sphere.

  In addition, for example, a period in which the entrance switching means is maintained in the first state for a period long enough to allow a specified number of balls to pass through the entrance, and immediately after that, the entrance switching means is maintained in the second state. When the setting means selects the closing maintenance period in an extremely short form (shorter than the ball that has passed through the stopping means reaches the profit switching means), the incoming ball switching means immediately enters the first state. By changing the state of the profit switching means from the time, it is possible to arbitrarily set a period from when the stopping means is in the passing state to when the profit switching means is in the first state. Therefore, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed through the stopping means passes through the profit granting means regardless of the timing at which the ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. Thereby, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not a sphere that has passed through the stopping means passes through the profit granting means, regardless of the number of spheres that stop at the stopping means and the mode (for example, timing) of the stopping.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the entrance switching means is not a first operation caused by a prescribed number of balls entering the entrance, but a second operation caused by the passage of a prescribed time. A gaming machine G6 comprising intentional selection means for intentionally selecting the game machine G6.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, by the action of the intentional selection means, the switching operation of the ball switching means is limited to the operation at a preset time, It is possible to eliminate the randomness of switching due to the passage mode of the ball at the entrance. Accordingly, it is possible to secure a large amount of time during which the ball is not allowed to enter while the profit switching unit is in the first state.

  In addition, as an intentional selection means, it is illustrated that the sphere does not pass through the entrance by passing less than the specified number of spheres. This can be realized by intentionally clogging the ball that is passing through the entrance (not allowing it to pass).

  A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance A ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance, and the entrance Profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state capable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, and a second state incapable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, In a gaming machine comprising a profit switching means that can be switched at a flow rate, a flow mode determination means for determining whether the flow mode of the ball to the profit grant means is normal, and a notification based on a determination result by the flow mode determination means And a notification means for performing the game GK1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ball that has passed through the big prize opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution There is a gaming machine (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538, for example). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that not a few players try to obtain fraudulent profits due to fraudulent acts that give a load (magnetic force or impact) to the ball before reaching the allocating section. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine GK1, since it is notified by the notification means when abnormality is determined, fraudulent acts can be suppressed. In other words, even if the flow of the ball is illegally interrupted, there is a high possibility that the illegal profit cannot be obtained by the notification. Deterrence effect against "illegal persons" can be exerted.

  In addition, the aspect of abnormality determination is not limited at all. For example, after the profit switching unit is switched to the first state, the timing at which the sphere is completely discharged is set, and the notification may be performed by not detecting the discharge of the sphere at that timing. In this case, since the notification can be made before the ball passes the profit switching means, it is possible to make it less likely that the player will be dissatisfied.

  In the gaming machine GK1, the flow-down mode determination means makes a determination based on the number of balls arranged between the entrance and the profit granting means.

  According to the gaming machine GK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine GK1, it is possible to determine whether or not the flowing-down mode of the ball is abnormal without depending on the accumulation state of the gaming ball from the entrance to the profit granting means. it can.

  In the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, the gaming machine GK3 is provided with an arrangement suppressing unit that suppresses a change in the arrangement of balls on the upstream side of the profit providing unit after the notification unit performs notification.

  According to the gaming machine GK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, the change in the arrangement of the balls can be suppressed by the arrangement suppressing means, so that the player suffers when the game is resumed when an unexpected error occurs. Loss can be minimized.

<Point 2, which makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize can be won from the attacker's action, has a paca>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance A ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance, and the entrance Profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state capable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, and a second state incapable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, A gaming machine H1 comprising: a profit switching means that can be switched at a time; and a mode in which a ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed by an operation mode of the ball switching means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ball that has passed through the big prize opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution There is a gaming machine (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538, for example). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the big prize opening during the period in which the distribution unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is the operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided. In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, in the first place, the ball does not enter the big prize opening. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball going to the grand prize opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of focusing on the behavior of the ball that entered the big prize opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the manner in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed by the operation mode of the ball switching means while maintaining a state where the ball can pass through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control in what manner the sphere reaches the profit switching means.

  In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine H2 is configured such that a number of balls related to the time when the entrance switching unit is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching unit.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the player can determine how the ball is guided to the profit switching means from the length that the ball switching means is maintained in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player with respect to the operation of the entry switching means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a start state in which a ball is started to be sent to the profit switching unit is formed while the ball switching unit is switched from the first state to the second state. Game machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the ball is sent to the profit switching means for the first time in the start state, the operation of the entrance switching means is stopped immediately before the start state, Since it can also be set to the first state again, it is possible to form a game that the ball feeding to the profit switching means is not always started just because the operation is started from the first state. Thereby, since it becomes necessary to confirm directly whether the sphere reaches the profit switching means, it is possible to improve attention to the profit switching means.

  A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance A ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance, and the entrance Profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state capable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, and a second state incapable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, A state change means configured to change the state of the incoming ball switching means to be in a state changeable state by detecting passage of a ball. Based on the passing frequency of the ball to the profit switching means Gaming machine HK1, characterized in that it is configured to be switchable, the number of balls that can be spherical.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ball that has passed through the big prize opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution There is a gaming machine (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538, for example). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the big prize opening during the period in which the distribution unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is the operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided. In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, in the first place, the ball does not enter the big prize opening. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball going to the grand prize opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of focusing on the behavior of the ball that entered the big prize opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine HK1, the number of balls that can be sent to the profit switching means is configured to be switchable based on the passing frequency of the balls to the state changing means. Can be changed. Thereby, attention to the behavior of the sphere that has passed through the entrance can be improved.

  In the gaming machine HK1, when the frequency of entering the state changing means is higher than a predetermined frequency, an upper limit value of the number of balls sent to the profit switching means during a predetermined period is set. Machine HK2.

  According to the gaming machine HK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine HK1, it is possible to escape from the gaming property that it is better to pass the ball through the state changing means.

  In the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, the gaming machine HK3 is configured such that a ball that has passed through the entrance in a plurality of opening / closing of the entrance switching unit can be sent to the profit switching unit. .

  According to the gaming machine HK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, it is possible to relate the entrance to the entrance when the entrance switching means is opened or closed in a plurality of opening and closing modes to the delivery mode to the entrance switching means. Therefore, the variation of the pitching mode can be increased as compared with the case where the pitching mode to the pitching switching unit is independent by one opening and closing of the pitching switching unit.

  In addition, how to count the number of times of opening / closing the entrance switching means is not limited at all. For example, it may be counted by the number of operations of the ball switching unit, or may be counted by the number of occurrences of a combination of the operations of the ball switching unit (for example, a preset operation pattern such as a small hit game).

  Operation means that can be operated by the player, a storage state for temporarily storing a ball that has entered the ball switching means, and a passing state that allows the player to flow toward the profit granting means by releasing the storage of the ball And a temporary storage means that can be switched between, and the state of the temporary storage means is configured to be switchable by operation of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine HP1, since the player can switch the state of the temporary storage means at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the operation of the operation means.

  In the gaming machine HP1, the gaming machine HP2 is characterized in that the profit given to the player is selected from the first privilege or the second privilege according to the operation timing of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine HP2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine HP1, the player's attention to the operation of the operating means can be improved.

  In addition, the relationship between a 1st privilege and a 2nd privilege is not limited at all. For example, it may have a large or small relationship, may have a different property, or may have a conflicting relationship.

  Here, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege is a payout of the winning ball, and the first bonus is compared with the number of balls to be paid out in the first privilege. 2 If the number of payout balls in the award is greater, or the profits given to the player in the first award and the second award are both transitions to the jackpot gaming state, compared to the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the first award And the case where there are many rounds in a 2nd privilege etc. is illustrated.

  Further, as another characteristic, for example, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is awarded to the profit given to the player in the first privilege, while the profit given to the player in the second privilege is awarded. In the case of a payout of a ball or when the profit given to the player in the first privilege is an indication of the gaming state, the player is awarded the maximum payout ball in the second privilege. The case where it is is illustrated.

  In addition, as a conflicting relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first benefit relates to the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (and the player's profit such as the number of changes until the next jackpot) Information), the profit given to the player in the second benefit is the state of the game after the end of the jackpot game (and information related to the player's profit such as the number of changes until the next jackpot) The case of being extinct is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine HP2, on the basis of the selection of the first privilege, passage of the ball at the entrance is restricted when the entrance switching means is in the first state. Game machine HP3.

  According to the gaming machine HP3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine HP2, the ball is prevented from passing through the entrance regardless of the state of the entrance switching means based on the selection of the first privilege. Therefore, when the player does not want to pass the ball to the entrance, it is not necessary to temporarily stop firing the ball (so-called “stopping”) at the timing. it can. In this case, the player can continuously fire the ball regardless of the state of the ball switching means, so that a desired game can be executed smoothly.

  In the gaming machine HP3, the gaming machine HP4 is controlled so that the game can be continued regardless of the detection time of the ball by the detecting means based on the selection of the first privilege.

  According to the gaming machine HP4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine HP3, it is possible to realize the gameability of restricting the entry by blocking the balls in the detecting means.

  Gaming machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3 G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3 G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3 G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. . Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 3rd symbol display device (part of the notification means)
110 Main controller (part of change means, part of period change means, part of setting means, part of intentional selection means, part of flow-down state determination means)
300 Operation buttons (operation means)
640 Second entrance (part of entrance, start, part of state change means)
640a Electric accessories (part of the ball switching means)
1000a First specific winning entrance (part of entrance entrance, 1st entrance entrance)
1140 Protruding part (part of interval maintaining means, protruding part)
1150 Discharge port (part of entrance prevention means, part of number change means)
1210 Thin plate member (visualization difficulty)
1231 Reservation flow path (part of entrance prevention means, part of number change means, part of post-drive entry state switching means, accommodation means, discharge path, part of adjustment means)
1231a Guide surface (part of interval maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of spacing maintaining means, rolling discharge plate part)
1235 Protruding part (part of spacing maintaining means, protruding part)
1240 Detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Opening and closing plate (part of entrance switching means)
1310 Plate part (lifting means)
1331 Entry prevention part (part of entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 Solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching drive means)
1600, 2600 Restriction member (part of entrance prevention means, part of number changing means, discharge switching means, stopping means, part of arrangement restraining means)
2251 2nd storage flow path (a part of the entrance prevention means, a part of the number change means, a part of the after-drive entry state switching means, the accommodation means, the discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a Second specific winning entrance (part of entrance entrance, 2nd entrance entrance)
2840 Slide plate (part of entrance switching means)
3181 Additional winning entrance (relief entrance)
3182 Curved extension plate (rising restriction means)
3250 Fall delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b End surface (part of drop hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit-giving means)
4850 Sorting device (profit switching means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit granting means)
5900 Departure adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period changing means, part of adjusting means. Part of post-drive entry ball state switching means, part of operating means, part of arrangement suppressing means)
7260 2nd fall delay plate (a part of delay means, variable action part)
8300, 11300 Opening / closing plate (part of ball switching means)
8340 Auxiliary opening / closing member (part of entrance switching means, part of switching means during open state, part of adjustment means, part of load applying means, part of entrance state switching means after driving)
9111 Auxiliary entrance (part of entrance, part of profit granting means, part of conditional profit granting means)
10180 Intermediate discharging device (part of operating means)
11183 2nd additional winning entrance (part of entrance entrance)
11190 Opening / closing means (part of the ball entry state switching means after driving)

Claims (3)

A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance ,
Storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the entrance;
A discharge unit that discharges the ball stored in the storage unit from the storage unit based on the ball switching unit being switched to the second state;
A gaming machine characterized in that the entrance switching means can be switched to the first state before the end of the discharging action by the discharging means.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein whether or not the discharging action ends with leaving the ball stored in the storage means can be adjusted by a launch mode of the ball.   The entrance includes at least a first entrance and a second entrance, and the housing means is formed in such a manner that balls passing through the first entrance or the second entrance join. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that:

Images